Sinumerik 808d advanced руководство

Последние добавленные макеты

Пригласительное на свадьбу

Пригласительное на свадьбу

Подставка для книг, тарелок и другой сувенирной продукции

Подставка для книг, тарелок и другой сувенирной продукции

Значки для украшения георгиевских лент

Значки для украшения георгиевских лент

Звезды с гергиевской лентой

Звезды с гергиевской лентой

Варианты написания слова "Победа"

Варианты написания слова «Победа»

Стол студийный

Стол студийный

Смотреть все

  • Contents

  • Table of Contents

  • Bookmarks

Quick Links

SINUMERIK

SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED

Parameter Manual

Parameter Manual

08/2015

6FC5397-8EP40-0BA1

Preface

Fundamental safety

instructions

Explanation of machine data

and setting data

Machine data

NC setting data

Detailed descriptions of

interface signals

PLC user interface

SINAMICS V70 parameters

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

loading

Related Manuals for Siemens SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED

Summary of Contents for Siemens SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED

  • Page 1
    Preface Fundamental safety instructions Explanation of machine data SINUMERIK and setting data Machine data SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED Parameter Manual NC setting data Detailed descriptions of interface signals Parameter Manual PLC user interface SINAMICS V70 parameters 08/2015 6FC5397-8EP40-0BA1…
  • Page 2
    Note the following: WARNING Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems.
  • Page 3: Preface

    Preface Applicable products This manual is applicable to the following control systems: Control system Software version SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED T (Turning) V4.6.2 SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED M (Milling) V4.6.2 Documentation components and target groups Document Recommended target group Programming and Operating Manual (Turning)

  • Page 4
    EC Declaration of Conformity The EC Declaration of Conformity for the EMC Directive can be found on the Internet at http:// www.siemens.com/automation/service&support. Here, enter the number 67385845 as the search term or contact your local Siemens office. Parameter Manual Parameter Manual, 08/2015, 6FC5397-8EP40-0BA1…
  • Page 5: Table Of Contents

    Table of contents Preface……………………………3 Fundamental safety instructions……………………9 General safety instructions…………………..9 Industrial security……………………9 Explanation of machine data and setting data………………..11 Data in the list……………………11 Overview of the data………………….17 Machine data…………………………21 Display machine data………………….21 General machine data………………….32 Channel-specific machine data………………..110 Axis-specific machine data………………..208 NC setting data……………………….301 Detailed descriptions of interface signals………………..355 General information………………….355…

  • Page 6
    Table of contents PLC user interface……………………….451 Addressing ranges…………………..451 MCP………………………..453 6.2.1 Signals from/to the MCP………………….453 6.2.2 Reading/writing NC data: Job………………..454 6.2.3 Reading/writing NC data: Result………………455 6.2.4 PI service: Job……………………455 6.2.5 PI service: Result…………………….456 Retentive data area………………….456 User Alarms…………………….456 6.4.1 User alarms: Activating………………….456 6.4.2 Variables for user alarms…………………457 6.4.3…
  • Page 7
    Table of contents 6.10.2 HEX values (MD 14512 USER_DATA_HEX)……………481 6.10.3 FLOAT values (MD 14514 USER_DATA_FLOAT)…………..482 6.10.4 User alarm: Configuring (MD 14516 USER_DATA_PLC_ALARM)……..482 6.11 Signals, synchronized actions………………..483 6.11.1 Signals, synchronized actions to channel…………….483 6.11.2 Signals, synchronized actions from channel…………….483 6.11.3 Reading and writing PLC variables………………483 6.12 Axis actual values and distance-to-go………………484 6.13…
  • Page 8
    Table of contents Parameter Manual Parameter Manual, 08/2015, 6FC5397-8EP40-0BA1…
  • Page 9: Fundamental Safety Instructions

    Siemens recommends strongly that you regularly check for product updates. For the secure operation of Siemens products and solutions, it is necessary to take suitable preventive action (e.g. cell protection concept) and integrate each component into a holistic, state-of-the-art industrial security concept.

  • Page 10
    ● Keep the software up to date. You will find relevant information and newsletters at this address (http:// support.automation.siemens.com). ● Incorporate the automation and drive components into a holistic, state-of-the-art industrial security concept for the installation or machine. You will find further information at this address (http://www.siemens.com/…
  • Page 11: Explanation Of Machine Data And Setting Data

    Explanation of machine data and setting data Data in the list The machine data and the setting data are listed in form of tables shown below: MD number Identifier Display filter Reference Units Name Data type Activation Attributes System Dimension Default value Minimum value Maximum value…

  • Page 12: Machine Data

    Explanation of machine data and setting data 2.1 Data in the list Cross reference For a detailed description of the appropriate data, refer to the description of functions or manual/ guide specified. Attributes The «Attributes» field contains additional attributes of the data: Attribute Meaning NBUP…

  • Page 13
    Explanation of machine data and setting data 2.1 Data in the list Activation The control system has defined four activating conditions. Each machine has a corresponding activating condition: ● PO: Power On (activate by powering on) ● RE: Reset (activate by pressing the following hardkey) ●…
  • Page 14
    Explanation of machine data and setting data 2.1 Data in the list Data area Standard machine NC language, ISO dialect Axis machine data Configuration (including memory) Measuring system Machine geometry Velocities / accelerations Monitoring/limiting functions Spindle Controller data Status data Corrections/compensations Technological functions Standard machine…
  • Page 15
    System Specifies the control system for which the data with the entered values applies. By default, the entered values apply for both the SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED T (Turning) and the SINUEMRIK 808D ADVANCED M (Milling). If no «default» entry exists, the data only applies for the control variants specified:…
  • Page 16
    Explanation of machine data and setting data 2.1 Data in the list For the function areas listed below, the input and modification of data depends on the protection level you have set: ● Tool offsets ● Work offsets ● Setting data ●…
  • Page 17: Overview Of The Data

    Explanation of machine data and setting data 2.2 Overview of the data Protection level: 7 If you have deleted your password or do not set a password, you only have the access right of viewing above-mentioned function areas. Note The system by default has no password. Class The «Class»…

  • Page 18
    Setting data (first letter) M, N, C, A, D Subarea (second letter) Siemens data (third letter) Note Axis-specific data can also be addressed with the axis name as an index. The internal axis identifier (AX1, AX2, AX3, etc.) or the identifier specified in MD10000 $MA_AX_CONF_NAME_TAB can be used as the axis name.
  • Page 19
    Explanation of machine data and setting data 2.2 Overview of the data $MN_AXCONF_MACHAX_NAME_TAB[0]=’X1′ String «X1» is assigned as name for the first machine axis. $MA_REFP_SET_POS[0,X1]=100.00000 A value of 100 mm is assigned to the first reference point of axis X1. Examples: Assignment to channel-specific machine data: CHANDATA(1)
  • Page 20
    Explanation of machine data and setting data 2.2 Overview of the data Parameter Manual Parameter Manual, 08/2015, 6FC5397-8EP40-0BA1…
  • Page 21: Machine Data

    Machine data Display machine data 1091 SINAMICS_IBN_TIMEOUT_VALUE Wait time when reading in parameters for Sinamics commissioning DWORD Immediately 1000 Description: Defines the wait time on read-in of the parameters for all SINAMICS devices during commissioning 1092 MAX_SPINDEL_SPEED_MANUAL_MA Input limit spindle speed MM+ DOUBLE Immediately 99999.00000…

  • Page 22
    Machine data 3.1 Display machine data Description: Number of managed cutting edges in MM+ 1098 INVERT_SPIN_ICON_MANUAL_MA The direction of spindle rotation is displayed inverted. BOOLEAN Immediately Description: The direction of spindle rotation is displayed inverted. 1099 USE_FIXPOINT_MANUAL_MA Tool change step MM+ BOOLEAN Immediately Description:…
  • Page 23
    Machine data 3.1 Display machine data 1104 TOOL_CHG_MANUALMODE_MA Enable tool change in the jog function of the MM+ BOOLEAN Immediately Description: Tool change enable in the JOG function of the MM+ 1105 STARTUP_WITH_MMP Automatic start of the MM+ after power on BOOLEAN PowerOn Description:…
  • Page 24
    Machine data 3.1 Display machine data The position display is displayed with a max. of 10 characters including signs and decimal places. A positive sign is not displayed. By default 3 digits are displayed after the decimal point. MD value=3: display resolution = 10-3 [mm] or [degree], Related to: MD 10200: INT_INCR_PER_MM bzw.
  • Page 25
    Machine data 3.1 Display machine data USER_CLASS_WRITE_ZOA Write settable work offset protection level BYTE Immediately Description: Protection level Settable work offset for writing USER_CLASS_WRITE_SEA Protection level write setting data BYTE Immediately Description: Protection level Setting data for writing USER_CLASS_READ_PROGRAM Read protection level of part program BYTE Immediately Description:…
  • Page 26
    Machine data 3.1 Display machine data USER_CLASS_PLC_ACCESS PLC project protection level BYTE Immediately Description: PLC project protection level USER_CLASS_WRITE_PWA Protected work area protection level BYTE Immediately Description: Protected work area protection level V24_PG_PC_BAUD PG: baud rate (300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400) BYTE Immediately Description: PG: baud rate (300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400)
  • Page 27
    Machine data 3.1 Display machine data Description: Input of absolute values as radius value Work offsets always in radius Tool lengths always in radius Tool wear always in radius Position display in diameter Distance to go in diameter Absolute paths in diameter CTM_G91_DIAMETER_ON Incremental infeed BYTE…
  • Page 28
    Machine data 3.1 Display machine data Description: User-oriented G group for position display (ext. language) FG_GROUP2 User-oriented G group for position display (external language) BOOLEAN Immediately 1000 Description: User-oriented G group for position display (ext. language) FG_GROUP3 User-oriented G group for position display (external language) BOOLEAN Immediately 1000…
  • Page 29
    Machine data 3.1 Display machine data USER_MEAS_TOOL_CHANGE Input enable for T/D no. in tool measuring window BYTE Immediately Description: Input of T/D no. disabled Input of T/D no. enabled SPINDLE_LOAD_DISPL2 Switch on spindle 2 utilization display BOOLEAN Immediately Description: Switch on spindle 2 utilization display SPINDLE_LOAD_BAR_LIM2 Utilization display spindle limit value 2 BOOLEAN…
  • Page 30
    Machine data 3.1 Display machine data PROBE_MODE Type of measuring system: 1: probe, 2: opt. measuring procedure BOOLEAN Immediately Description: Type of measuring system: 1: probe, 2: opt. measuring procedure TOOL_REF_PROBE_AXIS1 Absolute position probe X DOUBLE Immediately -999999.999 999999.999 Description: Absolute position probe X TOOL_REF_PROBE_AXIS2 Absolute position probe Y…
  • Page 31
    Machine data 3.1 Display machine data SPINDLE_DISP_MODE Spindle display mode BYTE Immediately Description: 0: Standard Mode; spindle speed display 1: Constant cutting speed display when G96 is set 2: Mixed display V24_PPI_ADDR_DRV1 Station address Drives BYTE PowerOn Description: Station address Drives USER_CLASS_WRITE_CMA_DIR Defines the access level for the CMA directory in the NCK BYTE…
  • Page 32: General Machine Data

    Machine data 3.2 General machine data 9001 TIME_BETWEEN_SLIDES The time between slides show DWORD Immediately Description: The time between slides show General machine data 10000 AXCONF_MACHAX_NAME_TAB N01, N11 K2, F1, G2, F2, K5, M1 Machine axis name STRING PowerOn 808d-me42 MX1, MY1, MZ1, MSP1 — 808d-me62 MX1, MY1, MZ1,…

  • Page 33
    Machine data 3.2 General machine data MD20060 $MC_AXCONF_GEOAX_NAME_TAB (geometry axis name in the channel [GEOAxisno.] MD20080 $MC_AXCONF_CHANAX_NAME_TAB (channel axis name in the channel [Channelaxisno.] 10050 SYSCLOCK_CYCLE_TIME N01, N05, N11 G3, G2, R1 System clock cycle DOUBLE PowerOn SFCO 808d-me42 0.002 0.001 0.008 808d-me62…
  • Page 34
    Machine data 3.2 General machine data Modification of MD10064 POSCTRL_CYCLE_DESVAL_DELAY requires a warm restart of the NCK and drive. Offsets that exceed the set DP cycle are automatically corrected to a substitute value. MD10062 $MN_POSCTRL_CYCLE_DESVAL_DELAY > 0: Default setpoint offset MD10062 $MN_POSCTRL_CYCLE_DESVAL_DELAY = 0: Automatic determination of the setpoint offset on the basis of the hardware transfer rates…
  • Page 35
    Machine data 3.2 General machine data 10136 DISPLAY_MODE_POSITION Display mode for actual position in the work DWORD Reset 808d-me42 808d-me62 808d-te42 808d-te62 808d-mte40 808d-mte60 Description: Defines how the position and the distance to go are displayed in the Work. Display as in software version 5 and earlier At end of block, the actual value display is in principle the same as the programmed end point, irrespective of where the machine actually is (e.g.
  • Page 36
    Machine data 3.2 General machine data When this time expires without the gear stage change having been terminated, the NCK reacts with an alarm. Among others, the following events will cause reorganization: User ASUB Mode change Delete distance-to-go Axis replacement Activate user data 10200 INT_INCR_PER_MM…
  • Page 37
    Machine data 3.2 General machine data If this machine data is changed, a startup is required because otherwise the associated machine data that have physical units would be incorrectly scaled. Proceed as follows: ● MD changed manually First start up and then enter the associated machine data with physical units. ●…
  • Page 38
    Machine data 3.2 General machine data Value Comparison commands «>» and «<» are processed as for SW 6.3 and earlier: Sub-program data of the type REAL are mapped internally in the IEEE 64 bit format. This mode maps decimal numbers inaccurately if this format’s 52-bit wide mantissa is inadequate to map the number in binary notation.
  • Page 39
    Changes to the cycle programs do not become active until after the next Power On. Bit 2=1: During control power on, the Siemens cycles in the directory _N_CST_DIR are preprocessed to form a process-optimizing compilation (from SW 3.5). Bit 3=1:…
  • Page 40
    Machine data 3.2 General machine data 10702 IGNORE_SINGLEBLOCK_MASK K1, Z1 Prevents stopping at specific blocks in single block mode DWORD PowerOn 808d-me42 0x1B 0x1FFFF 808d-me62 0x1B 0x1FFFF 808d-te42 0x1B 0x1FFFF 808d-te62 0x1B 0x1FFFF 808d-mte40 0x1FFFF 808d-mte60 0x1FFFF Description: This machine data prevents stopping at certain blocks with single block.
  • Page 41
    Machine data 3.2 General machine data Reorganize is an internal procedure that is needed for mode change after JOG/ JOGREF…, switch skip block on and off, activate machine data, axis replacement, switch on overstore, switch on single block, switch dry run feedrate on and off, subroutine level cancelation, user ASUBs delete distance-to-go, switchover after TEACH- IN (if available).
  • Page 42
    Machine data 3.2 General machine data Means that there is no stop in any user ASUB block. Exception: The single block stop has been explicitly activated via the SBLON command. There are three different internal ASUBs that are triggered by different events. — Repos: In the case of the events: change of operating mode to a manual mode (JOG, JOGREF,…) unless MODESWITCH_MASK is not set, switch skip block on and off, activate machine data, switch-on overstore, axis replacement, subroutine level cancelation,…
  • Page 43
    Machine data 3.2 General machine data 10707 PROG_TEST_MASK Program test mode DWORD PowerOn 808d-me42 0x1B 808d-me62 0x1B 808d-te42 0x1B 808d-te62 0x1B 808d-mte40 0x11 0x1F 808d-mte60 0x11 0x1F Description: Bit-coded mask for program test Bit 0 == 1 Program test cannot be deselected in ‘Stopped’ program status. Bit 1 == 1 Enable to activate the program test using the PI command _N_NCKMOD Bit 2 == 1…
  • Page 44
    Machine data 3.2 General machine data SD43230 $SA_SPIND_MAX_VELO_LIMS LIMS SD43235 $SA_SPIND_USER_VELO_LIMIT SD43300 $SA_ASSIGN_FEED_PER_REV_SOURCE FPRAON SD43350 $SA_AA_OFF_LIMIT SD43420 $SA_WORKAREA_LIMIT_PLUS SD43430 $SA_WORKAREA_LIMIT_MINUS SD43600 $SA_IPOBRAKE_BLOCK_EXCHANGE SD43610 $SA_ADISPOSA_VALUE SD43700 $SA_OSCILL_REVERSE_POS1 OSP1 SD43710 $SA_OSCILL_REVERSE_POS2 OSP2 SD43720 $SA_OSCILL_DWELL_TIME1 OST1 SD43730 $SA_OSCILL_DWELL_TIME2 OST2 SD43740 $SA_OSCILL_VELO SD43750 $SA_OSCILL_NUM_SPARK_CYCLES OSNSC SD43760 $SA_OSCILL_END_POS SD43770 $SA_OSCILL_CTRL_MASK…
  • Page 45
    Machine data 3.2 General machine data SD 43770 $SA_OSCILL_CTRL_MASK OSCTRL SD 43780 $SA_OSCILL_IS_ACTIVE The values of D43420 $SA_WORKAREA_LIMIT_PLUS (working area limitation plus) and SD43430 $SA_WORKAREA_LIMIT_MINUS (working area limitation minus) are to be stored in the buffered RAM after every RESET, M02, M30 or M17. —>…
  • Page 46
    Other substitutions configured in MD10715 $MN_M_NO_FCT_CYCLE are not performed in the subprogram either. MD10715 $MN_M_NO_FCT_CYCLE[n] is effective both in Siemens mode G290 and in external language mode G291. The subprograms configured with MD10716 $MN_M_NO_FCT_CYCLE_NAME[n] and MD10717 $MN_T_NO_FCT_CYCLE_NAME must not be active simultaneously in one block (line of a part program).
  • Page 47
    The T number programmed can be polled in the cycle via system variables $C_T / $C_T_PROG as a decimal value and via $C_TS / $C_TS_PROG as a string (only with tool management). MD10717 $MN_T_NO_FCT_CYCLE_NAME is active both in Siemens mode G290 and in external language mode G291.
  • Page 48
    Machine data 3.2 General machine data 10719 T_NO_FCT_CYCLE_MODE EXP, N12, N07 Setting of T function substitution DWORD PowerOn Description: This machine data parameterizes the execution of the replacement subprogram for the tool and tool offset selection. Bit 0 = 0: D or DL number is transferred to the replacement subprogram (default value) Bit 0 = 1: The D or DL number is not transferred to the replacement subprogram if the following…
  • Page 49
    Machine data 3.2 General machine data 10724 NC_SYS_CODE_CONF_NAME_TAB EXP, N01 TE1, B1 List of internal NC codes STRING PowerOn ReadOnly Description: Identifier list of internal NC codes Reserved for internal applications 10735 JOG_MODE_MASK EXP, N01 Settings for JOG mode DWORD PowerOn 0x1ff Description:…
  • Page 50
    Machine data 3.2 General machine data Bit 8 = 1 If there is a JOG retract movement, the retraction axis can only be jogged in the plus and minus direction. Bits 9-31: Currently unassigned. 10760 G53_TOOLCORR FBFA Method of operation of G53, G153 and SUPA DWORD NEW CONF Description:…
  • Page 51
    Machine data 3.2 General machine data 10810 EXTERN_MEAS_G31_P_SIGNAL EXP, N12 FBFA Config. of measuring inputs for G31 P.. BYTE PowerOn 1, 1, 1, 1 Description: This machine data defines the assignment of measurement inputs 1 and 2 to the P numbers programmed with G31 P1 ( — P4).
  • Page 52
    Machine data 3.2 General machine data 10816 EXTERN_G_NO_MAC_CYCLE EXP, N12 FBFA Macro call via G function DOUBLE PowerOn -1., -1., -1., -1., -1., -1., -1., -1..Description: G number for calling a macro. The name of the subprogram is stated in MD10817 $MN_EXTERN_G_NO_MAC_CYCLE_NAME[n]. If the G function specified with MD10816 $MN_EXTERN_G_NO_MAC_CYCLE[n] is programmed in a part program block, the subprogram defined in MD10817 $MN_EXTERN_M_NO_MAC_CYCLE_NAME[n] is started.
  • Page 53
    PowerOn Description: List of G commands of external NC languages which have been reconfigured by the user. The implemented G commands are to be taken from the current Siemens documentation for this programming language. The list is structured as follows:…
  • Page 54
    Machine data 3.2 General machine data 10886 EXTERN_INCREMENT_SYSTEM FBFA Incremental system in external language mode BOOLEAN PowerOn FALSE Description: This machine data is active for external programming languages, This machine data specifies which incremental system is active: 0: Incremental system IS-B = 0.001 mm/degree = 0.0001 inch 1: Incremental system…
  • Page 55
    MD10888 $MN_EXTERN_DIGITS_TOOL_NO, the programmed number is the offset number and tool number Bit2=0: Is only active for the ISO mode turning: ISO T offset selection only with D (Siemens cutting edge number) Bit2=1: Is only active for the ISO mode turning: ISO T offset selection only with H…
  • Page 56
    Machine data 3.2 General machine data These indexing positions must be assigned valid values in table 1. Any indexing positions in the table above the number specified in the machine data are ignored. Up to 60 indexing positions (0 to 59) can be entered in the table. Table length = 0 means that the table is not evaluated.
  • Page 57
    Machine data 3.2 General machine data MD30310 $MA_ROT_IS_MODULO (modulo conversion for rotary axis) 10920 INDEX_AX_LENGTH_POS_TAB_2 Number of positions for indexing axis table 2 DWORD Reset Description: The indexing position table is used to assign the axis positions in the valid unit of measurement (mm, inches or degrees) to the indexing positions [n] on the indexing axis.
  • Page 58
    Machine data 3.2 General machine data ● Up to 60 different indexing positions can be stored in the table. ● The 1st entry in the table corresponds to indexing position 1; the nth entry corresponds to indexing position n. ● The indexing positions should be entered in the table in ascending order (starting with the negative and going to the positive traversing range) with no gaps between the entries.
  • Page 59
    Machine data 3.2 General machine data 11110 AUXFU_GROUP_SPEC Auxiliary function group specification DWORD PowerOn 808d-me42 0x8081, 0x8021, 0x7FFFFFFF 0x8041, 0x8041, 0x8041, 0x8041, 0x8041, 0x8041… 808d-me62 0x8081, 0x8021, 0x7FFFFFFF 0x8041, 0x8041, 0x8041, 0x8041, 0x8041, 0x8041… 808d-te42 0x8081, 0x8021, 0x7FFFFFFF 0x8041, 0x8041, 0x8041, 0x8041, 0x8041, 0x8041…
  • Page 60
    ACCESS_EXEC_CST Execution right for /_N_CST_DIR BYTE PowerOn Description: Execution right assigned to the program stored in directory /_N_CST_DIR : Value 0: Siemens password Value 1: Machine OEM password Value 2: Password of setup engineer, service Value 3: End user password…
  • Page 61
    ACCESS_EXEC_CUS Execution right for /_N_CUS_DIR BYTE PowerOn Description: Execution right assigned to the programs stored in directory /_N_CUS_DIR : Value 0: Siemens password Value 1: Machine OEM password Value 2: Password of setup engineer, service Value 3: End user password…
  • Page 62
    PowerOn Description: Set write protection for cycle directory /_N_CUS_DIR: Assigned to the programs: Value -1: Keep the value currently set Value 0: Siemens password Value 1: Machine OEM password Value 2: Password of setup engineer, service Value 3: End user password…
  • Page 63
    11172 ACCESS_WRITE_UACCESS Write protection for _N_UACCESS_DEF BYTE PowerOn Description: Set write protection for definition file /_N_DEF_DIR/_N_UACCESS_DEF: Value 0: Siemens password Value 1: Machine OEM password Value 2: Password of setup engineer, service Value 3: End user password Value 4: Keyswitch position 3…
  • Page 64
    Machine data 3.2 General machine data Active: The change in the data becomes active on the start of the upload for the next range. The settings are only active, if MD11212 $MN_UPLOAD_CHANGES_ONLY=FALSE. 11212 UPLOAD_CHANGES_ONLY N01, N05 Data backup type for an active file system. BOOLEAN Immediately TRUE…
  • Page 65
    Machine data 3.2 General machine data Bit2: Trace of warm start and connection cancelation in_N_SIEMDOMAINSEQ_MPF Bit4: Additional information about the PDUs sent is to be entered in _N_SIEMDOMAINSEQ_MPF for upload Bit5: Additional information about the PDUs received is to be entered in _N_SIEMDOMAINSEQ_MPF for upload 11297 PROTOC_IPOCYCLE_CONTROL…
  • Page 66
    Machine data 3.2 General machine data 808d-mte40 1.0, 1.0, 1.0, 1.0, 1.0, 1.0, 1.0, 1.0… 808d-mte60 1.0, 1.0, 1.0, 1.0, 1.0, 1.0, 1.0, 1.0… Description: Time in seconds, for which the prep time level may be blocked. If the PREP does not manage to pass through within the set time, the cyclic events are not logged.
  • Page 67
    Machine data 3.2 General machine data Immediate travel in the opposite direction if the handwheel is turned at least the stated number of pulses in the opposite direction. Whether this machine data is also active for handwheel travel with DRF depends on bit10 of MD20624 $MC_HANDWH_CHAN_STOP_COND.
  • Page 68
    Machine data 3.2 General machine data (active machine function: INC1; …; INC10000). 11346 HANDWH_TRUE_DISTANCE H1, P1, W1 Handwheel default path or velocity BYTE PowerOn 808d-me42 808d-me62 808d-te42 808d-te62 808d-mte40 808d-mte60 Description: Setting the behavior for traversing with the handwheel, contour handwheel and with FDA=0: Value = 1: (default value)
  • Page 69
    Machine data 3.2 General machine data 11350 HANDWHEEL_SEGMENT Handwheel segment BYTE PowerOn 808d-me42 2, 2, 0, 0, 0, 0 ReadOnly 808d-me62 2, 2, 0, 0, 0, 0 ReadOnly 808d-te42 2, 2, 0, 0, 0, 0 ReadOnly 808d-te62 2, 2, 0, 0, 0, 0 ReadOnly 808d-mte40 2, 2, 0, 0, 0, 0…
  • Page 70
    Machine data 3.2 General machine data the handwheels connected to a hardware module: = No handwheel configured 1..6 = Handwheel connection to HW module/Ethernet interface 11353 HANDWHEEL_LOGIC_ADDRESS N04, N10 Logical handwheel slot addresses DWORD PowerOn 808d-me42 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0 16383 ReadOnly 808d-me62…
  • Page 71
    Machine data 3.2 General machine data Machining is stopped after loading of the last action block after block search, the NC/ PLC interface signal DB3300 DBX0.6 (last action block active) is set and alarm 10208 is output. Bit 0 = 1: Machining is stopped with the loading of the last action block after block search, and the NC/PLC interface signal DB3300 DBX0.6 (last action block active) is set.
  • Page 72
    Machine data 3.2 General machine data 11470 REPOS_MODE_MASK EXP, N01 Repositioning properties DWORD PowerOn 0xFFFF Description: This bit mask can be used to set the behavior of the control during repositioning. Bit no. Meaning when bit set —————————————————————————— 0 (LSB) The dwell time is continued in the residual block from where it was interrupted.
  • Page 73
    Machine data 3.2 General machine data 11602 ASUP_START_MASK K1, M3, TE3, TE7 Ignore stop conditions for ASUB DWORD PowerOn 808d-me42 0x01 808d-me62 0x01 808d-te42 0x01 808d-te62 0x01 808d-mte40 808d-mte60 Description: This machine data defines which stop reasons are to be ignored on an ASUB start. The ASUB is started or the following stop reasons are ignored: Bit 0: STOP reason: STOP key, M0 or M01…
  • Page 74
    Machine data 3.2 General machine data 11604 ASUP_START_PRIO_LEVEL K1, TE3, TE7 Priorities from which ‘ASUP_START_MASK’ is effective DWORD PowerOn 808d-me42 808d-me62 808d-te42 808d-te62 808d-mte40 808d-mte60 Description: This machine data defines the ASUB priority from which MD11602 $MN_ASUP_START_MASK is to be applied. MD11602 $MN_ASUP_START_MASK is applied from the level specified here up to the highest ASUB priority level 1.
  • Page 75
    The programmed D number can be polled in the cycle via system variable $C_D / $C_D_PROG. MD11717 $MN_D_NO_FCT_CYCLE_NAME is only active in Siemens mode (G290). No more than one M/T/D function replacement can be active per part program line. A modal subprogram call must not be programmed in the block with the D function replacement.
  • Page 76
    Machine data 3.2 General machine data Description: Evaluation of the axis velocity override switch with gray-coded interface. Not relevant with: MD12000 $MN_OVR_AX_IS_GRAY_CODE = 0 Related to: NC/PLC interface signal DB380x DBX0 (Feed override A-H), (axis-specific) 12020 OVR_FEED_IS_GRAY_CODE EXP, N10 V1, Z1 Path feedrate override switch Gray-coded BOOLEAN PowerOn…
  • Page 77
    Machine data 3.2 General machine data NC/PLC interface signal DB3200 DBX5 (Rapid traverse override A-H) MD12050 $MN_OVR_FACTOR_RAPID_TRA[n] (Evaluation of the rapid traverse override switch) 12050 OVR_FACTOR_RAPID_TRA EXP, N10 V1, Z1 Evaluation of rapid traverse override switch DOUBLE PowerOn 0.00, 0.01, 0.02, 0.04, 0.00 1.00 0.06, 0.08, 0.10, 0.20…
  • Page 78
    Machine data 3.2 General machine data 12986 PLC_DEACT_IMAGE_LADDR_IN Deactivation of I/O connection to the PLC image DWORD PowerOn 808d-me42 0, 9, 18, 27, 36, 96, ReadOnly 112, -1… 808d-me62 0, 9, 18, 27, 36, 96, 112, -1… 808d-te42 0, 9, 18, 27, 36, 96, ReadOnly 112, -1…
  • Page 79
    Analog drive (no automatic entry) Hydraulic drive Note: In general, the drive type is entered automatically with Siemens drives as soon as the drives start operating. With non-Siemens drives (at least with linear drives), the value must be entered manually if automatic drive recognition is not possible.
  • Page 80
    Machine data 3.2 General machine data 13113 PROFIBUS_TRACE_START Activation of PROFIBUS/PROFINET trace DWORD Immediately 808d-me42 808d-me62 808d-te42 808d-te62 808d-mte40 808d-mte60 Description: For PROFIBUS/PROFINET only: 0: Trace off 1: Trace on MD13112 $MN_PROFIBUS_TRACE_FILE_SIZE > 0: Trace is automatically disabled when the file size is reached.
  • Page 81
    Machine data 3.2 General machine data Description: For PROFIBUS/PROFINET, SINAMICS: Logical I/O address of a SINAMICS-CU (Control Unit) on the PROFIBUS/PROFINET. The cyclic DP communication with SINAMICS-CU is activated by taking over the associated slot address from the STEP7 project. The onboard I/Os cannot be accessed until after configuration.
  • Page 82
    Machine data 3.2 General machine data All slaves/devices with an address higher than the address set here are ignored by the Value 0: No limitation 13200 MEAS_PROBE_LOW_ACTIVE N10, N09 Polarity reversal of sensor BOOLEAN PowerOn FALSE, FALSE Description: This MD defines the electrical polarity of each connected sensor. Value 0: (Default setting) Non-deflected state…
  • Page 83
    Machine data 3.2 General machine data Description: The switching position of the probe is offset by the value. The offset is only active with the simulated probes and MD 13230 $MN_MEAS_PROBE_SOURCE=0. 14510 USER_DATA_INT User data (INT) DWORD PowerOn 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0… -32768 32767 Description:…
  • Page 84
    Machine data 3.2 General machine data 15702 LANG_SUB_PATH Call path for substitution subroutine BYTE PowerOn Description: Path with which the user program set by MD15700 $MN_LANG_SUB_NAME is called on the basis of a substitution configured by MD30465 $MA_AXIS_LANG_SUB_MASK: /_N_CMA_DIR (default) /_N_CUS_DIR /_N_CST_DIR 17000…
  • Page 85
    Machine data 3.2 General machine data Description: When defining a tool for the first time (bits 0, 1, 2) or the magazine locations (bit 3) for the first time, certain data of the tool can be set to fixed default values. Bit 4 can couple the magazine location status ‘Overlapping allowed’ (‘H2000’) to the value of the magazine location status ‘disabled’ (‘H1’).
  • Page 86
    Machine data 3.2 General machine data Meaning: Changes to the values of the tool status ($TC_TP8) are not taken into account in toolCounterC Bit no. Bit value: 1 Hex value: ‘H1’ Meaning: Changes to the values of the tool status ($TC_TP8) are taken into account in toolCounterC Bit no.
  • Page 87
    Machine data 3.2 General machine data Bit no.: 3 value 0x8 means: Tool types 300 to 399 permitted Bit no.: 4 value 0x10 means: Tool types 400 to 499 permitted (grinding tools) Bit no.: 5 value 0x20 means: Tool types 500 to 599 permitted (turning tools) Bit no.: 6 value 0x40 means: Tool types 600 to 699 permitted Bit no.: 7 value 0x80 means: Tool types 700 to 799 permitte Bit no.: 8 value 0x100 means: Tool types 800 to 899 permitted…
  • Page 88
    The preassigned value is selected model-specifically and generally it must not be changed. 17951 AUTOMATIC_MEM_RECONFIG_FILE Path and file name for internal data backup STRING PowerOn /siemens/sinumerik/ ReadOnly sys_cache/nck/ content.reconfig Description: File name with file path where the data backup file is stored if the persistent memory is reconfigured.
  • Page 89
    Machine data 3.2 General machine data 18050 INFO_FREE_MEM_DYNAMIC N01, N02, N05 Display data of the free volatile memory DWORD PowerOn 1310720 268435456 Description: The data is used for the manufacturer’s presetting of the memory size [ bytes ] available to the user for each channel after cold restart.
  • Page 90
    Machine data 3.2 General machine data The maximum possible number of tools is equal to the number of cutting edges. The MD must also be set when TOOLMAN is not used. The buffered data are lost when the machine data is changed. Related to: 18088 MM_NUM_TOOL_CARRIER…
  • Page 91
    Machine data 3.2 General machine data The value = -1 means that the number of resulting offsets is equal to the number of cutting edges multiplied by the number of resulting offsets per cutting edge. A value > 0 and < «number of cutting edges multiplied by the number of resulting offsets per cutting edge»…
  • Page 92
    Machine data 3.2 General machine data Bit 3=0 If work is done with the function «TOOLMAN» +»adapter», the «resulting offsets fine»/setup offsets are transformed. Bit 3=1 No transformation of the «resulting offsets fine»/setup offsets Bit 4=0 No set-up offset data blocks Bit 4=1 Set-up offset data blocks are additionally created.
  • Page 93
    A GUD block corresponds to a file in which user-defined data can be stored. 9 GUD blocks are available of which 3 are already assigned to specific users/applications. UGUD_DEF_USER (block for user) SGUD_DEF_USER (block for SIEMENS) MGUD_DEF_USER (block for machine manufacturer) Special cases: The number of GUD modules is determined by the GUD module with the highest number entered.
  • Page 94
    Machine data 3.2 General machine data Related to: MD18150 $MN_MM_GUD_VALUES_MEM (Memory space for user variables) 18130 MM_NUM_GUD_NAMES_CHAN Number of channel-specific user variable names (SRAM) DWORD PowerOn 808d-me42 32000 808d-me62 32000 808d-te42 32000 808d-te62 32000 808d-mte40 32000 808d-mte60 32000 Description: Defines the number of user variable names for channel-specific global user data (GUD). Approximately 80 bytes of memory are reserved in the SRAM for each variable name.
  • Page 95
    The function names are entered in the global NCK dictionary and must not conflict with the names that already exist. The SIEMENS cycle package contains special functions that are taken into account by the default setting of the MD. The data are stored in unbuffered memory. Approximately 150 bytes are required for each special function for management purposes.
  • Page 96
    ● cycle programs ● compile cycle software. 50 parameters are required for the special functions of the SIEMENS cycle package, software version 1. The data are stored in unbuffered memory. 72 bytes of memory are reserved for each parameter. Related to:…
  • Page 97
    808d-mte60 Description: Only when MD18080 $MN_MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK, bit 2=1 (‘H4’), is set: User or OEM data of the tools. Number of Siemens OEM TOA data (standard format IN_Real). See also: MD18096 $MN_MM_NUM_CC_TOA_PARAM, MD18100 $MN_MM_NUM_CUTTING_EDGES_IN_TOA Buffered user memory is used 18207 MM_TYPE_CCS_TOA_PARAM…
  • Page 98
    Machine data 3.2 General machine data Number of Siemens OEM monitoring data; standard format IN_Int). See also: MD18098 $MN_MM_NUM_CC_MON_PARAM, MD18100 $MN_MM_NUM_CUTTING_EDGES_IN_TOA Buffered user memory is used 18230 MM_USER_MEM_BUFFERED Buffered user memory DWORD PowerOn NDLD 808d-me42 7168 808d-me62 7168 808d-te42 7168…
  • Page 99
    Machine data 3.2 General machine data Index 1: Number of temporary Siemens cycles in the passive file system (see also MD18354 $MN_MM_S_FILE_MEM_SIZE): The data can be written, but will be overwritten during the runup by the value requested by the Siemens cycles.
  • Page 100
    Size of the Siemens cycle program memory DWORD PowerOn [0] Size of the volatile cycle program memory [1] Size of the non-volatile Siemens cycle program memory [2] Size of the volatile memory for system files (NRK fault file, etc.) 808d-me42 64, 0, 10…
  • Page 101
    Machine data 3.2 General machine data Index 1 = Size of the volatile Siemens cycle program memory; the data may be written, but will overwritten during the runup by the value requested by the Siemens cycles. Index 2 = Size of the non-volatile memory for system files in the SRAM. E.g. storage location of the NRK fault file.
  • Page 102
    Machine data 3.2 General machine data The individual values involve the users of the logging function, which are assigned the following functions: 0: Reserved for system functions: simultaneous recording, simulation, synchronized actions analysis 1: Reserved for system functions: determining program runtimes, multi-step editor 2: Reserved for OEM applications 3: Reserved for OEM applications 4: Reserved for OEM applications…
  • Page 103
    Machine data 3.2 General machine data 8: Reserved for system functions: trace 9: Reserved for system functions: action log 18374 MM_PROTOC_FILE_BUFFER_SIZE Size of log file buffer DWORD PowerOn 15000, 8000, 8000, 5000 8000, 8000, 15000, 15000, 15000… Description: Size of the data buffer between the IPO and preprocessing time levels of a log file [ Bytes ].
  • Page 104
    Machine data 3.2 General machine data 808d-te62 808d-mte40 808d-mte60 Description: Number of global predefined user frames. The value corresponds to the number of field elements for the predefined field $P_UIFR[]. If the value of the data is greater than 0, then all settable fields are only global. The MD28080 $MC_MM_NUM_USER_FRAMES is then ignored.
  • Page 105
    Machine data 3.2 General machine data MD18660 $MN_MM_NUM_SYNACT_GUD_REAL[1] = <value> -> extension of the MGUD block MD18660 $MN_MM_NUM_SYNACT_GUD_REAL[2] = <value> -> extension of the UGUD block MD18660 $MN_MM_NUM_SYNACT_GUD_REAL[3] = <value> -> extension of the GUD4 block MD18660 $MN_MM_NUM_SYNACT_GUD_REAL[8] = <value> -> extension of the GUD9 block In each case, fields with the following properties are created: Data type REAL Field size corresponding to <value>…
  • Page 106
    Machine data 3.2 General machine data 18662 MM_NUM_SYNACT_GUD_BOOL Number of configurable GUD variables of type Boolean DWORD PowerOn 808d-me42 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0… 32767 808d-me62 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0… 32767 808d-te42 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0… 32767 808d-te62 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0…
  • Page 107
    Machine data 3.2 General machine data Field size corresponding to <value> of the relevant machine data Predefined names: SYG_AS[ ] -> Synact parameter of type AXIS in the SGUD block SYG_AM[ ] -> Synact parameter of type AXIS in the MGUD block SYG_AU[ ] ->…
  • Page 108
    Machine data 3.2 General machine data 808d-mte40 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0… 808d-mte60 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0… Description: The MD18665 $MN_MM_NUM_SYNACT_GUD_STRING[ ] can be used to extend individual GUD blocks by additional channel-specific parameter areas of type STRING.
  • Page 109
    Machine data 3.2 General machine data 18794 MM_TRACE_VDI_SIGNAL EXP, N02, N06 Trace specification of VDI signals DWORD PowerOn NBUP 0x7FFFFFFF Description: The NCK sends and receives PLC VDI signals. The Trace function stores the signals which have changed in each interpolation cycle in an FIFO memory (first in-first out) having a size of MM_MAX_TRACE_POINTS.
  • Page 110: Channel-Specific Machine Data

    Machine data 3.3 Channel-specific machine data Description: The machine data deterrmines the accelerations and jerks which are applied in the case of positioning axis motion. Value 0: The acceleration is taken from the first field entry in MD32300 $MA_MAX_AX_ACCEL (value for DYNNORM). With G75 and active jerk limitation (SOFT), the jerk is taken from the first field entry in MD32431 $MA_MAX_AX_JERK (value for DYNNORM);…

  • Page 111
    Machine data 3.3 Channel-specific machine data ● The geometry axis name entered must not conflict with the designations and assignments of the machine and channel axis names or other identifiers. ● The geometry axis name entered must not include any of the following reserved address letters: — D Tool offset (D function) — E Reserved…
  • Page 112
    Machine data 3.3 Channel-specific machine data AXCONF_MACHAX_USED [0] = 1; 1st MA is the 1st axis in the channel AXCONF_MACHAX_USED [1] = 2; 2nd MA is the 2nd axis in the channel AXCONF_MACHAX_USED [2] = 0; gap in the list … AXCONF_MACHAX_USED [3] = 3;…
  • Page 113
    This machine data defines the M auxiliary function number with which the spindle is switched into axis mode. The M number defined in the machine data replaces M70 in Siemens language mode. Note: On the VDI interface, M70 is always output with the corresponding address extension to indicate the switch to axis mode.
  • Page 114
    Machine data 3.3 Channel-specific machine data MD10814 $MN_EXTERN_M_NO_MAC_CYCLE, MD20095 $MC_EXTERN_RIGID_TAPPING_M_NR 20096 T_M_ADDRESS_EXT_IS_SPINO C01, C04, C09 H2, W1 Meaning of address extension at T, M tool change BOOLEAN PowerOn FALSE, FALSE, FALSE, FALSE, FALSE, FALSE, FALSE, FALSE… Description: This MD is only significant if the functions ‘Tool management’/’flat D numbers’ are inactive.
  • Page 115
    Machine data 3.3 Channel-specific machine data 808d-mte40 0x7FFFFFFF, 0x7FFFFFFF 0x7FFFFFFF, 0x7FFFFFFF, 0x7FFFFFFF, 0x7FFFFFFF,, 0x7… 808d-mte60 0x7FFFFFFF, 0x7FFFFFFF 0x7FFFFFFF, 0x7FFFFFFF, 0x7FFFFFFF, 0x7FFFFFFF,, 0x7… Description: Identifies whether the axis will be displayed by the HMI as a machine, geometry, or auxiliary axis. This data is only evaluated by the HMI.
  • Page 116
    Machine data 3.3 Channel-specific machine data MD20060 $MC_AXCONF_GEOAX_NAME_TAB[n] must be specified. If space characters are entered or if an axis identifier is specified for an axis which is not defined as a geometry axis, this leads to the following alarms: ●…
  • Page 117
    Machine data 3.3 Channel-specific machine data 808d-me62 0x1F 0x3F 808d-te42 0x1F 0x3F 808d-te62 0x1F 0x3F 808d-mte40 0x0, 0x0, 0x0, 0x0, 0x3F 0x0, 0x0, 0x0, 0x0… 808d-mte60 0x0, 0x0, 0x0, 0x0, 0x3F 0x0, 0x0, 0x0, 0x0… Description: Event-driven program calls (Prog-Events) can be set regarding their single-block response.
  • Page 118
    Machine data 3.3 Channel-specific machine data Prog-Event after 1st start after search run causes block change despite read-in disable Bit 5 = 1 : Safety-Prog-Event during ramp-up causes block change despite read-in disable Corresponds to: MD20105 $MC_PROG_EVENT_IGN_REFP_LOCK MD20106 $MC_PROG_EVENT_IGN_SINGLEBLOCK MD20108 $MC_PROG_EVENT_MASK MD20192 $MC_PROG_EVENT_IGN_PROG_STATE MD20193 $MC_PROG_EVENT_IGN_STOP 20108…
  • Page 119
    Machine data 3.3 Channel-specific machine data 20110 RESET_MODE_MASK C11, C03 F2, K6, M3, TE4, W5, B3, K5, M1, G2, K1, K2, P1, S1, W1, 2.4, Definition of basic control settings after reset/PP end DWORD Reset 808d-me42 0x4045, 0x4045, 0x17FFFF 0x4045, 0x4045, 0x4045, 0x4045, 0x4045, 0x4045…
  • Page 120
    Machine data 3.3 Channel-specific machine data Bit 0 (LSB) = 0: corresponds to the behavior of SW release 1, is only recommended for test mode Initial setting after ramp-up: — G codes according to MD20150 $MC_GCODE_RESET_VALUES — Tool length offset not active — Transformation not active — No coupled-motion axis groupings active — No tangential correction active…
  • Page 121
    Machine data 3.3 Channel-specific machine data MD20130 $MC_CUTTING_EDGE_RESET_VALUE MD20121 $MC_TOOL_PRESEL_RESET_VALUE MD22550 $MC_TOOL_CHANGE_MODE When magazine management is active, T, M are not output as auxiliary functions. The function uses its own communication to output T, M to the PLC, for example. Bit 1 = 1: Suppress aux.
  • Page 122
    Machine data 3.3 Channel-specific machine data Please note that after a program ends or is terminated, either the most recent value for master spindle or master toolholder programmed in the program, or the value set in MD20090 $MC_SPIND_DEF_MASTER_SPIND or MD20124 $MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_TOOLHOLDER defines the master spindle or master toolholder.
  • Page 123
    Machine data 3.3 Channel-specific machine data Bit 14 = 1: The current setting of the basic frame is retained. Bit 15 = 0: Active electronic gearboxes remain active at reset/end of part program. Bit 15 = 1: Active electronic gearboxes are canceled at reset/end of part program. Bit 16 = 0: Initial setting for the master spindle according to MD20090 $MC_SPIND_DEF_MASTER_SPIND.
  • Page 124
    Machine data 3.3 Channel-specific machine data 20112 START_MODE_MASK K6, M3, K5, M1, K1, K2, P1, S1, Definition of basic setting of control after part program start DWORD Reset 0x400, 0x400, 0x400, 0x7FFFF 0x400, 0x400, 0x400, 0x400, 0x400… Description: Definition of the initial setting of the control at the start of the part program with respect to G codes (in particular, active plane and active settable work offset), tool length offset, transformation, and axis couplings by setting the following bits: Bit 0: Not assigned: MD20112 $MC_START_MODE_MASK is evaluated every time a part…
  • Page 125
    Machine data 3.3 Channel-specific machine data The current setting for G code «settable work offset» is retained. Bit 5 = 1: Initial setting for G code «settable work offset» according to MD20150 $MC_GCODE_RESET_VALUES Bit 6 = 0: The current setting for active tool length offset is retained. If tool or magazine management is active, the tool currently on the active toolholder (spindle) is always selected.
  • Page 126
    Machine data 3.3 Channel-specific machine data Bit 16 = 0: The current setting of the master spindle (SETMS) is retained. Bit 16 = 1: Initial setting for the master spindle according to MD20090 $MC_SPIND_DEF_MASTER_SPIND Bit 17 = 0: The current setting of the master toolholder (SETMTH) is retained (relevant only if tool or magazine management is active) Bit 17 = 1: Only if MD20124 $MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_TOOLHOLDER>…
  • Page 127
    Machine data 3.3 Channel-specific machine data 20115 IGNORE_REFP_LOCK_ASUP K1, Z1 Process interrupt program despite non-referenced axes DWORD NEW CONF 0x200, 0x200, 0x200, 0x7FFFFFFF 0x200, 0x200, 0x200, 0x200, 0x200… Description: Despite non-referenced axes, an assigned user ASUB is processed for the interrupt whose bit is set.
  • Page 128
    Machine data 3.3 Channel-specific machine data MD20191 $MC_IGN_PROG_STATE_ASUP MD20194 $MC_IGNORE_NONCSTART_ASUP 20120 TOOL_RESET_VALUE K1, W1 Tool with length compens. during runup (reset/part program end). DWORD Reset 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0… 32000 Description: Definition of the tool for which tool length compensation is selected during runup or on reset or part program end as a function of MD20110 $MC_RESET_MODE_MASK, and on part program start as a function of MD20112 $MC_START_MODE_MASK Related to:…
  • Page 129
    Machine data 3.3 Channel-specific machine data 808d-me62 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0… 808d-te42 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0… 808d-te62 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0… 808d-mte40 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0… 808d-mte60 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0…
  • Page 130
    Machine data 3.3 Channel-specific machine data GCODE_RESET_VALUES[12] 2 (G71) GCODE_RESET_VALUES[13] 1 (G90) GCODE_RESET_VALUES[14] 2 (G94) GCODE_RESET_VALUES[15] 1 (CFC) GCODE_RESET_VALUES[16] 1 (NORM) GCODE_RESET_VALUES[17] 1 (G450) GCODE_RESET_VALUES[18] 1 (BNAT) GCODE_RESET_VALUES[19] 1 (ENAT) GCODE_RESET_VALUES[20] 1 (BRISK) GCODE_RESET_VALUES[21] 1 (CUT2D) GCODE_RESET_VALUES[22] 1 (CDOF) GCODE_RESET_VALUES[23] 1 (FFWOF) GCODE_RESET_VALUES[24] 1 (ORIWKS)
  • Page 131
    Machine data 3.3 Channel-specific machine data GCODE_RESET_VALUES[61] 1 (inactive) GCODE_RESET_VALUES[62] 1 (inactive) GCODE_RESET_VALUES[63] 1 (GS0) GCODE_RESET_VALUES[69] 1 (not defined) 20152 GCODE_RESET_MODE M1, K1, K2, P1 Reset response of G groups BYTE Reset 808d-me42 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 1, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 808d-me62…
  • Page 132
    Machine data 3.3 Channel-specific machine data 808d-me62 1, 1, 1, 2, 1, 1, 1, 3, 4, 1, 1, 2, 2, 1, 3, 2, 1, 0, 1, 1, 1,, … 808d-te42 1, 2, 1, 2, 2, 1, 1, 0, 2, 1, 1, 2, 1, 1, 1, 2, 1, 0, 1, 1, 1, 808d-te62 1, 2, 1, 2, 2, 1, 1, 0, 2,…
  • Page 133
    Machine data 3.3 Channel-specific machine data MD20154 $MC_EXTERN_GCODE_RESET_VALUES[13]=1 ; the reset value for the 14th G group ;is G54 MD20156 $MC_EXTERN_GCODE_RESET_MODE[13]=0 ; the basic setting for the 14th G group ;after reset / part program end is defined ;MD20154 $MC_EXTERN_GCODE_RESET_VALUES[13] However, if the current setting for the 14th G group is to be retained beyond reset / part program end, this results in the following setting: MD20154 $MC_EXTERN_GCODE_RESET_VALUES[13]=1 ;reset value for the 14th G group…
  • Page 134
    Machine data 3.3 Channel-specific machine data 20171 SURF_BLOCK_PATH_LIMIT Maximum traverse length of an NC block for the COMPSURF DOUBLE NEW CONF function 200.0, 200.0, 200.0, 200.0, 200.0, 200.0, 200.0, 200.0… Description: The machine data defines the maximum traverse length of a block that is still compressed.
  • Page 135
    Machine data 3.3 Channel-specific machine data 20173 SURF_VELO_TOL mm/min Maximum permitted deviation of the path feed on compression DOUBLE PowerOn with COMPSURF 808d-me42 1000.0, 1000.0, 1000.0, 1000.0, 1000.0, 1000.0, 1000.0, 1000.0… 808d-me62 1000.0, 1000.0, 1000.0, 1000.0, 1000.0, 1000.0, 1000.0, 1000.0… 808d-te42 1000.0, 1000.0, 1000.0, 1000.0,…
  • Page 136
    Machine data 3.3 Channel-specific machine data Description: Event-driven program calls (Prog-Events) can be set regarding their response on the OPI. The progStatus and chanStatus variables remain unaffected despite Prog-Event processing being active and retain the old value. This provides a means of concealing Prog-Event processing from the HMI.
  • Page 137
    Machine data 3.3 Channel-specific machine data 20194 IGNORE_NONCSTART_ASUP Permit ASUB in spite of «Interlock NC-START» if user alarms DWORD NEW CONF present. 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0… 0x7FFFFFFF Description: If a user alarm is present from the number range 65500-65999, an ASUB start from reset is permitted in spite of the response «Interlock NC-START», which has these alarms.
  • Page 138
    Machine data 3.3 Channel-specific machine data 20204 WAB_CLEARANCE_TOLERANCE Change of direction with SAR DOUBLE PowerOn 0.01, 0.01, 0.01, 0.01, 0.01, 0.01, 0.01, 0.01… Description: In the case of smooth approach and retraction, the point defined with DISCL, from which, in the case of infeed from the initial plane, traversing is carried out at lower speed (G341) or the point in which the actual approach movement begins (G 340), must lie between the initial plane and the approach plane.
  • Page 139
    Machine data 3.3 Channel-specific machine data Description: This machine data is evaluated only if MD28540 $MC_MM_ARCLENGTH_SEGMENTS is greater than 0. The factor indicates how large the relative error of the path velocity may be for splines, compressor and polynomial interpolation. The smaller the factor the more computing time is required for preprocessing.
  • Page 140
    Machine data 3.3 Channel-specific machine data > 0 Number of the total offset No total offset active with D programming The total offset number for the previously programmed D is used. Related to: MD20270 $MC_CUTTING_EDGE_DEFAULT. 20310 TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK P3 pl, P3 sl Activation of tool management functions DWORD PowerOn…
  • Page 141
    Machine data 3.3 Channel-specific machine data Bit 10=0: The change command is output without delay, directly after the preparation command. Bit 11=1: The tool preparation command (PLC command numbers=2, 4, 5) is also executed if the same tool preparation command has already been executed. (Commands 4, 5 contain the tool preparation) Example: (Tool changed with M6 (PLC command no.= 3): T=»Tool1″;…
  • Page 142
    Machine data 3.3 Channel-specific machine data Bit 19, in conjunction with set bits 5, 6, 7, 8, delays block processng. Bit 19=0: The synchronizations determined by bits 5…8 refer to the tool command output. This means that the block change is not delayed. Bit 20 to bit 24 Bit 20=0: If the PLC signal «Program test active»…
  • Page 143
    Machine data 3.3 Channel-specific machine data Description: Definition of the effects of tool parameters. Bit no. meaning when bit is set —————————————————————————— Bit 0: (LSB): For turning and grinding tools, the wear parameter of the transverse axis is included in the calculation as a diameter value. Bit 1: For turning and grinding tools, the tool length component of the transverse axis is included in the calculation as a diameter value.
  • Page 144
    Machine data 3.3 Channel-specific machine data With cutting edge position compensation (CUTMOD) for turning and grinding tools, the cutting plane for calculating the compensation values is rotated into the machining plane. If this bit is not set, the cutting edge is projected into the machining plane instead.
  • Page 145
    Machine data 3.3 Channel-specific machine data In this mode, compensations in all three geometry axes can be configured through multiple programming, i.e. through the activation of one component, the length compensation possibly active in another axis is not deleted. Mode C The tool length acts, independent of the active plane, on the axis that has simultaneously been programmed with H.
  • Page 146
    Machine data 3.3 Channel-specific machine data Value 0: Default LookAhead Value 1: Extended LookAhead Value 2: reserved E.g. MD20443 $MC_LOOKAH_FFORM[4]=1; i.e. activation for DYNFINISH. Entry for all dynamic G code groups. When changing between default LookAhead and extended LookAhead or vice versa, the continuous-path mode is interrupted by an interpolatory stop.
  • Page 147
    Machine data 3.3 Channel-specific machine data 20480 SMOOTHING_MODE Behavior of smoothing with G64x DWORD NEW CONF 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0… 75744 Description: Configuration of smoothing with G641 and G642 or G643. The MD is decimal-coded. The units digits define the response with G643, and the tens digits the response with G642.
  • Page 148
    Machine data 3.3 Channel-specific machine data 4xx: The «effective» path velocity in a smoothing block will remain constant, if possible, as long as the dynamic response of the axes permits this. Unlike the default setting, the smoothing blocks are also interpolated as a path with this setting.
  • Page 149
    Machine data 3.3 Channel-specific machine data 20482 COMPRESSOR_MODE Mode of compressor DWORD NEW CONF 808d-me42 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0… 1333 808d-me62 1333 808d-te42 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0… 1333 808d-te62 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0… 1333 808d-mte40 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0…
  • Page 150
    Machine data 3.3 Channel-specific machine data 1xxx: Optimization for soft and fast traversing in special applications. 20485 COMPRESS_SMOOTH_FACTOR EXP, C05 Smoothing by compressor DOUBLE NEW CONF 808d-me42 0., 0., 0., 0., 0., 0., 0., 0., 0., 0., 0., 0., 0., 0., 0., 0., …
  • Page 151
    Machine data 3.3 Channel-specific machine data Description: This MD is used to determine the settings for spline interpolation. The allocation of the spline segments to the NC blocks can thus be influenced. With spline interpolation, the spline blocks are combined, if possible, in such a way, that there are no blocks that are too short and could lead to a reduction in the possible path velocity.
  • Page 152
    Machine data 3.3 Channel-specific machine data 20550 EXACT_POS_MODE Exact stop conditions on G00/G01. BYTE NEW CONF 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0… Description: Configuration of the exact stop conditions for G00 and other G codes of the 1st G code group.
  • Page 153
    Machine data 3.3 Channel-specific machine data 20560 G0_TOLERANCE_FACTOR Tolerance factor for G00 DOUBLE NEW CONF 808d-me42 1.0, 1.0, 1.0, 1.0, 1.0, 1.e-9 1.0, 1.0, 1.0… 808d-me62 1.e-9 808d-te42 1.0, 1.0, 1.0, 1.0, 1.0, 1.e-9 1.0, 1.0, 1.0… 808d-te62 1.0, 1.0, 1.0, 1.0, 1.0, 1.e-9 1.0, 1.0, 1.0…
  • Page 154
    Machine data 3.3 Channel-specific machine data There is an entry for each dynamic G code group. 20602 CURV_EFFECT_ON_PATH_ACCEL EXP, C05 B1, B2 Effect of path curvature on path dynamic DOUBLE NEW CONF 0., 0., 0., 0., 0., 0., 0., 0.95 0., 0., 0., 0., 0., 0., 0., 0., 0., …
  • Page 155
    Machine data 3.3 Channel-specific machine data 808d-mte40 1., 1., 1., 1., 1., 1., 1., 1., 1., 1., 1., 1., 1., 1., 1., 1., … 808d-mte60 1., 1., 1., 1., 1., 1., 1., 1., 1., 1., 1., 1., 1., 1., 1., 1., … Description: Factor to determine the degree of smoothing and torsion.
  • Page 156
    Machine data 3.3 Channel-specific machine data 808d-me62 500., 500., 500., 500., 500., 500., 500., 500..808d-te42 500., 500., 500., 500., 500., 500., 500., 500..808d-te62 500., 500., 500., 500., 500., 500., 500., 500..808d-mte40 500., 500., 500., 500., 500., 500., 500., 500..808d-mte60 500., 500., 500., 500., 500., 500., 500., 500..
  • Page 157
    Machine data 3.3 Channel-specific machine data Bit 4: Feedrate disable (exception for MD30460 $MA_BASE_FUNCTION_MASK bit6) For bit 4 feed disable, it must be taken into account that a PLC-controlled axis, for which MD30460 $MA_BASE_FUNCTION_MASK bit 6 = 1, is not stopped by the feed disable, and that no interruption and no cancellation are triggered here.
  • Page 158
    Machine data 3.3 Channel-specific machine data Bit 15 = 0: If an axis with active diameter programming is traversed in the channel, only half the distance of the specified increment is traveled during handwheel travel (MD11346 $MN_HANDWH_TRUE_DISTANCE = 1 or 3 Bit 15 = 1: If an axis with active diameter programming is traversed in the channel, the specified increment is fully traveled during handwheel travel (MD11346 $MN_HANDWH_TRUE_DISTANCE…
  • Page 159
    If G95 is active, in spindle revolutions Bit3: 0: Errors in ISO scanner lead to an alarm Errors in ISO scanner are not output, the block is transferred to the Siemens translator. Bit4: 0: G00 is traversed with the current exact stop — continuous-path mode G code…
  • Page 160
    Machine data 3.3 Channel-specific machine data With M96 Pxx, CYCLE396.spf is always called in the case of an interrupt Bit11: 0: With G54 Pxx, only G54.1 is displayed With G54 Pxx, the programmed program is displayed after the point, e.g. G54.48 Bit12: 0: When the subroutine defined with M96 Pxx is called, $P_ISO_STACK is not modified When the subroutine defined with M96 Pxx is called, $P_ISO_STACK is incremented…
  • Page 161
    Machine data 3.3 Channel-specific machine data To prevent stopping in continuous-path mode, M17 must not be programmed alone in a block. Example of a subroutine: G64 F2000 G91 Y10 X10 X10 Z10 M17 Bit 1 = 0: M01: conditional program stop is always output to PLC, irrespective of whether the M01 signal is active or not.
  • Page 162
    Machine data 3.3 Channel-specific machine data ● MD21000 $MC_CIRCLE_ERROR_CONST ● Start radius multiplied by MD21010 $MC_CIRCLE_ERROR_FACTOR This means that for small circles the tolerance is a fixed value (MD21000 $MC_CIRCLE_ERROR_CONST), and for large circles it is proportional to the start radius. Related to: MD21010 $MC_CIRCLE_ERROR_FACTOR (circle end point monitoring factor)
  • Page 163
    Machine data 3.3 Channel-specific machine data 21020 WORKAREA_WITH_TOOL_RADIUS C03, C06 Consideration of tool radius for working area limitation BOOLEAN Reset FALSE, FALSE, FALSE, FALSE, FALSE, FALSE, FALSE, FALSE… Description: This machine data indicates whether the tool radius is taken into account in the working area limitation.
  • Page 164
    Machine data 3.3 Channel-specific machine data Description: JOG velocity for geometry axes in the channel (mm/min) 21186 TOCARR_ROT_OFFSET_FROM_FR C01, C07 Offset of TOCARR rotary axes from WO BOOLEAN Immediately 808d-me42 FALSE, FALSE, ReadOnly FALSE, FALSE, FALSE, FALSE, FALSE, FALSE… 808d-me62 FALSE, FALSE, ReadOnly FALSE, FALSE,…
  • Page 165
    Machine data 3.3 Channel-specific machine data 21202 LIFTFAST_WITH_MIRROR Rapid retract with mirrorring BOOLEAN PowerOn 808d-me42 FALSE, FALSE, ReadOnly FALSE, FALSE, FALSE, FALSE, FALSE, FALSE… 808d-me62 FALSE, FALSE, ReadOnly FALSE, FALSE, FALSE, FALSE, FALSE, FALSE… 808d-te42 FALSE, FALSE, ReadOnly FALSE, FALSE, FALSE, FALSE, FALSE, FALSE…
  • Page 166
    Machine data 3.3 Channel-specific machine data 22000 AUXFU_ASSIGN_GROUP H2, S1 Auxiliary function group DWORD PowerOn 5, 5, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1,1, 1, Description: See MD22010 $MC_AUXFU_ASSIGN_TYPE [n] (auxiliary function type) 22010 AUXFU_ASSIGN_TYPE H2, S1…
  • Page 167
    Machine data 3.3 Channel-specific machine data 22020 AUXFU_ASSIGN_EXTENSION H2, S1 Auxiliary function extension DWORD PowerOn 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0,, … Description: See MD22010 $MC_AUXFU_ASSIGN_TYPE[n] (auxiliary function type) Special cases: With the spindle functions M3, M4, M5, M19, M70, M40, M41, M42, M43, M44, M45 and S, the spindle number is output to the PLC in the auxiliary function extension.
  • Page 168
    Machine data 3.3 Channel-specific machine data 22037 AUXFU_ASSIGN_SIM_TIME H2, S1 Acknowledgment time DWORD PowerOn 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0x7FFFFFF 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0,, … Description: Acknowledgment time for auxiliary functions in ms. See MD22010 $MC_AUXFU_ASSIGN_TYPE[n] (auxiliary function type) 22040 AUXFU_PREDEF_GROUP…
  • Page 169
    Machine data 3.3 Channel-specific machine data 22080 AUXFU_PREDEF_SPEC H2, K1 Output specification DWORD PowerOn 0x81, 0x81, 0x81, 0x0, 0x0, 0x0, 0x77FFF, 0x81, 0x81, 0x8021, 0x0, 0x0, 0x77FFF, 0x8021, 0x8021, 0x8000, 0x8000, 0x77FFF, 0x8021, 0x8000… 0x77FFF, 0x77FFF, 0x7FFFF, 0x7FFFF, 0… Description: Specification of the output behavior of the predefined auxiliary functions.
  • Page 170
    Machine data 3.3 Channel-specific machine data See MD10715 $MN_M_NO_FCT_CYCLE Related to: MD10714 $MN_M_NO_FCT_EOP, MD10715 $MN_M_NO_FCT_CYCLE, MD20094 $MC_SPIND_RIGID_TAPPING_M_NR, MD22254 $MC_AUXFU_ASSOC_M0_VALUE MD10814 $MN_EXTERN_M_NO_MAC_CYCLE, MD20095 $MC_EXTERN_RIGID_TAPPING_M_NR 22256 AUXFU_ASSOC_M1_VALUE C01, C03, C10 Additional M function for conditional stop DWORD PowerOn -1, -1, -1, -1, -1, -1, -1, -1…
  • Page 171
    Machine data 3.3 Channel-specific machine data 22410 F_VALUES_ACTIVE_AFTER_RESET C04, C03, C05 M3, V1 F function active beyond RESET BOOLEAN PowerOn FALSE, FALSE, FALSE, FALSE, FALSE, FALSE, FALSE, FALSE… Description: The last programmed F, FA, OVR and OVRA values are still active after RESET. This also applies to the dynamic correction values (ACC, VELOLIM, JERKLIM, ACCLIMA, VELOLIMA, JERKLIMA).
  • Page 172
    Machine data 3.3 Channel-specific machine data With the new behavior (bit 0 = 1), the data storage in the PLC consists of max. 8 bytes (DBB 208 — DBB 215). With this procedure, the array index of this byte array is identical with the index of the MD22510 $MC_GCODE_GROUPS_TO_PLC[Index] and MD22512 $MC_EXTERN_GCODE_GROUPS_TO_PLC[Index].
  • Page 173
    Machine data 3.3 Channel-specific machine data 22562 TOOL_CHANGE_ERROR_MODE Response to tool change errors DWORD PowerOn 0x0, 0x0, 0x0, 0x0, 0x1FF 0x0, 0x0, 0x0, 0x0… Description: Behavior if faults/problems occur during programmed tool change. Bit 0=0: Standard behavior: Stop at the faulty NC block Bit 0=1: If a fault is detected in the block with the tool change preparation, the alarm relevant to the preparation command T is delayed until the corresponding tool change command (M06) has been interpreted in the program sequence.
  • Page 174
    Machine data 3.3 Channel-specific machine data This means that MD20270 $MC_CUTTING_EDGE_DEFAULT and MD20272 $MC_SUMCORR_DEFAULT define, with the programming of T0 the value of D, DL. For example, MD20270 $MC_CUTTING_EDGE_DEFAULT=1 MD20272 $MC_SUMCORR_DEFAULT=2 MD22550 $MC_TOOL_CHANGE_MODE=0 (tool change with T programming) N10 T0; T no. 0 has active number D1 and DL=2 which results in offset zero. If bit 2 is also set: Programming of a) T0;…
  • Page 175
    Machine data 3.3 Channel-specific machine data This variant is justified for programming «Tool number=Location» (revolver as toolholder) without tool management. The revolver can now be positioned on a location for which a tool has not (yet) been defined. This bit has no meaning if bit 0=1 is set. Bit 8=0: A tool that is located at a blocked magazine location is not taken into account when selecting a tool.
  • Page 176
    Machine data 3.3 Channel-specific machine data 22702 TRACE_STARTTRACE_STEP EXP, C06 Conditions for start of trace recording STRING PowerOn NBUP ,, , , , , , , , , , , , , , … Description: The machine data is only intended for diagnostic use. See TRACE_STARTTRACE_EVENT For TRACE_STARTTRACE_EVENT BLOCK_CHANGE the string TRACE_STARTTRACE_STEP is interpreted as a file name and block number!
  • Page 177
    Machine data 3.3 Channel-specific machine data 22710 TRACE_VARIABLE_NAME Definition of trace data STRING PowerOn NBUP BL_NR, TR_POINT, EV_TYPE, EV_SRC, CS_ASTEP,, BL_NR, TR_POINT, EV… Description: The machine data is only intended for diagnostic purposes. The MD datum defines which data are recorded in the trace file. 22712 TRACE_VARIABLE_INDEX EXP, C06…
  • Page 178
    Machine data 3.3 Channel-specific machine data Recording of various statuses of the channel. Static data Error statuses in the NCK memory management are scanned during trace generation. An error renames the trace file. Static data Possible names and their meaning: NCFIER.MPF Error in the file system NCSLER.MPF…
  • Page 179
    Machine data 3.3 Channel-specific machine data 22914 AXES_SCALE_ENABLE EXP, C01, C11 Activation for axial scaling factor ( G51 ) BOOLEAN PowerOn FALSE, FALSE, FALSE, FALSE, FALSE, FALSE, FALSE, FALSE… Description: This MD enables axial scaling. Meaning: Axial scaling not possible Axial scaling possible ->…
  • Page 180
    Machine data 3.3 Channel-specific machine data 22930 EXTERN_PARALLEL_GEOAX EXP, C01, C11 Assignment of a parallel channel axis to the geometry axis BYTE PowerOn 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0…
  • Page 181
    Machine data 3.3 Channel-specific machine data 24050 FRAME_SAA_MODE Saving and activating of data management frames DWORD PowerOn 0x0, 0x0, 0x0, 0x0, 0x0000003 0x0, 0x0, 0x0, 0x0… Description: Bit mask for saving and activating data management frames. The following applies: Bit 0: Data management frames are only activated by programming the bit masks $P_CHBFRMASK, $P_NCBFRMASK and $P_CHSFRMASK.
  • Page 182
    Machine data 3.3 Channel-specific machine data The 4 low-value bits have the following meaning for a 5-axis transformation: 0 axis sequence AB 1 axis sequence AC 2 axis sequence BA 3 axis sequence BC 4 axis sequence CA 5 axis sequence CB Generic orientation transformation (3- 5 axes) ab 256 TRANSMIT transformation…
  • Page 183
    Machine data 3.3 Channel-specific machine data MD24200 $MC_TRAFO_TYPE_2, MD24300 $MC_TRAFO_TYPE_3, … MD24460 $MC_TRAFO_TYPE_8 References: /FB/, F2, «5-Axis Transformation» 24120 TRAFO_GEOAX_ASSIGN_TAB_1 F2, TE4, TE4, M1, K1, W1 Assignment of the geometry axes to channel axes for BYTE NEW CONF transformation 1 808d-me42 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0,…
  • Page 184
    Machine data 3.3 Channel-specific machine data 808d-mte40 TRUE, TRUE, TRUE, TRUE, TRUE, TRUE, TRUE, TRUE… 808d-mte60 TRUE, TRUE, TRUE, TRUE, TRUE, TRUE, TRUE, TRUE… Description: This machine data states for each channel whether the tool is handled during the 1st transformation or externally.
  • Page 185
    Machine data 3.3 Channel-specific machine data 24220 TRAFO_GEOAX_ASSIGN_TAB_2 F2, M1 Assignment of geometry axes to channel axes for transformation BYTE NEW CONF 808d-me42 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0…
  • Page 186
    Machine data 3.3 Channel-specific machine data If this machine data is set, the Basic Coordinate System (BCS) refers to the tool reference point even with active transformations. Otherwise, it refers to the tool tip (Tool Center Point — TCP). The method of operation of protection zones and working area limitations varies correspondingly.
  • Page 187
    Machine data 3.3 Channel-specific machine data without groove side offset (i.e. TRACYL type 514 — equals 512) with groove side offset (i.e. TRACYL type 514 — equals 513) MD2..$MC_TRAFO_TYPE_… = 514 can be used to decide, via the selection parameters, whether calculation is made with or without groove side offset.
  • Page 188
    Machine data 3.3 Channel-specific machine data Description: Indicates a basic offset of the tools zero for the 1st TRACYL transformation. The offset is referenced to the geometry axes valid when TRACYL is active. The basic offset is included with and without selection of the tool length compensation. Programmed length corrections have an additive effect with respect to the basic tool.
  • Page 189
    Machine data 3.3 Channel-specific machine data 808d-te42 TRUE, TRUE, TRUE, TRUE, TRUE, TRUE, TRUE, TRUE… 808d-te62 TRUE, TRUE, TRUE, TRUE, TRUE, TRUE, TRUE, TRUE… 808d-mte40 TRUE, TRUE, TRUE, TRUE, TRUE, TRUE, TRUE, TRUE… 808d-mte60 TRUE, TRUE, TRUE, TRUE, TRUE, TRUE, TRUE, TRUE…
  • Page 190
    Machine data 3.3 Channel-specific machine data 808d-mte40 0.0, 0.0 , 0.0, 0.0, 0.0 , 0.0, 0.0, 0.0 , 0.0, 0.0, 0.0 , 0.0, … 808d-mte60 0.0, 0.0 , 0.0, 0.0, 0.0 , 0.0, 0.0, 0.0 , 0.0, 0.0, 0.0 , 0.0, … Description: Indicates a basic offset of the tools zero for the 1st TRANSMIT transformation.
  • Page 191
    Machine data 3.3 Channel-specific machine data 24960 TRANSMIT_ROT_SIGN_IS_PLUS_2 Sign of rotary axis for 2nd TRANSMIT transformation BOOLEAN NEW CONF 808d-me42 TRUE, TRUE, TRUE, TRUE, TRUE, TRUE, TRUE, TRUE… 808d-me62 TRUE, TRUE, TRUE, TRUE, TRUE, TRUE, TRUE, TRUE… 808d-te42 TRUE, TRUE, TRUE, TRUE, TRUE, TRUE, TRUE, TRUE…
  • Page 192
    Machine data 3.3 Channel-specific machine data 808d-me62 0.0, 0.0 , 0.0, 0.0, 0.0 , 0.0, 0.0, 0.0 , 0.0, 0.0, 0.0 , 0.0, … 808d-te42 0.0, 0.0 , 0.0, 0.0, 0.0 , 0.0, 0.0, 0.0 , 0.0, 0.0, 0.0 , 0.0, … 808d-te62 0.0, 0.0 , 0.0, 0.0, 0.0 , 0.0, 0.0, 0.0 , 0.0, 0.0,…
  • Page 193
    Machine data 3.3 Channel-specific machine data This information is used, among other things, for evaluating HMI, PLC and standard cycles. Meaning: MD = 0: Milling MD = 1: Turning MD = 2: Grinding Cylindrical grinding Surface grinding MD = 3: Nibbling MD = 4: (Enter additional technologies as and when required.)
  • Page 194
    Machine data 3.3 Channel-specific machine data Description: Timers are provided as system variables under the function program runtime. While the NCK-specific timers are always activated (for time measurements since the last control power on), the channel-specific timers have to be started via this machine data. Meaning: Bit 0 = 0 No measurement of total operating time for any part program…
  • Page 195
    Machine data 3.3 Channel-specific machine data 808d-me62 0x901 0x0FFFFFFF 808d-te42 0x901 0x0FFFFFFF 808d-te62 0x901 0x0FFFFFFF 808d-mte40 0x0, 0x0, 0x0, 0x0, 0x0FFFFFFF 0x0, 0x0, 0x0, 0x0… 808d-mte60 0x0, 0x0, 0x0, 0x0, 0x0FFFFFFF 0x0, 0x0, 0x0, 0x0… Description: The part counters can be configured with this machine data. Note: with bit 0 = 1 and $AC_REQUIRED_PARTS less than 0, all workpiece counts activated in this MD are frozen at the status reached.
  • Page 196
    Machine data 3.3 Channel-specific machine data Bit 16 — 19: Extension $AC_TOTAL_PARTS ————————————————————————- Meaning of the bits 16-19 applies only if Bit4 =1 and $AC_REQUIRED_PARTS > 0: Bit 16 = 0: $AC_TOTAL_PARTS is active in MDI mode Bit 16 = 1: No machining $AC_TOTAL_PARTS in MDI mode Bit 17 Reserved!
  • Page 197
    Machine data 3.3 Channel-specific machine data Description: With MD27920 $MC_TIME_LIMIT_NETTO_INT_TASK, the maximum runtime of the interpreter subtask is set. The interpreter subtask is started from the preprocessing task. If the interpreter task does not end on its own within the time set with MD27920 $MC_TIME_LIMIT_NETTO_INT_TASK, it will be stopped and continued after a preprocessing cycle.
  • Page 198
    Machine data 3.3 Channel-specific machine data STRING 1 byte per character, 200 characters per string are possible AXIS 4 bytes FRAME 400 bytes 28040 MM_LUD_VALUES_MEM V2, K1 Memory space for local user variables (DRAM) DWORD PowerOn 125, 125, 125, 125, 32000 125, 125, 125, 125…
  • Page 199
    Machine data 3.3 Channel-specific machine data 28082 MM_SYSTEM_FRAME_MASK M5, K2, W1 System frames (SRAM) DWORD PowerOn 808d-me42 0x7A1 0x00000FFF ReadOnly 808d-me62 0x7A1 0x00000FFF ReadOnly 808d-te42 0x7A1 0x00000FFF ReadOnly 808d-te62 0x7A1 0x00000FFF ReadOnly 808d-mte40 0x21, 0x21, 0x21, 0x00000FFF 0x21, 0x21, 0x21, 0x21, 0x21…
  • Page 200
    Machine data 3.3 Channel-specific machine data 28180 MM_MAX_TRACE_DATAPOINTS EXP, C02, C06 Length of the trace data buffer DWORD PowerOn NBUP 100, 100, 100, 100, 20000 100, 100, 100, 100… Description: MM_MAX_TRACE_DATAPOINTS defines the size of an internal data buffer which contains the trace recordings.
  • Page 201
    Machine data 3.3 Channel-specific machine data 28212 MM_NUM_PROTECT_AREA_CONTOUR C11, C02, C06, Elements for active protection zones (DRAM) DWORD PowerOn 30, 30, 30, 30, 30, 30, 30, 30… Description: This machine data defines for each channel how many internal contour elements in total are held available for active protection zones.
  • Page 202
    Machine data 3.3 Channel-specific machine data One element occupies approx. 64 bytes. The option «Synchronous actions stage 2» is required if the MD can be written to. 28252 MM_NUM_FCTDEF_ELEMENTS 2.4, 2.8, 6.1 Number of FCTDEF elements DWORD PowerOn 3, 3, 3, 3, 3, 3, 3, 3… Description: Defines the number of FCTDEF elements.
  • Page 203
    Machine data 3.3 Channel-specific machine data 28260 NUM_AC_FIFO 2.3, 2.4, 6.1 Number of FIFO variable for synchronized actions DWORD PowerOn 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0… Description: Number of FIFO variables $AC_FIFO1 — $AC_FIFO10 for motion-synchronous actions. FIFO variables are used for product tracking. A piece of information (e.g. the product length) for each part on a conveyor belt can be temporarily stored in each FIFO variable.
  • Page 204
    0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0… 20000 Description: Number of $AC_SYSTEM_ PARAM parameters for motion-synchronous actions. Depending on MD28255 $MC_MM_BUFFERED_AC_PARAM, DRAM or SRAM is required. Reserved for SIEMENS applications. 28276 MM_NUM_AC_SYSTEM_MARKER EXP, C02 Number of $AC_SYSTEM_MARKER for motion-synchronous DWORD…
  • Page 205
    Machine data 3.3 Channel-specific machine data 808d-me62 FALSE, FALSE, ReadOnly FALSE, FALSE, FALSE, FALSE, FALSE, FALSE… 808d-te42 FALSE, FALSE, ReadOnly FALSE, FALSE, FALSE, FALSE, FALSE, FALSE… 808d-te62 FALSE, FALSE, ReadOnly FALSE, FALSE, FALSE, FALSE, FALSE, FALSE… 808d-mte40 FALSE, FALSE, FALSE, FALSE, FALSE, FALSE, FALSE, FALSE…
  • Page 206
    Machine data 3.3 Channel-specific machine data 28402 MM_ABSBLOCK_BUFFER_CONF EXP, C02 Setting of upload buffer size DWORD PowerOn 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 32000 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0… Description: Dimensioning the size of the upload buffer: MD28402 $MC_MM_ABSBLOCK_BUFFER_CONF[0] : Number of blocks before the current block MD28402 $MC_MM_ABSBLOCK_BUFFER_CONF[1] : Number of blocks after the current block The machine data is tested for the following upper / lower limits during startup:…
  • Page 207
    Machine data 3.3 Channel-specific machine data The following values are recommended: for G643 and G644, if only geometry axes are traversed for G643 and G644, if geometry and rotary axes are traversed for COMPCAD for dyn. transformation A value that is too low this may lead to additional velocity limitations if a sufficient number of blocks cannot be made available for interpolation.
  • Page 208: Axis-Specific Machine Data

    Machine data 3.4 Axis-specific machine data Values substantially larger than 10 are only practical in exceptional cases. Not only the value of MD28540 $MC_MM_ARCLENGTH_SEGMENTS but also that of MD20262 $MC_SPLINE_FEED_PRECISION are crucial for the accuracy. 28560 MM_SEARCH_RUN_RESTORE_MODE Data restore after simulation DWORD PowerOn 0x0, 0x0, 0x0, 0x0,…

  • Page 209
    Machine data 3.4 Axis-specific machine data 30120 CTRLOUT_NR EXP, A01 Setpoint assignment: Setpoint output on drive submodule/module BYTE PowerOn 808d-me42 1, 2, 3, 4 808d-me62 808d-te42 1, 2, 3, 4 808d-te62 808d-mte40 1, 2, 3, 4 808d-mte60 Description: Number of the output on a module which is used to address the setpoint output. The value is always 1 for modular drives.
  • Page 210
    Machine data 3.4 Axis-specific machine data For simulation axes/spindles, MD30200 $MA_NUM_ENCS > 0 must be specified for referencing. 30210 ENC_SEGMENT_NR EXP, A01, A02 Actual value assignment: bus segment number. BYTE PowerOn 808d-me42 0, 0 ReadOnly 808d-me62 5, 5 808d-te42 0, 0 ReadOnly 808d-te62 5, 5…
  • Page 211
    Machine data 3.4 Axis-specific machine data For example telegram 103: 1 (=G1_ZSW etc.) or 2 (=G2_ZSW etc.). The index[n] of the machine data has the following coding: [Encoder no.]: 0 or 1 If an input is selected, to which no encoder is connected, alarm 300008 «Measuring circuit not available on drive»…
  • Page 212
    Machine data 3.4 Axis-specific machine data 30250 ACT_POS_ABS EXP, A02, A08 Internal encoder position DOUBLE PowerOn ODLD, -, — 808d-me42 0.0, 0.0 808d-me62 0.0, 0.0 808d-te42 0.0, 0.0 808d-te62 0.0, 0.0 808d-mte40 0.0, 0.0 808d-mte60 0.0, 0.0 Description: The actual position (hardware counter status only without machine reference) is stored (in internal format display) in this MD.
  • Page 213
    Machine data 3.4 Axis-specific machine data 30270 ENC_ABS_BUFFERING EXP, A01, A02 Absolute encoder: Traversing range extension BYTE PowerOn 808d-me42 0, 0 808d-me62 0, 0 808d-te42 0, 0 808d-te62 0, 0 808d-mte40 0, 0 808d-mte60 0, 0 Description: This MD defines the way in which the absolute encoder position is buffered, and whether a traversing range extension is active on software side (exceeding the limits of the absolute value encoder range that can be displayed on the hardware).
  • Page 214
    Machine data 3.4 Axis-specific machine data 808d-te42 FALSE, FALSE, FALSE, TRUE 808d-te62 FALSE, FALSE, FALSE, TRUE, TRUE, TRUE 808d-mte40 FALSE, FALSE, FALSE, TRUE 808d-mte60 FALSE, FALSE, FALSE, FALSE, FALSE, FALSE, FALSE, FALSE… Description: Axis: The axis is defined as a «rotary axis». ●…
  • Page 215
    Machine data 3.4 Axis-specific machine data Description: 1: A modulo conversion is performed on the setpoints for the rotary axis. The software limit switches and the working area limitations are inactive; the traversing range is therefore unlimited in both directions. MD30300 $MA_IS_ROT_AX must be set to «1» 0: No modulo conversion MD irrelevant for: MD30300 $MA_IS_ROT_AX = «0»…
  • Page 216
    Machine data 3.4 Axis-specific machine data Description: Defines the size of the modulo range. Default positions are accepted and displayed within this range. Useful modulo ranges are n * 360 degrees with integer n. Other settings are equally possible in principle. Attention should be paid to having a useful relationship between the positions in the NC and the mechanics (ambiguity).
  • Page 217
    Machine data 3.4 Axis-specific machine data Modulo rotary axis/spindle: programmed positions must be in the modulo range. Otherwise an alarm is output. Bit 0 = 1: When programming positions outside the modulo range, an alarm is not signaled. The position is modulo-converted internally. Example: B-5 has the same significance as B355, POS[A]=730 is identical to POS[A]=10 and SPOS=-360 behaves the same as SPOS=0 (modulo range 360 degrees) Bit 1 = 0:…
  • Page 218
    Machine data 3.4 Axis-specific machine data Bit 8 = 0: Absolute encoders can only be readjusted in the enabled state MD34210 $MA_ENC_REFP_STATE = 1. Bit 8 = 1: Absolute encoders can also be readjusted in the adjusted state MD34210 $MA_ENC_REFP_STATE = 2. Bit 9 = 0: Coupled axes (e.g.
  • Page 219
    Machine data 3.4 Axis-specific machine data The MD is bit-coded; the following bits are assigned: Bit 0 = 0: «Axis control» is not permissible. Bit 0 = 1: «Axis control» is permissible (the axis moves in the speed mode, if the NC/PLC interface signal DB380x DBX5000.1 (Axis control) is set).
  • Page 220
    Machine data 3.4 Axis-specific machine data Description: MD30465 $MA_AXIS_LANG_SUB_MASK defines for the leading spindle(s) of a coupling (synchronous spindle coupling, ELG, tangential tracking, coupled motion, master value coupling, master/slave) which language constructs/functions are to be substituted by the user program set by MD15700 $MN_LANG_SUB_NAME / MD15702 $MN_LANG_SUB_PATH (default: /_N_CMA_DIR/_N_LANG_SUB_SPF).
  • Page 221
    Machine data 3.4 Axis-specific machine data MD irrelevant for non-equidistant indexes in accordance with tables. Related to: MD30502 $MA_INDEX_AX_DENOMINATOR, MD30503 $MA_INDEX_AX_OFFSET; MD30500 $MA_INDEX_AX_ASSIGN_POS_TAB 30502 INDEX_AX_DENOMINATOR A01, A10 Indexing axis equidistant positions denominator DWORD Reset Description: Defines the value of the denominator for calculating the distances between two indexing positions when the positions are equidistant.
  • Page 222
    Machine data 3.4 Axis-specific machine data 808d-me62 808d-te42 808d-te62 808d-mte40 808d-mte60 Description: Number of fixed point positions set, i.e. the number of valid entries in MD30600 $MA_FIX_POINT_POS. For G75, two (2) fixed point positions are assumed in MD30600 $MA_FIX_POINT_POS for reasons of compatibility, even if ‘0’ has been entered in this machine data.
  • Page 223
    Machine data 3.4 Axis-specific machine data 808d-mte40 2048, 2048, 2048, 2048, 2048, 2048, 2048, 2048, 2048, 2048, 2048… 808d-mte60 2048, 2048, 2048, 2048, 2048, 2048, 2048, 2048, 2048, 2048, 2048… Description: For rotary measuring system only: The number of encoder lines per encoder revolution must be entered in this MD. Index [n] of the machine data has the following coding: [encoder no.]: 0 or 1 31030…
  • Page 224
    Machine data 3.4 Axis-specific machine data 31060 DRIVE_AX_RATIO_NUMERA A02, A11 A2, A3, G2, S1, V1 Numerator load gearbox DWORD PowerOn 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1 -2147000000 2147000000 Description: The load gearbox numerator is entered in this MD. The index [n] of the machine data has the following coding: [control parameter set no.]: 0-5 31070 DRIVE_ENC_RATIO_DENOM…
  • Page 225
    Machine data 3.4 Axis-specific machine data Description: The input value is used to define the distance of an increment which, when traversing an axis during active transformation using the JOG keys, is valid for the incremental dimension or via handwheel. The distance, through which the axis traverses when executing the incremental dimension with transformation active, depending on the traversing key actuated or handwheel grid position, is defined by the following parameters:…
  • Page 226
    The periods of time depend on the hardware used. The default value is typical for SIEMENS products. Adjustment by the customer is only required in exceptional cases. Input of the minimum value «0.0» deactivates the compensation (only active in combination with MD34200 $MA_ENC_REFP_MODE = 7).
  • Page 227
    Machine data 3.4 Axis-specific machine data (creep velocity [Enc. no.]) 31600 TRACE_VDI_AX EXP, N06 Trace-specification for axial VDI signals BOOLEAN PowerOn NBUP FALSE Description: This machine data determines whether the axial VDI signals for this axis are recorded in the NCSC trace (according to MD18794 $MN_MM_TRACE_VDI_SIGNAL). 32000 MAX_AX_VELO A11, A04…
  • Page 228
    Machine data 3.4 Axis-specific machine data 808d-mte40 (10000./100), (0./ 0.) (1.e300/ 1.e300) (10000./100), (10000./100), (10000./100), (10000./… 808d-mte60 (10000./100), (0./ 0.) (1.e300/ 1.e300) (10000./100), (10000./100), (10000./100), (10000./… Description: The axis velocity entered applies when the rapid traverse override key is pressed in JOG mode and when the axial feedrate override is set to 100%.
  • Page 229
    Machine data 3.4 Axis-specific machine data Spindles in JOG mode: This machine data can also be used to define the JOG mode speed for specific spindles (if SD41200 $SN_JOG_SPIND_SET_VELO = 0). However, the speed can be modified with the spindle override switch. Related to: MD32000 $MA_MAX_AX_VELO (maximum axis velocity)
  • Page 230
    Machine data 3.4 Axis-specific machine data Description: The value entered defines the revolutional feedrate of the axis in JOG mode in relation to the revolutions of the master spindle. This feedrate is active when SD41100 $SN_JOG_REV_IS_ACTIVE= 1 (revolutional feedrate active with JOG). MD irrelevant for: Linear feedrate;…
  • Page 231
    Machine data 3.4 Axis-specific machine data 32082 HANDWH_MAX_INCR_VELO_SIZE A05, A10, A04 mm/min, rev/min Limitation for velocity override DOUBLE Reset CTEQ 808d-me42 500., 500., 500., 1800. (0./ 0.) (1.e300/ 1.e300) 808d-me62 500., 500., 500., 1800., (0./ 0.) (1.e300/ 1.e300) 1800. 808d-te42 500., 500., 500., 1800.
  • Page 232
    Machine data 3.4 Axis-specific machine data Bit 7 = 1 The override is always assumed to be 100% for handwheel travel, regardless of how the override switch is set. Exception: override 0% is always active. Bit 8 = 0 The override is active with DRF Bit 8 = 1 The override is always assumed to be 100% for DRF, regardless of how the override switch is set.
  • Page 233
    Machine data 3.4 Axis-specific machine data or when SD41110 $SN_JOG_SET_VELO = 0: vDRF = MD32020 $MA_JOG_VELO * MD32090 $MA_HANDWH_VELO_OVERLAY_FACTOR The velocity setting in SD41130 $SN_JOG_ROT_AX_SET_VELO applies for DRF on rotary axes instead of the value in SD41110 $SN_JOG_SET_VELO. MD irrelevant for: JOG handwheel Related to: MD32020 $MA_JOG_VELO (JOG axis velocity)
  • Page 234
    Machine data 3.4 Axis-specific machine data 32200 POSCTRL_GAIN A07, A11 G1, TE1, TE9, K3, S3, A2, A3, D1, G2, S1, V1 1000/min Servo gain factor DOUBLE NEW CONF CTEQ 808d-me42 16.66666667, 2000. 16.66666667, 16.66666667, 16.66666667, 16.66666667, 808d-me62 33.33333334, 2000. 33.33333334, 33.33333334, 33.33333334, 33.33333334,…
  • Page 235
    Otherwise (MD32250 $MA_RATED_OUTVAL unequal to zero), the scaling of the manipulated variable is not determined from the drive (for example non-Siemens PROFIdrive drives), but set with RATED_VELO and RATED_OUTVAL, even in the case of these, irrespective of the scaling active on the drive side.
  • Page 236
    Machine data 3.4 Axis-specific machine data 32260 RATED_VELO A01, A11 A3, D1, G2 rev/min Rated motor speed DOUBLE NEW CONF CTEQ 808d-me42 2000.0, 2000.0, 2000.0 0.0 808d-me62 3000.0, 3000.0, 3000.0, 3000.0, 3000.0, 3000.0, 3000.0, 3000.0… 808d-te42 2000.0, 2000.0, 2000.0 0.0 808d-te62 3000.0, 3000.0, 3000.0, 3000.0,…
  • Page 237
    Machine data 3.4 Axis-specific machine data The maximum angular or linear axis acceleration must be entered dependent upon machine data MD30300 $MA_IS_ROT_AX. In the case of linear interpolation of the axes in a grouping, the grouping is limited in such a way that no axis is overloaded. With regard to contour accuracy, the control dynamic behavior has to be taken into account.
  • Page 238
    Machine data 3.4 Axis-specific machine data The machine data must be same for all axes of an axis container. Related to: MD32400 $MA_AX_JERK_ENABLE MD32410 $MA_AX_JERK_TIME and for type 3: 32410 AX_JERK_TIME A07, A04 G1, TE1, S3, B2, G2 Time constant for axial jerk filter DOUBLE NEW CONF 0.001…
  • Page 239
    Machine data 3.4 Axis-specific machine data 808d-mte40 1000.0, 1000.0, 1.e-9 1000.0, 1000.0, 1000.0, 1000.0, 1000.0, 1000.0… 808d-mte60 1000.0, 1000.0, 1.e-9 1000.0, 1000.0, 1000.0, 1000.0, 1000.0, 1000.0… Description: The jerk limit value limits the rate of change of axis acceleration in JOG and REF modes as well as in positioning axis mode with MD18960 $MN_POS_DYN_MODE=0.
  • Page 240
    Machine data 3.4 Axis-specific machine data 808d-te42 20., 20., 40., 20., 20., 20., 20., 40., 20., 20., 20., 20., 40.,… 808d-te62 40., 40., 40., 20., 20., 40., 40., 40., 20., 20., 40., 40., 40.,… 808d-mte40 1.e6, 1.e6, 1.e6, 1.e6, 1.e6, 1.e6, 1.e6, 1.e6, 1.e6, 1.e6, 1.e6…
  • Page 241
    Machine data 3.4 Axis-specific machine data ● positive, if the encoder is leading the machine part (normal situation) ● negative, if the encoder is behind the machine part. Backlash compensation is not active when 0 is entered. Backlash compensation is always active after reference point approach in all operating modes.
  • Page 242
    Machine data 3.4 Axis-specific machine data (number of measuring systems) MD30200 $MA_NUM_ENCS (number of measuring systems) MD36500 $MA_ENC_CHANGE_TOL (maximum tolerance for actual position value changeover) 32457 BACKLASH_DYN_MAX_VELO Limitation of dynamic backlash compensation value change DOUBLE NEW CONF Description: Relative velocity at which a dynamic backlash compensation value is retracted. Limitation of compensation value change.
  • Page 243
    Machine data 3.4 Axis-specific machine data Thus, no friction compensation values are entered. Related to: MD32490 $MA_FRICT_COMP_MODE 32510 FRICT_COMP_ADAPT_ENABLE EXP, A09 Adaptation friction compensation active BOOLEAN NEW CONF FALSE Description: Friction compensation with amplitude adaptation is enabled for the axis. Quadrant errors on circular contours can be compensated with friction compensation.
  • Page 244
    Machine data 3.4 Axis-specific machine data In the 4th acceleration range (MD32570 <= a ), the switching amplitude = MD32530. Not relevant for: MD32500 $MA_FRICT_COMP_ENABLE = 0 MD32490 $MA_FRICT_COMP_MODE = 2 (neural QEC) Related to: MD32500 $MA_FRICT_COMP_ENABLE Friction compensation active MD32510 $MA_FRICT_COMP_ADAPT_ENABLE Friction compensation adaptation active MD32530 $MA_FRICT_COMP_CONST_MIN…
  • Page 245
    Machine data 3.4 Axis-specific machine data 32540 FRICT_COMP_TIME EXP, A09 Friction compensation time constant DOUBLE NEW CONF 0.015 Description: The friction compensation value is entered via a DT1 filter. The add-on amplitude decays in accordance with the time constant. MD irrelevant for: MD32500 $MA_FRICT_COMP_ENABLE = 0 Related to: MD32500 $MA_FRICT_COMP_ENABLE…
  • Page 246
    Machine data 3.4 Axis-specific machine data Adaptation acceleration values 1 to 3 are interpolation points for defining the adaptation curve. The adaptation curve is subdivided into 4 ranges, in each of which a different friction compensation value applies. In the 1st acceleration range ( a <…
  • Page 247
    Machine data 3.4 Axis-specific machine data Friction compensation active MD32510 $MA_FRICT_COMP_ADAPT_ENABLE Friction compensation adaptation active MD32520 $MA_FRICT_COMP_CONST_MAX Maximum friction compensation value MD32530 $MA_FRICT_COMP_CONST_MIN Minimum friction compensation value MD32550 $MA_FRICT_COMP_ACCEL1 Adaptation acceleration value 1 MD32560 $MA_FRICT_COMP_ACCEL2 Adaptation acceleration value 2 MD32540 $MA_FRICT_COMP_TIME Friction compensation time constant 32620 FFW_MODE…
  • Page 248
    Machine data 3.4 Axis-specific machine data Description: MD32630 $FFW_ACTIVATION_MODE can be used to define whether the feedforward control for this axis/spindle can be switched on and off by the part program. The feedforward control cannot be switched on or off by the high-level language elements FFWON and FFWOF respectively.
  • Page 249
    Machine data 3.4 Axis-specific machine data b. Specifically for SINAMICS drives, if inversion of the encoder signal is parameterized in MD32110 $MA_ENC_FEEDBACK_POL=-1 with active DSC. Remedy: Remove inversion of the encoder signal from MD32110 $MA_ENC_FEEDBACK_POL, and enter it in SINAMICS parameter P410 instead. 32642 STIFFNESS_CONTROL_CONFIG A01, A07…
  • Page 250
    Machine data 3.4 Axis-specific machine data 32710 CEC_ENABLE Enable of sag compensation BOOLEAN NEW CONF 808d-me42 FALSE 808d-me62 FALSE 808d-te42 FALSE 808d-te62 FALSE 808d-mte40 FALSE 808d-mte60 FALSE Description: Sag compensation is enabled for this axis. Inter-axis machine geometry errors (e.g. sag and angularity errors) can be compensated with sag compensation.
  • Page 251
    Machine data 3.4 Axis-specific machine data 808d-mte40 10.0 808d-mte60 10.0 Description: In sag compensation, the absolute value of the total compensation value (sum of compensation values of all active compensation relations) is monitored axially with machine data value CEC_MAX_SUM. If the determined total compensation value is larger than the maximum value, alarm 20124 is triggered.
  • Page 252
    Machine data 3.4 Axis-specific machine data 32750 TEMP_COMP_TYPE K3, W1 Temperature compensation type BYTE PowerOn CTEQ 808d-me42 ReadOnly 808d-me62 ReadOnly 808d-te42 ReadOnly 808d-te62 ReadOnly 808d-mte40 808d-mte60 Description: The type of temperature compensation applicable to the machine axis is activated in MD32750 $MA_TEMP_COMP_TYPE.
  • Page 253
    Machine data 3.4 Axis-specific machine data Interpolator cycle time = Basic system clock rate * factor for interpolation cycle Interpolator cycle time = MD10050 $MN_SYSCLOCK_CYCLE_TIME ^ MD10070 $MN_IPO_SYSCLOCK_TIME_RATIO Example: MD10050 $MN_SYSCLOCK_CYCLE_TIME = 0.004 [s] -> Interpolator cycle time = 0.004 * 3 = 0.012 [s] Calculation of the maximum velocity increase resulting from a change made to the temperature compensation parameter DvTmax DvTmax = MD32000 $MA_MAX_AX_VELO * MD32760 $MA_COMP_ADD_VELO_FACTOR…
  • Page 254
    Machine data 3.4 Axis-specific machine data 808d-me62 0.0045, 0.0045, 0.0045, 0.0045, 0.0045, 0.0045, 0.0045, 0.0045, … 808d-te42 -0.0017, -0.0017, -0.0017, -0.0017, -0.0017, -0.0017, -0.0017, -… 808d-te62 0.0045, 0.0045, 0.0045, 0.0045, 0.0045, 0.0045, 0.0045, 0.0045, … 808d-mte40 0.008, 0.008, 0.008, 0.008, 0.008, 0.008, 0.008, 0.008, 0.008, 0…
  • Page 255
    Machine data 3.4 Axis-specific machine data 32910 DYN_MATCH_TIME G1, K3, S3, A2, A3, G2, S1, V1 Time constant of dynamic response adaptation DOUBLE NEW CONF 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, Description: The time constant of the dynamic response adaptation of an axis has to be entered in this MD.
  • Page 256
    Machine data 3.4 Axis-specific machine data 33120 PATH_TRANS_POS_TOL K1, PGA mm, degrees Maximum deviation for smoothing with G645 DOUBLE NEW CONF CTEQ 808d-me42 0.005 1.e-9 808d-me62 0.005 1.e-9 808d-te42 0.005 1.e-9 808d-te62 0.005 1.e-9 808d-mte40 0.005 1.e-9 808d-mte60 0.005 1.e-9 Description: The value specifies the maximum permitted path deviation for smoothing with G645.
  • Page 257
    Machine data 3.4 Axis-specific machine data 34020 REFP_VELO_SEARCH_CAM A03, A11, A04 G1, R1 mm/min, rev/min Reference point approach velocity DOUBLE Reset 808d-me42 5000., 5000., 5000., (0./ 0.) (1.e300/ 1.e300) 720. 808d-me62 5000., 5000., 5000., (0./ 0.) (1.e300/ 1.e300) 720., 720. 808d-te42 5000., 5000., 5000., (0./ 0.)
  • Page 258
    Machine data 3.4 Axis-specific machine data 808d-te62 300.00, 300.00, (0./ 0.) (1.e300/ 1.e300) 300.00, 300.00, 300.00, 300.00, 720.00, 720.00, … 808d-mte40 (300.0/ 300.0)/ (10.0/ (0./ 0.) (1.e300/ 1.e300) 10.0), (300.0/ 300.0)/ (10.0/ 10.0), (300… 808d-mte60 (300.0/ 300.0)/ (10.0/ (0./ 0.) (1.e300/ 1.e300) 10.0), (300.0/ 300.0)/ (10.0/ 10.0), (300…
  • Page 259
    Machine data 3.4 Axis-specific machine data The machine axis accelerates to the velocity specified in MD34040 $MA_REFP_VELO_SEARCH_MARKER (reference point creep velocity) in the opposite direction to that specified in MD34010 $MA_REFP_CAM_DIR_IS_MINUS (reference point approach in minus direction). If the axis leaves the reference cam (NC/PLC interface signal DB380x DBX1000.7 (Reference point approach delay) is reset) the control is synchronized with the first zero mark.
  • Page 260
    Machine data 3.4 Axis-specific machine data 808d-me62 10000., 10000., (0./ 0.) (1.e300/ 1.e300) 10000., 720., 720. 808d-te42 10000., 10000., (0./ 0.) (1.e300/ 1.e300) 10000., 720. 808d-te62 10000., 10000., (0./ 0.) (1.e300/ 1.e300) 10000., 720., 720., 720. 808d-mte40 (10000.0/ 20.0), (0./ 0.) (1.e300/ 1.e300) (10000.0/ 20.0), (10000.0/ 20.0),…
  • Page 261
    Machine data 3.4 Axis-specific machine data It describes the offset between the machine zero and the zero point of the absolute measuring system. Note: In conjunction with absolute encoders, this MD is modified by the control during calibration processes and modulo offset. With rotary absolute encoders (on linear and rotary axes), the modification frequency also depends on the setting of MD34220 $MA_ENC_ABS_TURNS_MODULO.
  • Page 262
    Machine data 3.4 Axis-specific machine data Description: ● Incremental encoder with zero mark(s): The position value which is set as the current axis position after detection of the zero mark and traversal of the distance REFP_MOVE_DIST + REFP_MOVE_DIST_CORR (relative to zero mark). REFP_SET_POS of the reference point number, which is set at the instant that the edge of the reference cam signal rises (NC/PLC interface signal DB380x DBX2.4 — .7 (Reference point value 1 to 4)), is set as the axis position.
  • Page 263
    Machine data 3.4 Axis-specific machine data 0 means: The machine axis is not started by channel-specific referencing, and NC start is not possible without referencing this axis. 1 means: The machine axis is started by channel-specific referencing. 2 means: The machine axis is started by channel-specific referencing if all machine axes identified by a 1 in MD34110 $MA_REFP_CYCLE_NR are referenced.
  • Page 264
    Machine data 3.4 Axis-specific machine data 808d-mte40 0, 0 808d-mte60 0, 0 Description: ● Absolute encoder: This machine data contains the absolute encoder status Encoder is not calibrated Encoder calibration enabled (but not yet calibrated) Encoder is calibrated Default setting for recommissioning: Encoder is not calibrated. No significance, has the same effect as «0»…
  • Page 265
    Machine data 3.4 Axis-specific machine data 808d-me62 0, 0 808d-te42 0, 0 808d-te62 0, 0 808d-mte40 0, 0 808d-mte60 0, 0 Description: The encoder serial number (EnDat encoders) can be read out here. It is updated at PowerOn or when parking is deselected. «0»…
  • Page 266
    Machine data 3.4 Axis-specific machine data Description: The distances between two reference marks are defined variably, so that the position of the crossed reference marks can be determined accurately in linear measuring systems with distance-coded reference marks. The difference between two reference mark distances is entered in MD34310 $MA_ENC_MARKER_INC.
  • Page 267
    Machine data 3.4 Axis-specific machine data ● Thread-cutting (G33, G34, G35) ● Revolutional feedrate (G95, G96, G97, FPRAON) ● Display of actual position and velocity, or speed respectively. 35000 SPIND_ASSIGN_TO_MACHAX A01, A06, A11 M1, S3, K2, S1 Assignment of spindle to machine axis BYTE PowerOn 808d-me42…
  • Page 268
    Machine data 3.4 Axis-specific machine data Related to: MD35090 $MA_NUM_GEAR_STEPS (number of gear stages 1st data set, see bit 5) MD35092 $MA_NUM_GEAR_STEPS2 (number of gear stages 2nd data set, see bit 5) MD35110 $MA_GEAR_STEP_MAX_VELO (max. speed for autom. gear stage change) MD35112 $MA_GEAR_STEP_MAX_VELO2 (max.
  • Page 269
    Machine data 3.4 Axis-specific machine data Axis mode, MD34110 $MA_REFP_CYCLE_NR can be used to configure / deactivate forced referencing on NC start Corresponds with: MD35030 $MA_SPIND_DEFAULT_ACT_MASK (activate spindle initial setting) MD20700 $MC_REFP_NC_START_LOCK (NC start disable without reference point) 35030 SPIND_DEFAULT_ACT_MASK A06, A10 Time at which initial spindle setting is effective BYTE…
  • Page 270
    Machine data 3.4 Axis-specific machine data The programmed speed is transferred to SD 43200 $SA_SPIND_S (incl. speed default settings via FC18 and synchronized actions). S programmings that are not speed programmings are not written to the SD. These include, for example, S value with constant cutting velocity (G96, G961), S value with revolution-related dwell time (G4).
  • Page 271
    Machine data 3.4 Axis-specific machine data MD is Corresponds with: MD20850 $MC_SPOS_TO_VDI MD35040 $MA_SPIND_ACTIVE_AFTER_RESET MD35020 $MA_SPIND_DEFAULT_MODE SD43200 $SA_SPIND_S 35040 SPIND_ACTIVE_AFTER_RESET A06, A10 S1, Z1, 2.7 Own spindle RESET BYTE PowerOn CTEQ 808d-me42 808d-me62 808d-te42 808d-te62 808d-mte40 808d-mte60 Description: MD35040 $MA_SPIND_ACTIVE_AFTER_RESET defines the response of the spindle after channel reset NC/PLC interface signal DB3000 DBX0.7 (Reset) and program end (M2, M30).
  • Page 272
    Machine data 3.4 Axis-specific machine data MD35012 $MA_GEAR_STEP_CHANGE_POSITION (gear stage change position) MD35014 $MA_GEAR_STEP_USED_IN_AXISMODE (gear stage for axis mode with M70) MD35110 $MA_GEAR_STEP_MAX_VELO (max. speed for gear stage change) MD35120 $MA_GEAR_STEP_MIN_VELO (min. speed for gear stage change) MD35130 $MA_GEAR_STEP_MAX_VELO_LIMIT (max. speed of gear stage) MD35140 $MA_GEAR_STEP_MIN_VELO_LIMIT (min.
  • Page 273
    Machine data 3.4 Axis-specific machine data 35110 GEAR_STEP_MAX_VELO A06, A11, A04 A3, S1 rev/min Maximum speed for gear stage change DOUBLE NEW CONF CTEQ 500., 500., 1000., 2000., 4000., 8000. Description: MD35110 $MA_GEAR_STEP_MAX_VELO defines the maximum speed (upper switching threshold) of the gear stage for automatic gear stage change M40 S…
  • Page 274
    Machine data 3.4 Axis-specific machine data See MD35110 $MA_GEAR_STEP_MAX_VELO for more information. Note: ● Programming a spindle speed which undershoots the lowest speed of the first gear stage MD35120 $MA_GEAR_STEP_MIN_VELO[1] triggers a switch to the first gear stage. Not relevant for: ●…
  • Page 275
    Machine data 3.4 Axis-specific machine data ● The configured speed cannot exceed the value from MD35100 $MA_SPIND_VELO_LIMIT. ● If position control is active for the spindle, the speed is limited to the maximum speed of MD35135 $MA_GEAR_STEP_PC_MAX_VELO_LIMIT. ● The NC/PLC interface signal «Setpoint speed limited» is set to indicate that the speed is being limited.
  • Page 276
    Machine data 3.4 Axis-specific machine data ● If an S value lower than the minimum speed is programmed, the setpoint speed is increased to the minimum speed. ● The NC/PLC interface signal «Setpoint speed increased» is set to indicate that the speed has been increased.
  • Page 277
    Machine data 3.4 Axis-specific machine data 35160 SPIND_EXTERN_VELO_LIMIT A06, A04 A3, S1, V1, Z1 rev/min Spindle speed limitation from PLC DOUBLE NEW CONF CTEQ 1000.0 1.0e-6 Description: A limiting value for the maximum spindle speed is entered in MD35160 $MA_SPIND_EXTERN_VELO_LIMIT, which is taken into account exactly when the NC/PLC interface signal DB380x DBX3.6 (Velocity/speed limitation) is set.
  • Page 278
    Machine data 3.4 Axis-specific machine data 35220 ACCEL_REDUCTION_SPEED_POINT A06, A04 S1, S3, B2 Speed for reduced acceleration DOUBLE Reset Description: This machine data defines the threshold speed/velocity for spindles/positioning/path axes from which the acceleration reduction is to start. The reference is the defined maximum speed/velocity.
  • Page 279
    Machine data 3.4 Axis-specific machine data TRUE: Acceleration reduction active MD is active only when MD32420 $MA_JOG_AND_POS_JERK_ENABLE = FALSE. The settings in MD35220 $MA_ACCEL_REDUCTION_SPEED_POINT and MD35230 $MA_ACCEL_REDUCTION_FACTOR are always active for spindles (in spindle mode). Remark: This MD also influences the path motion with SOFT, BRISK, TRAFO 35242 ACCEL_REDUCTION_TYPE B1, B2…
  • Page 280
    Machine data 3.4 Axis-specific machine data ● Gear stage change at defined spindle position. After reaching the position configured in MD35012 $MA_GEAR_STEP_CHANGE_POSITION, there is a waiting period equal to the time specified here. After expiry of this time, the position control is switched off for an active direct measuring system, and the NC/PLC interface signals DB390x DBX2000.3 (Change gear) and DB390x DBX2000.0 — .2 (Setpoint gear stage A-C) are output.
  • Page 281
    Machine data 3.4 Axis-specific machine data NC/PLC interface signal DB380x DBX2002.5 (Oscillation speed) NC/PLC interface signal DB380x DBX2002.4 (Oscillation via PLC) 35430 SPIND_OSCILL_START_DIR Start direction during oscillation BYTE Reset CTEQ Description: With the NC/PLC interface signal DB380x DBX2002.5 (Oscillation speed), the spindle motor accelerates to the speed specified in MD35400: $MA_SPIND_OSCILL_DES_VELO.
  • Page 282
    Machine data 3.4 Axis-specific machine data MD35440 $MA_SPIND_OSCILL_TIME_CW (oscillation time for M3 direction) NC/PLC interface signal DB380x DBX2002.5 (Oscillation speed) NC/PLC interface signal DB380x DBX2002.4 (Oscillation via PLC) 35500 SPIND_ON_SPEED_AT_IPO_START A03, A06, A10 S1, Z1 Feedrate enable for spindle in the set range BYTE Reset CTEQ…
  • Page 283
    Machine data 3.4 Axis-specific machine data MD35500 $MA_SPIND_ON_SPEED_AT_IPO_START (feed enable for spindle in setpoint range) 35550 DRILL_VELO_LIMIT A06, A11, A04 rev/min Maximum speeds for tapping DOUBLE NEW CONF CTEQ 10000., 10000., 10000., 10000., 10000., 10000. Description: Limit speed values for tapping without compensating chuck with G331/G332. The maximum speed of the linear motor characteristic range (constant acceleration capacity) must be specified depending on the gear stage.
  • Page 284
    Machine data 3.4 Axis-specific machine data 808d-me62 0.01, 0.01, 0.01, 0.1, 808d-te42 0.01, 0.01, 0.01, 0.1 808d-te62 0.01, 0.01, 0.01, 0.1, 0.1, 0.1 808d-mte40 0.01, 0.01, 0.01, 0.01, 0.01, 0.01, 0.01, 0.01… 808d-mte60 0.01, 0.01, 0.01, 0.01, 0.01, 0.01, 0.01, 0.01… Description: Threshold for exact stop fine See also MD36000 $MA_STOP_LIMIT_COARSE (exact stop coarse)
  • Page 285
    Machine data 3.4 Axis-specific machine data MD 36010: $MA_STOP_LIMIT_FINE (exact stop fine) 36030 STANDSTILL_POS_TOL G1, A3, D1, G2 mm, degrees Standstill tolerance DOUBLE NEW CONF 808d-me42 0.2, 0.2, 0.2, 1.0 808d-me62 0.2, 0.2, 0.2, 1.0, 1.0 808d-te42 0.2, 0.2, 0.2, 1.0 808d-te62 0.2, 0.2, 0.2, 1.0, 1.0, 808d-mte40…
  • Page 286
    Machine data 3.4 Axis-specific machine data 36060 STANDSTILL_VELO_TOL A05, A04 TE1, A2, A3, D1, Z1 mm/min, rev/min Threshold velocity/speed ‘Axis/spindle in stop’ DOUBLE NEW CONF 808d-me42 5.00, 5.00, 5.00, (0./ 0.) (1.e300/ 1.e300) 1800.00 808d-me62 5.00, 5.00, 5.00, (0./ 0.) (1.e300/ 1.e300) 1800.00, 360.00 808d-te42…
  • Page 287
    Machine data 3.4 Axis-specific machine data Related to: NC/PLC interface signal DB380x DBX1000.3 (2nd software limit switch plus) 36120 POS_LIMIT_MINUS2 A03, A05 TE1, A3, Z1 mm, degrees 2nd software limit switch minus DOUBLE NEW CONF CTEQ -1.0e8 Description: Same meaning as 2nd software limit switch plus, but the traversing range limitation is in the negative direction.
  • Page 288
    Machine data 3.4 Axis-specific machine data 808d-te62 11500., 11500., (0./ 0.) (1.e300/ 1.e300) 11500., 11500., 11500., 11500., 11500., 11500., … 808d-mte40 (0./ 0.) (1.e300/ 1.e300) 808d-mte60 (0./ 0.) (1.e300/ 1.e300) Description: The threshold value for actual velocity monitoring is entered in this machine data. If the axis has at least one active encoder and if this encoder is below its limit frequency, alarm 25030 «Actual velocity alarm limit»…
  • Page 289
    Machine data 3.4 Axis-specific machine data 36300 ENC_FREQ_LIMIT EXP, A02, A05, A3, D1, R1, Z1 Encoder limit frequency DOUBLE PowerOn 333000, 3.0e5 Description: This MD is used to enter the encoder frequency, which, in general, is a manufacturer specification (type plate, documentation). For PROFIdrive: No automatic, software-internal limitation for encoders on the PROFIdrive drive;…
  • Page 290
    Machine data 3.4 Axis-specific machine data 100: no zero mark monitoring together with suppression of all encoder monitoring operations, i.e. not only alarm 25020 but also alarms 25000, 25010 etc. are suppressed. >0 but less than 100: direct triggering of power ON alarm 25000 ( or 25001). >100: attenuated error message: reset alarm 25010 (25011) is output instead of power ON alarm 25000 (25001).
  • Page 291
    Machine data 3.4 Axis-specific machine data With spindles, this MD refers to the lower of the speeds set in MD35130 $MA_GEAR_STEP_MAX_VELO_LIMIT of the current gear stage and MD35100 $MA_SPIND_VELO_LIMIT. 36600 BRAKE_MODE_CHOICE EXP, A05 A3, Z1 Deceleration response on hardware limit switch BYTE PowerOn CTEQ…
  • Page 292
    Machine data 3.4 Axis-specific machine data Description: Maximum time delay for removal of «controller enable» after faults. The speed enable (controller enable) of the drive is removed internally within the controller after the set delay time, at the latest. The delay time entered becomes active as a result of the following events: ●…
  • Page 293
    Machine data 3.4 Axis-specific machine data If the drift additional value exceeds the limit value entered in MD36710 $MA_DRIFT_LIMIT, alarm 25070 «Drift value too large» is output and the drift additional value is limited to this value. Not relevant for: MD36700 $MA_DRIFT_ENABLE = 0 36720 DRIFT_VALUE…
  • Page 294
    Machine data 3.4 Axis-specific machine data Note: The value range of MD36730 $MA_DRIVE_SIGNAL_TRACKING can be restricted because of reduced functions of control systems 37100 GANTRY_AXIS_TYPE A01, A10 G1, TE1, Z3 Gantry axis definition BYTE PowerOn CTEQ 808d-me42 ReadOnly 808d-me62 808d-te42 ReadOnly 808d-te62 808d-mte40…
  • Page 295
    Machine data 3.4 Axis-specific machine data MD37110 $MA_GANTRY_POS_TOL_WARNING is used to define a limit value for the position actual value difference; when the limit is exceeded, warning 10652 «Warning limit exceeded» is output. However, the gantry axes are not stopped internally in the control.
  • Page 296
    Machine data 3.4 Axis-specific machine data In addition, the NC/PLC interface signal DB390x DBX5005.2 (Gantry trip limit exceeded) to the PLC is set to «1». Special cases: Alarm 10653 «Error limit exceeded» in response to violation of the gantry trip limit. Related to: MD37100 $MA_GANTRY_AXIS_TYPE Gantry axis definition MD37110 $MA_GANTRY_POS_TOL_WARNING Gantry warning limit…
  • Page 297
    Machine data 3.4 Axis-specific machine data Description: Actual value difference between master axis and slave axis in the case of alarm 10653. Leads to alarm 10657 after Power ON. 37140 GANTRY_BREAK_UP EXP, A01, A10 G1, Z3 Invalidate gantry axis grouping BOOLEAN Reset CTEQ…
  • Page 298
    Machine data 3.4 Axis-specific machine data Extended monitoring of the actual value difference is active. An offset between master and slave axes occurring in tracking or BREAK_UP is taken into account in the monitoring of the actual value difference. Prerequisite: The gantry grouping must be rereferenced or resynchronized after control startup.
  • Page 299
    If the setting of the control on the drive (manufacturer- specific drive parameter) is known (i.e. with SIEMENS drives), the software automatically sets the MD; in other words, in this case the MD is merely used for display purposes.
  • Page 300
    Machine data 3.4 Axis-specific machine data 808d-mte40 5000 808d-mte60 5000 Description: The number of interpolation points required per measuring system must be defined for the leadscrew error compensation. The required number can be calculated as follows using the defined parameters: $AA_ENC_COMP_MAX — $AA_ENC_COMP_MIN MD38000 $MA_MM_ENC_COMP_MAX_POINTS = ———————————- $AA_ENC_COMP_STEP…
  • Page 301: Nc Setting Data

    NC setting data 41010 JOG_VAR_INCR_SIZE Size of the variable increment for JOG DOUBLE Immediately Description: This setting data defines the number of increments when variable increment (INCvar) is selected. This increment size is traversed by the axis in JOG mode each time the traverse key is pressed or the handwheel is turned one detent position and variable increment is selected (PLC interface signal «Active machine function: INC variable»…

  • Page 302
    NC setting data 41100 JOG_REV_IS_ACTIVE JOG mode: revolutional feedrate / linear feedrate BYTE Immediately 808d-me42 0x0E 808d-me62 0x0E 808d-te42 0x0E 808d-te62 0x0E 808d-mte40 0x0E 808d-mte60 0x0E Description: Bit 0 = 0: The behavior depends on the following: — in the case of an axis/spindle: on the axial SD43300 $SA_ASSIGN_FEED_PER_REV_SOURCE — in the case of a geometry axis with an active frame with rotation: on the channel-specific SD42600 $SC_JOG_FEED_PER_REV_SOURCE…
  • Page 303
    NC setting data 41110 JOG_SET_VELO mm/min Axis velocity in JOG DOUBLE Immediately Description: Value not equal to 0: The velocity value entered applies to linear axes traversed in JOG mode if linear feedrate (G94) is active for the relevant axis (SD41100 $SN_JOG_REV_IS_ACTIVE = 0). The axis velocity is active for ●…
  • Page 304
    NC setting data Value = 0: If 0 has been entered in the setting data, the active revolutional feedrate in JOG mode is MD32050 $MA_JOG_REV_VELO «revolutional feedrate with JOG». Each axis can be given its own revolutional feedrate with this MD (axial MD). SD irrelevant for ..
  • Page 305
    NC setting data SD irrelevant for ..Application example(s). The operator can thus define a JOG speed for the spindles for a specific application. Related to ..Axial MD32020 $MA_JOG_VELO (JOG axis velocity) MD35130 $MA_GEAR_STEP_MAX_VELO_LIMIT (maximum speeds of the gear stages) 41300 CEC_TABLE_ENABLE Compensation table enable…
  • Page 306
    NC setting data NC/PLC interface signal DB390x DBX0.5 (Referenced/synchronized 2) 41310 CEC_TABLE_WEIGHT Weighting factor compensation table DOUBLE Immediately 808d-me42 1.0, 1.0, 1.0, 1.0, 1.0, 1.0, 1.0, 1.0… 808d-me62 1.0, 1.0, 1.0, 1.0, 1.0, 1.0, 1.0, 1.0… 808d-te42 1.0, 1.0, 1.0, 1.0, 1.0, 1.0, 1.0, 1.0…
  • Page 307
    NC setting data 808d-mte40 FALSE, FALSE, FALSE, FALSE, FALSE, FALSE, FALSE, FALSE… 808d-mte60 FALSE, FALSE, FALSE, FALSE, FALSE, FALSE, FALSE, FALSE… Description: $SN_CEC_0[t] and $SN_CEC_1[t] can be calculated absolutely or additively: FALSE: Absolute, the calculated values of $SN_CEC_0[t] and $SN_CEC_1[t] are included as absolute values.
  • Page 308
    NC setting data The values have the same properties for thread run-in and thread run-out: <0: The thread axis is started/decelerated with configured acceleration. Jerk is according to the current programming of BRISK/SOFT. Behavior is compatible with MD 20650__THREAD_START_IS_HARD = FALSE used until now. Starting/deceleration of the feed axis during thread cutting is stepped.
  • Page 309
    NC setting data As configuration 0, except for thread cutting (G33, G34, G35) and tapping (G331, G332, G63). These functions are executed as programmed. As configuration 1, except for thread cutting (G33, G34, G35) and tapping (G331, G332, G63). These functions are executed as programmed. As configuration 2, except for thread cutting (G33, G34, G35) and tapping (G331, G332, G63).
  • Page 310
    NC setting data Description: Default value for the path feed in adjustment movements of tangential axes on activation of a tangential axis coupling during or after block search. The content of this setting data is only used if it is not equal to zero and bit7 = 0 of MD $MN_SEARCH_RUN_MODE is set.
  • Page 311
    NC setting data Note: The block content corresponds to «WAITM( 101, 1,3,5,7)», the user does not see this block content, he sees REPOSA! Note: SERUPRO_SYNC_MASK is evaluated as soon as the part program command REPOSA is interpreted. SERUPRO_SYNC_MASK can still be changed if SERUPRO is in the state «search target found».
  • Page 312
    NC setting data 808d-te42 0., 0., 0., 0., 0., 0., 0., 0., 0., 0., 0., 0., 0., 0., 0., 0., … 808d-te62 0., 0., 0., 0., 0., 0., 0., 0., 0., 0., 0., 0., 0., 0., 0., 0., … 808d-mte40 0., 0., 0., 0., 0., 0., 0., 0., 0., 0., 0., 0., 0., 0., 0., 0., …
  • Page 313
    NC setting data Description: When incremental programming is used on an axis, only the programmed position delta is traversed after a frame change. Work offsets in FRAMES are only traversed when an absolute position is specified. When incremental programming is used on an axis, changes to work offsets are traversed after a frame change (standard response up to software version 3).
  • Page 314
    NC setting data SD = FALSE: Incremental value is added to current actual value The setting data is evaluated on NC start for output of the action blocks. 42450 CONTPREC B1, K6 Contour accuracy DOUBLE Immediately 808d-me42 0.1, 0.1, 0.1, 0.1, 0.1, 0.000001 999999.
  • Page 315
    NC setting data 42465 SMOOTH_CONTUR_TOL Maximum contour tolerance on smoothing DOUBLE Immediately 808d-me42 0.05, 0.05, 0.05, 0.05, 0.000001 999999. 0.05, 0.05, 0.05, 0.05… 808d-me62 0.05, 0.05, 0.05, 0.05, 0.000001 999999. 0.05, 0.05, 0.05, 0.05… 808d-te42 0.05, 0.05, 0.05, 0.05, 0.000001 999999.
  • Page 316
    NC setting data 808d-me62 36.0, 36.0, 36.0, 36.0, 89.0 36.0, 36.0, 36.0, 36.0… 808d-te42 36.0, 36.0, 36.0, 36.0, 89.0 36.0, 36.0, 36.0, 36.0… 808d-te62 36.0, 36.0, 36.0, 36.0, 89.0 36.0, 36.0, 36.0, 36.0… 808d-mte40 36.0, 36.0, 36.0, 36.0, 89.0 36.0, 36.0, 36.0, 36.0… 808d-mte60 36.0, 36.0, 36.0, 36.0, 89.0…
  • Page 317
    NC setting data 808d-mte40 1.0, 1.0, 1.0, 1.0, 1.0, 1.0, 1.0, 1.0, 1.0, 1.0, 1.0, 1.0, 1.0,… 808d-mte60 1.0, 1.0, 1.0, 1.0, 1.0, 1.0, 1.0, 1.0, 1.0, 1.0, 1.0, 1.0, 1.0,… Description: The setting data specifies a typical tool radius. It is evaluated for the COMPSURF compressor only.
  • Page 318
    NC setting data MD28072 $MC_MM_MAXNUM_SURF_GROUPS 42475 COMPRESS_CONTUR_TOL F2, PGA Maximum contour deviation with compressor DOUBLE Immediately 808d-me42 0.05, 0.05, 0.05, 0.05, 0.000001 999999. 0.05, 0.05, 0.05, 0.05… 808d-me62 0.05, 0.05, 0.05, 0.05, 0.000001 999999. 0.05, 0.05, 0.05, 0.05… 808d-te42 0.05, 0.05, 0.05, 0.05, 0.000001 999999.
  • Page 319
    NC setting data 42490 CUTCOM_G40_STOPRE Retraction behavior of tool radius compensation with prep. stop BOOLEAN Immediately FALSE, FALSE, FALSE, FALSE, FALSE, FALSE, FALSE, FALSE… Description: FALSE: If there is a preprocessing stop (either programmed or generated internally by the control) before the deselection block (G40) when tool radius compensation is active, then firstly the starting point of the deselection block is approached from the last end point before the preprocessing stop.
  • Page 320
    NC setting data If the position in question contains the value 2, the approach or retraction movement is only performed if at least one geometry axis is programmed in the activation/ deactivation block. To obtain the same results as the above example with this setting, the program must be altered as follows: N100 x10 y0 N110 G41 x10…
  • Page 321
    NC setting data CASE B: In the same situation as described above, the point of intersection is chosen that is located on the first partial contour nearer to the block end, but only if the absolute value of the contour violation caused by this is less than the effective contour tolerance.
  • Page 322
    NC setting data 808d-te42 FALSE, FALSE, FALSE, FALSE, FALSE, FALSE, FALSE, FALSE… 808d-te62 FALSE, FALSE, FALSE, FALSE, FALSE, FALSE, FALSE, FALSE… 808d-mte40 FALSE, FALSE, FALSE, FALSE, FALSE, FALSE, FALSE, FALSE… 808d-mte60 FALSE, FALSE, FALSE, FALSE, FALSE, FALSE, FALSE, FALSE… Description: SD42500 $SC_SD_MAX_PATH_ACCEL is included in the limit calculations if SD42502 $SC_IS_SD_MAX_PATH_ACCEL=TRUE Related to …
  • Page 323
    NC setting data 42512 IS_SD_MAX_PATH_JERK Evaluate SD42510 $SC_SD_MAX_PATH_JERK BOOLEAN Immediately 808d-me42 FALSE, FALSE, FALSE, FALSE, FALSE, FALSE, FALSE, FALSE… 808d-me62 FALSE, FALSE, FALSE, FALSE, FALSE, FALSE, FALSE, FALSE… 808d-te42 FALSE, FALSE, FALSE, FALSE, FALSE, FALSE, FALSE, FALSE… 808d-te62 FALSE, FALSE, FALSE, FALSE, FALSE, FALSE, FALSE, FALSE…
  • Page 324
    NC setting data 42522 CORNER_SLOWDOWN_END End of feed reduction at G62. DOUBLE Immediately 808d-me42 0., 0., 0., 0., 0., 0., 0., 0..808d-me62 0., 0., 0., 0., 0., 0., 0., 0..808d-te42 0., 0., 0., 0., 0., 0., 0., 0..808d-te62 0., 0., 0., 0., 0., 0., 0., 0..
  • Page 325
    NC setting data For example SD42526 $SC_CORNER_SLOWDOWN_CRIT = 90 means that all corners of 90 degrees or a more acute angle are traversed slower with G62. 42528 CUTCOM_DECEL_LIMIT Feed lowering on circles with tool radius compensation DOUBLE Immediately 808d-me42 0., 0., 0., 0., 0., 0., 0., 0..
  • Page 326
    NC setting data The revolutional feedrate is derived from the master spindle of the channel in which the axis/spindle is active. No revolutional feedrate is active if the master spindle is at a standstill. Related to ..SD43300: $SA_ASSIGN_FEED_PER_REV_SOURCE (revolutional feedrate for position axes/ spindles) 42660 ORI_JOG_MODE…
  • Page 327
    NC setting data 808d-mte40 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0… 808d-mte60 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0…
  • Page 328
    NC setting data Internal machining is performed. The circle radius in SD42691 $SC_JOG_CIRCLE_RADIUS is the maximum possible radius. Bit 2 = 1 : External machining is performed. The circle radius in SD42691 $SC_JOG_CIRCLE_RADIUS is the minimum possible radius. Bit 3 = 0 : Given a full circle, the radius is enlarged starting from the circle center point in the direction of the ordinate (2nd geometry axis) of the plane.
  • Page 329
    NC setting data 808d-me62 808d-te42 808d-te62 808d-mte40 808d-mte60 Description: The total path results from the string chaining of SD42700 $SC_EXT_PROG_PATH + the programmed subprogram identifier. 42750 ABSBLOCK_ENABLE Enable base block display BOOLEAN Immediately 808d-me42 TRUE, TRUE, TRUE, TRUE, TRUE, TRUE, TRUE, TRUE…
  • Page 330
    NC setting data 808d-mte40 FALSE, FALSE, FALSE, FALSE, FALSE, FALSE, FALSE, FALSE… 808d-mte60 FALSE, FALSE, FALSE, FALSE, FALSE, FALSE, FALSE, FALSE… Description: TRUE: If a frame with mirror image machining is active, the tool components ($TC_DP3[…, …] to $TC_DP5[…, …]) and the components of the base dimensions ($TC_DP21[…, …] to $TC_DP23[…, …]) whose associated axes are mirrored, are also mirrored, i.e.
  • Page 331
    NC setting data 42920 WEAR_SIGN_CUTPOS Sign of tool wear depending on tool point direction BOOLEAN Immediately 808d-me42 FALSE, FALSE, FALSE, FALSE, FALSE, FALSE, FALSE, FALSE… 808d-me62 FALSE, FALSE, FALSE, FALSE, FALSE, FALSE, FALSE, FALSE… 808d-te42 FALSE, FALSE, FALSE, FALSE, FALSE, FALSE, FALSE, FALSE…
  • Page 332
    NC setting data 42930 WEAR_SIGN Sign of wear BOOLEAN Immediately 808d-me42 FALSE, FALSE, FALSE, FALSE, FALSE, FALSE, FALSE, FALSE… 808d-me62 FALSE, FALSE, FALSE, FALSE, FALSE, FALSE, FALSE, FALSE… 808d-te42 FALSE, FALSE, FALSE, FALSE, FALSE, FALSE, FALSE, FALSE… 808d-te62 FALSE, FALSE, FALSE, FALSE, FALSE, FALSE, FALSE, FALSE…
  • Page 333
    NC setting data Bit 0 = TRUE: Do not apply transformations to $TC_DP12 — $TC_DP14. Bit 1 = TRUE: Do not apply transformations to $TC_SCPx3 — $TC_SCPx5. Bit 2 = TRUE: Do not apply transformations to $TC_ECPx3 — $TC_ECPx5. The bits not mentioned here are (currently) not assigned. 42940 TOOL_LENGTH_CONST Change of tool length components with change of active plane…
  • Page 334
    NC setting data If the 100s digit of the settings data is 1, the sign of the second length component is inverted. If the setting data SD42950 $SC_TOOL_LENGTH_TYPE has the value 3, this setting data is only active with milling tools. Together with setting data SD42942 $SC_TOOL_LENGTH_CONST_T, the length assignments can then be set separately for turning and milling tools.
  • Page 335
    NC setting data Description: This setting data defines the assignment of the tool length components to the geometry axes irrespective of the tool type. It can assume any value between 0 and 3. Any other value is interpreted as 0. Value Standard assignment.
  • Page 336
    NC setting data If n is the content of the 100s digit of the setting data, the coordinate system is rotated around the orientation vector by the angle n * 90 degrees. n may have the values 0 to 3. Larger values are evaluated as if they were 0. If the sign of the setting data is negative, the coordinate system is rotated around the axis by 180 degrees, which is defined by the original position of the normal orientation vector (that is, before any rotation due to n being unequal to 0).
  • Page 337
    NC setting data If the sign of the setting data is negative, the coordinate system is rotated around the axis by 180 degrees, which is defined by the original position of the normal orientation vector (that is before any rotation on account of n being unequal to 0). Example: If the content of the setting data is -18, then: Orientation vector…
  • Page 338
    NC setting data 808d-te42 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0,… 808d-te62 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0,… 808d-mte40 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0, 0.0,…
  • Page 339
    NC setting data 42980 TOFRAME_MODE Frame definition at TOFRAME, TOROT and PAROT DWORD Immediately 808d-me42 1000, 1000, 1000, 1000, 1000, 1000, 1000, 1000… 808d-me62 1000, 1000, 1000, 1000, 1000, 1000, 1000, 1000… 808d-te42 1000, 1000, 1000, 1000, 1000, 1000, 1000, 1000… 808d-te62 1000, 1000, 1000, 1000, 1000, 1000,…
  • Page 340: 808D-Me42

    NC setting data None of the other settings of SD42980 $SC_TOFRAME_MODE (0,1,2,…1000,1001..) should be used for recommissioning. For compatibility reasons, the following settings remain valid: 0: The orientation of the coordinate system is determined by the value of machine data 21110 $MC_X_AXIS_IN_OLD_X_Z_PLANE.

  • Page 341
    NC setting data Optionally, the first character of the string can be written as sign (+ or -). A plus sign will not have any effect on the angle calculation, but a minus sign will invert the sign of the calculated angle. 42990 MAX_BLOCKS_IN_IPOBUFFER Maximum number of blocks in IPO buffer…
  • Page 342
    NC setting data 43120 DEFAULT_SCALE_FACTOR_AXIS FBFA Axial default scaling factor with G51 active DWORD Immediately Description: If no axial scaling factor I, J, or K is programmed in the G51 block, SD43120 $SA_DEFAULT_SCALE_FACTOR_AXIS is active. The scaling factor is only active if MD22914 $MC_AXES_SCALE_ENABLE is set.
  • Page 343
    NC setting data The range of values and the functionality correspond to the 15th G group «feed type». Permissible values are the G values: 93, 94, 95, 96, 961, 97, 971 and 973. The stated values make a functional distinction between the following variants: ==>…
  • Page 344
    NC setting data MD10709 $MN_PROG_SD_POWERON_INIT_TAB MD10710 $MN_PROG_SD_RESET_SAVE_TAB 43230 SPIND_MAX_VELO_LIMS S1, Z1 rev/min Spindle speed limitation with G96 DOUBLE Immediately 100.0 Description: Limits the spindle speed with G96, G961, G97 to the stated maximum value [degrees/ second]. This setting data can be written from the block with LIMS. Note: MD 10710 $MN_PROG_SD_RESET_SAVE_TAB can be set so that the value written by the part program is transferred into the active file system on reset (that is the value is…
  • Page 345
    NC setting data approach position from the positive direction. approach position from the negative direction. 43300 ASSIGN_FEED_PER_REV_SOURCE V1, P2, S1 Revolutional feedrate for positioning axes/spindles DWORD Immediately CTEQ Description: No revolutional feedrate is active. >0= Machine axis index of the rotary axis/spindle, from which the revolutional feedrate is derived.
  • Page 346
    NC setting data 43410 WORKAREA_MINUS_ENABLE Working area limitation active in the negative direction BOOLEAN Immediately CTEQ FALSE Description: The working area limitation of the axis concerned is active in the negative direction. The working area limitation of the axis concerned is switched off in the negative direction.
  • Page 347
    NC setting data 808d-me62 808d-te42 808d-te62 808d-mte40 808d-mte60 Description: Position of the oscillating axis at reversal point 1. Note: MD10710 $MN_PROG_SD_RESET_SAVE_TAB can be be set so that the value written by the part program is transferred to the active file system on reset (that is the value is retained after RESET.) Application example(s) NC language:…
  • Page 348
    NC setting data MD 10710 $MN_PROG_SD_RESET_SAVE_TAB can be be set so that the value written by the part program is transferred to the active file system on reset (that is the value is retained after reset.) Application example(s) NC language: OST1[Axis]=Position Related to ..
  • Page 349
    NC setting data 43750 OSCILL_NUM_SPARK_CYCLES Number of spark-out strokes DWORD Immediately 808d-me42 808d-me62 808d-te42 808d-te62 808d-mte40 808d-mte60 Description: Number of sparking-out strokes performed after ending the oscillating movement Application example(s) NC language: OSNSC[Axis]=Stroke number Note: MD 10710 $MN_PROG_SD_RESET_SAVE_TAB can be be set so that the value written by the part program is transferred to the active file system on reset (that is the value is retained after reset.) Related to ..
  • Page 350
    NC setting data 808d-mte40 0x7FFFFFFF 808d-mte60 0x7FFFFFFF Description: Bit mask: Bit no. | Meaning in OSCILL_CTRL_MASK —————————————————————————— 0(LSB)-1 | 0: Stop at the next reversal point if the oscillating movement is switched off | 1: Stop at reversal point 1 if the oscillating movement is switched off | 2: Stop at reversal point 2 if the oscillating movement is switched off…
  • Page 351
    NC setting data 808d-te42 FALSE 808d-te62 FALSE 808d-mte40 FALSE 808d-mte60 FALSE Description: Switching the oscillating movement on and off Note: MD 10710 $MN_PROG_SD_RESET_SAVE_TAB can be be set so that the value written by the part program is transferred to the active file system on reset (that is the value is retained after reset.) Application example(s) NC language:…
  • Page 352
    NC setting data MD32760 $MA_COMP_ADD_VELO_FACTOR Velocity overshoot caused by compensation 43910 TEMP_COMP_SLOPE Lead angle for position-dependent temperature compensation DOUBLE Immediately 808d-me42 ReadOnly 808d-me62 ReadOnly 808d-te42 ReadOnly 808d-te62 ReadOnly 808d-mte40 808d-mte60 Description: In the case of position-dependent temperature compensation, the error curve characteristic of the temperature-dependent actual-value deviation can often be approximated by a straight line.
  • Page 353
    NC setting data The axis traverses additionally the compensation value calculated for the current actual position as soon as the position-dependent temperature compensation becomes active (MD32750 $MA_TEMP_COMP_TYPE = 2 or 3). SD irrelevant for ..MD32750 $MA_TEMP_COMP_TYPE = 0 or 1 Related to ..
  • Page 354
    NC setting data Parameter Manual Parameter Manual, 08/2015, 6FC5397-8EP40-0BA1…
  • Page 355: Detailed Descriptions Of Interface Signals

    Detailed descriptions of interface signals General information Interfaces The PLC user interface exchanges signals and data with the following units via the PLC user program: ● NCK (NC kernel), ● HMI (display unit) Signal and data are exchanged via different data areas. The PLC user program need not take care of the exchange which is performed automatically from the user’s view.

  • Page 356: User Alarm

    Detailed descriptions of interface signals 5.2 User alarm The signals can be subdivided into the following groups (see Figure 4-1): ● General signals ● Mode signals ● Channel signals ● Axis / spindle signals Notes on the PLC interface signal address representation Currently, PLC interface signal addresses are represented by the V structure on the HMI while the manual shows them by the DB structure.

  • Page 357: Signals From / To Hmi

    Detailed descriptions of interface signals 5.3 Signals from / to HMI Signal state 0 The main run reads in preprocessed part program blocks. corresponding to … IS «Program status running» Note for the reader Signals from / to HMI 5.3.1 Program control signals from HMI DB1700 DRF selected…

  • Page 358
    Detailed descriptions of interface signals 5.3 Signals from / to HMI Signal state 0 Dry run feedrate is not selected. The programmed feedrate is active. corresponding to … IS «Activate dry run feedrate» (DB3200 DBX0.6) SD: DRY_RUN_FEED (dry run feedrate) Note for the reader Function Manual Basic Functions V1, K1 DB1700…
  • Page 359
    Detailed descriptions of interface signals 5.3 Signals from / to HMI DB1700 NC start DBX7.1 Signal(s) to PLC (HMI → PLC) Edge evaluation: Yes Signal(s) updated: Cyclic Signal state 1 or edge AUTOMATIC mode: change 0 → 1 The selected NC program is started or continued, or the auxiliary functions that were saved during the program interruption are output.
  • Page 360: Signals From Hmi

    Detailed descriptions of interface signals 5.3 Signals from / to HMI corresponding to … DB3300 DBX3.7 (channel status reset) Note for the reader Function Manual Basic Functions K1 5.3.2 Signals from HMI DB1800 AUTOMATIC mode DBX0.0 Signal(s) to PLC (HMI → PLC) Edge evaluation: Yes Signal(s) updated: Cyclic Signal state 1 or edge…

  • Page 361: Signals From Plc

    Detailed descriptions of interface signals 5.3 Signals from / to HMI Special cases, errors, … An alarm that withdraws the IS «808D READY» (DB3100 DBX0.3), ensures that the channel is no longer in the reset state. In order to switch to another mode, a reset (DB1800 DBX0.7) must be initi‐ ated.

  • Page 362: General Selection / Status Signals From Hmi

    Detailed descriptions of interface signals 5.3 Signals from / to HMI Signal state 0 No effect. Application example The interface signal: DB1900 DBX0.7 (switchover Machine/Work) must be transferred to the interface signal: DB1900 DBX5000.7 (actual value in Work) in order that switchover becomes effective. corresponding to …

  • Page 363
    Detailed descriptions of interface signals 5.3 Signals from / to HMI corresponding to … IS «Machine axis» (DB1900 DBX1003.7, DB1900 DBX1004.7) IS «Activate handwheel» 1 to 2 / geometry axes 1, 2 (DB3200 DBX1000.0 to .2, DB3200 DBX1004.0 to .2, DB3200 DBX1008.0 to .2) IS «Activate handwheel»…
  • Page 364: General Selection / Status Signals To Hmi

    Detailed descriptions of interface signals 5.3 Signals from / to HMI corresponding to … DB1900 DBX1003.0 — .2 (axis number for handwheel 1) DB1900 DBX1004.0 — .2 (axis number for handwheel 2) DB1900 DBX1003.7/1004.7 (machine axis for handwheel 1/2) DB380x DBX4.0/.1 (activate handwheel 1/2) DB390x DBX4.0/.1 (handwheel 1/2 active) Note for the reader Function Manual Basic Functions H1…

  • Page 365: Auxiliary Function Transfer From Nc Channel

    Detailed descriptions of interface signals 5.4 Auxiliary function transfer from NC channel corresponding to … DB1900 DBX0.7 (switchover Machine/Work) Note for the reader Operating manual (corresponding to the software being used) Auxiliary function transfer from NC channel DB2500 DBX4.0 to .4 M function Change 1 to 5 DBX6.0 S function Change 1…

  • Page 366
    Detailed descriptions of interface signals 5.4 Auxiliary function transfer from NC channel Special cases, errors, … With T0, the actual tool is removed from the tool holder but not replaced by a new tool (default configuration of the machine manufacturer). Note for the reader Function Manual Basic Functions H2 DB2500…
  • Page 367
    Detailed descriptions of interface signals 5.4 Auxiliary function transfer from NC channel Application Control of automatic tool selection. corresponding to … IS «S function for the spindle (REAL), axis-specific» (DB370x DBD4) Note for the reader Function Manual Basic Functions H2 DB2500 D function 1 DBD5000…
  • Page 368: Nck Signals

    Detailed descriptions of interface signals 5.5 NCK signals NCK signals 5.5.1 General signals to NCK DB2600 EMERGENCY OFF DBX0.1 Signal(s) to NC (PLC → NCK) Edge evaluation: No Signal(s) updated: Cyclic Signal state 1 or edge The NC is brought into the EMERGENCY OFF state and the EMERGENCY change 0 →…

  • Page 369: General Signals From Nck

    Detailed descriptions of interface signals 5.5 NCK signals corresponding to … IS «Machine function 1 INC up to continuous» in the mode area (DB3000 DBX2.0 to .6) IS «Machine function 1 INC, …, continuous» for axis 1 in the Work (DB3200 DBX1001.0 to .6) for axis 2 in the Work (DB3200 DBX1005.0 to .6) for axis 3 in the Work (DB3200 DBX1009.0 to .6) IS «Machine function 1 INC, …, continuous»…

  • Page 370
    Detailed descriptions of interface signals 5.5 NCK signals Signal state 0 or edge The CPU is not ready. change 1 → 0 Note for the reader Function Manual Basic Functions G2 DB2700 Drive ready DBX2.6 Signal(s) from NC (NCK → PLC) Edge evaluation: No Signal(s) updated: Cyclic Signal state 1 or edge…
  • Page 371: Mode Signals

    Detailed descriptions of interface signals 5.6 Mode signals Signal state 1 or edge At least one NCK alarm is present. change 0 → 1 This is a group signal for the interface signals of all available channels: DB3300 DBX4.6 (channel-specific NCK alarm pending). Signal state 0 or edge No NCK alarm is active.

  • Page 372
    Detailed descriptions of interface signals 5.6 Mode signals DB3000 JOG mode DBX0.2 Signal(s) to NCK (PLC → NCK) Edge evaluation: No Signal(s) updated: Cyclic Signal state 1 or edge JOG mode is selected by the PLC program. change 0 → 1 Signal state 0 or edge JOG mode is not selected by the PLC program.
  • Page 373
    Detailed descriptions of interface signals 5.6 Mode signals Signal irrelevant for … if JOG mode is not active. Note for the reader Function Manual Basic Functions K1 DB3000 Single block type B DBX1.6 Edge evaluation: No Signal(s) updated: Signal state 1 or edge Bit set and DB3000 DBX1.7 not set: Response across mode groups change 0 →…
  • Page 374
    Detailed descriptions of interface signals 5.6 Mode signals Signal state 1 or edge The input range is only used if IS «INC inputs active in the mode area» (DB2600 change 0 → 1 DBX1.0) is set. These signals are valid for all axes and geometry axes. With the IS «INC…»…
  • Page 375
    Detailed descriptions of interface signals 5.6 Mode signals Signal state 0 or edge MDI mode is not active. change 1 → 0 Note for the reader Function Manual Basic Functions K1 DB3100 Active JOG mode DBX0.2 Signal(s) from NCK (NCK → PLC) Edge evaluation: No Signal(s) updated: Cyclic Signal state 1 or edge…
  • Page 376: Channel-Specific Signals

    Detailed descriptions of interface signals 5.7 Channel-specific signals Channel-specific signals 5.7.1 Signals to channel DB3200 Activate DRF DBX0.3 Signal(s) to channel (PLC → NCK) Edge evaluation: No Signal(s) updated: Cyclic Signal state 1 or edge The function DRF is selected. change 0 →…

  • Page 377
    Detailed descriptions of interface signals 5.7 Channel-specific signals Signal state 1 or edge M1 programmed in the part program leads to a programmed stop when being change 0 → 1 executed in the AUTOMATIC or MDI mode. Signal state 0 or edge M1 programmed in the part program does not lead to a programmed stop.
  • Page 378
    Detailed descriptions of interface signals 5.7 Channel-specific signals DB3200 Enable protection zones DBX1.1 Signal(s) to channel (PLC → NCK) Edge evaluation: Yes Signal(s) updated: Cyclic Signal state 1 or edge When a positive edge of this signal appears, a protection zone is enabled change 0 →…
  • Page 379
    Detailed descriptions of interface signals 5.7 Channel-specific signals DB3200 Feedrate override DBB4 Signal(s) to channel (PLC → NCK) Edge evaluation: No Signal(s) updated: Cyclic Signal state 1 or edge Gray coding for feedrate override change 0 → 1 Switch set‐ Code Feedrate override factor ting…
  • Page 380
    Detailed descriptions of interface signals 5.7 Channel-specific signals Signal state 1 or edge Gray coding for rapid traverse override change 0 → 1 Switch set‐ Code Rapid traverse override ting 00001 00011 0.01 00010 0.02 00110 0.04 00111 0.06 00101 0.08 00100 0.10…
  • Page 381
    Detailed descriptions of interface signals 5.7 Channel-specific signals Signal state 1 or edge The signal is active in one channel in all modes. change 0 → 1 ● Signal causes a feedrate disable of all of the axes that are interpolating relative to each other if no G33 (thread) is present.
  • Page 382
    Detailed descriptions of interface signals 5.7 Channel-specific signals Application In a case there an auxiliary function has to have been executed before the next block can be processed (e.g. for a tool change), automatic block change must be inhibited with read-in disable. corresponding to …
  • Page 383
    Detailed descriptions of interface signals 5.7 Channel-specific signals Special cases, errors, … When the axes have been stopped with IS «Delete distance-to-go» the next program block is prepared with the new positions. After a «Delete distance- to-go», geometry axes thus follow a different contour to the one originally defined in the part program.
  • Page 384
    Detailed descriptions of interface signals 5.7 Channel-specific signals Signal state 1 or edge The feedrate override between 0 and a maximum of 120% entered at the PLC change 0 → 1 interface is active for the path feedrate and therefore automatically for the related axes.
  • Page 385
    Detailed descriptions of interface signals 5.7 Channel-specific signals Signal state 1 or edge The NC program being executed is stopped after the part program block being change 0 → 1 executed has been completely processed. Otherwise, as for «NC stop». Signal state 0 or edge No effect change 1 →…
  • Page 386
    Detailed descriptions of interface signals 5.7 Channel-specific signals Signal state 1 or The NC program being executed is immediately stopped, the actual block is not edge change 0 completed. Distances-to-go are only completed after a new start. The axes and spin‐ →…
  • Page 387: Description

    Detailed descriptions of interface signals 5.7 Channel-specific signals DB3200 DBX14.0 Activate handwheel 1 as contour handwheel DBX14.1 Activate handwheel 2 as contour handwheel Signal(s) to channel (PLC → NCK) Edge evaluation: No Signal(s) updated: Cyclic Signal state 1 Handwheel 1/2 is selected as contour handwheel. Signal state 0 Handwheel 1/2 is deselected as contour handwheel.

  • Page 388
    Detailed descriptions of interface signals 5.7 Channel-specific signals Signal state 1 PLC signals the NCK that the associated M01 (auxiliary function) should be activated. Signal state 0 Deactivate the associated M01 (auxiliary function). corresponding to … DB21, … DBX 318.5 (associated M01 active) ??? Note for the reader Function Manual Basic Functions H1 DB3200…
  • Page 389
    Detailed descriptions of interface signals 5.7 Channel-specific signals DB3200 DBX1000.3 Feedrate stop for axes in the Work DBX1004.3 Signal(s) to channel (PLC → NCK) DBX1008.3 Edge evaluation: No Signal(s) updated: Cyclic Signal state 1 or edge The signal is only active in the JOG mode (axes are traversed in the Work). change 0 →…
  • Page 390
    Detailed descriptions of interface signals 5.7 Channel-specific signals Signal state 1 or edge If, together with the «Traversing key plus» or «Traversing key minus» the PLC change 0 → 1 interface signal «Rapid traverse override» is issued, then the geometry axis that is addressed traverses with the rapid traverse — intended for JOG — of the associated machine axis (e.g.: X →…
  • Page 391
    Detailed descriptions of interface signals 5.7 Channel-specific signals Signal state 0 or edge No traversing change 1 → 0 Signal irrelevant for … AUTOMATIC and MDI modes Special cases, errors, … The geometry axis cannot be traversed in JOG mode: ●…
  • Page 392: Signals From Nc Channel

    Detailed descriptions of interface signals 5.7 Channel-specific signals corresponding to … IS «Active machine function 1 INC, …» for axis 1 in the Work (DB3300 DBX1001.0 ..6) for axis 2 in the Work (DB3300 DBX1005.0 ..6) for axis 3 in the Work (DB3300 DBX1009.0 ..6) IS «INC inputs active in the mode group area»…

  • Page 393
    Detailed descriptions of interface signals 5.7 Channel-specific signals Application Corresponding IS «Activate M01» to … IS «M01 selected» Note for the Function Manual Basic Functions K1 reader DB3300 Last action block active DBX0.6 Signal(s) from channel (NCK → PLC) Edge evaluation: No Signal(s) updated: Cyclic Signal state 1 Block search: Last block of the output with collected auxiliary functions.
  • Page 394
    Detailed descriptions of interface signals 5.7 Channel-specific signals Corresponding to … SD41100 JOG_REV_IS_ACTIVE (JOG: Revolutional / linear feedrate) SD42600 JOG_FEED_PER_REV_SOURCE (control revolutional feedrate in JOG) SD43300 ASSIGN_FEED_PER_REV_SOURCE (revolutional feedrate for positioning axes / spindles) MD32040 JOG_REV_VELO_RAPID (revolutional feedrate for JOG with rapid traverse override) MD32050 JOG_REV_VELO (revolutional feedrate for JOG) Note for the reader…
  • Page 395
    Detailed descriptions of interface signals 5.7 Channel-specific signals Signal state 0 No end of program or program abort Status after the control has been switched on Start of an NC Program Application The PLC can detect the end of program processing with this signal and react appro‐ priately.
  • Page 396
    Detailed descriptions of interface signals 5.7 Channel-specific signals DB3300 Program status running DBX3.0 Signal(s) from channel (NCK → PLC) Edge evaluation: No Signal(s) updated: Cyclic Signal state 1 The part program was started with IS «NC start» and is running. Signal state 0 ●…
  • Page 397
    Detailed descriptions of interface signals 5.7 Channel-specific signals Signal state 1 When the mode changes from AUTOMATIC or MDI (in stopped program status) to JOG, the program status changes to «interrupted». The program can be continued at the point of interruption in AUTOMATIC or MDI mode when «NC start»…
  • Page 398
    Detailed descriptions of interface signals 5.7 Channel-specific signals Signal state 0 The signal is set to 0 as soon as processing takes place in the channel, e.g.: a program is being executed or block search. Note for the reader Function Manual Basic Functions K1 DB3300 All axes referenced DBX4.2…
  • Page 399
    Detailed descriptions of interface signals 5.7 Channel-specific signals Corresponding to … DB2700 DBX3.0 (NCK alarm present) Note for the reader /DA/ Diagnostics Guide DB3300 DBX5.0 Handwheel 1 active as contour handwheel DBX5.1 Handwheel 2 active as contour handwheel Edge evaluation: No Signal(s) updated: Cyclic Description These signals show which handwheel is selected as contour handwheel:…
  • Page 400
    Detailed descriptions of interface signals 5.7 Channel-specific signals DB3300 DBX1000.5 and .4 Plus and minus travel request (for axis in the Work) DBX1004.5 and .4 Signal(s) from channel (NCK → PLC) DBX1008.5 and .4 Edge evaluation: No Signal(s) updated: Cyclic Signal state 0 A travel command in the relevant axis direction has not been given or a traverse movement has been completed.
  • Page 401
    Detailed descriptions of interface signals 5.7 Channel-specific signals Application Releasing the clamping for axes with clamping Note: If the clamping is not released until the travel command is given, these axes cannot be operated under continuous path control! Corresponding to … IS «Traversing key plus»…
  • Page 402
    Detailed descriptions of interface signals 5.7 Channel-specific signals DB3300 Associated M01/M00 active DBX4002.5 Signal(s) from channel (NCK → PLC) Edge evaluation: No Signal(s) updated: Cyclic Signal state 1 The IS is used to display that for a corresponding previous enable / activation, an associated M00 or M01 auxiliary function is active.
  • Page 403
    Detailed descriptions of interface signals 5.7 Channel-specific signals DB3300 ASUB active DBX4006.0 Signal(s) from channel (NCK → PLC) Edge evaluation: No Signal(s) updated: Cyclic Signal state 1 One ASUB is active. Signal state 0 No ASUB is active. Note for the reader Function Manual Basic Functions K1 DB3300 ASUB active…
  • Page 404: Axis / Spindle-Specific Signals

    Detailed descriptions of interface signals 5.8 Axis / spindle-specific signals Axis / spindle-specific signals Figure 5-1 PLC interface signals for axis monitoring 5.8.1 Transferred axis-specific M, S functions DB370x M function for spindle DBD0 Signal(s) from axis/spindle (NCK → PLC), axis-specific Edge evaluation: Signal(s) updated: Cyclic Application…

  • Page 405: Signals To Axis / Spindle

    Detailed descriptions of interface signals 5.8 Axis / spindle-specific signals Application Generally, the S function is transferred channel-specific in DB2500 DBD4000 … as floating-point value to the PLC. In this IS «S function for the spindle», this output is realized to the PLC as floating-point value for specific axes: ●…

  • Page 406
    Detailed descriptions of interface signals 5.8 Axis / spindle-specific signals Signal state 1 The axis-specific feedrate override is entered from the PLC gray-coded. Gray coding for axis-specific feedrate override Switch set‐ Code Axial feedrate override ting factor 00001 00011 0.01 00010 0.02 00110…
  • Page 407
    Detailed descriptions of interface signals 5.8 Axis / spindle-specific signals Signal state 1 Axis disable; If the interface signal «Axis disable» is output — for this axis — no more setpoints are output to the position controller; the axis travel is therefore disabled. The position control loop remains closed and the remaining following error is reduced to zero.
  • Page 408
    Detailed descriptions of interface signals 5.8 Axis / spindle-specific signals Signal state 1 Follow-up mode is selected for the axis / spindle by the PLC. The means that the position setpoint continually tracks the actual value if the controller enable for the drive is withdrawn. As soon as the follow-up mode is effective, the interface signal: DB390x DBX1.3 (follow-up mode active) is set.
  • Page 409
    Detailed descriptions of interface signals 5.8 Axis / spindle-specific signals PMS1: Signal state 1 As it is not possible to use both position measuring systems simultaneously for the position control of an axis / spindle, the control automatically selects PMS2: Signal state 1 position measuring system 1.
  • Page 410
    Detailed descriptions of interface signals 5.8 Axis / spindle-specific signals Application 1. Switching over from position measuring system 1 to position measuring system 2 (and vice versa): If the axis was referenced in both position measuring systems and in the meantime, the limit frequency of the measuring encoder used was not exceeded, i.e.
  • Page 411
    Detailed descriptions of interface signals 5.8 Axis / spindle-specific signals Signal state 0 The existing axis-specific feedrate override or spindle override is not active. If the feedrate override is inactive, «100%» is used as the internal override factor. Note: The 1st switch position of the gray-coded interface for the value is an excep‐ tion.
  • Page 412
    Detailed descriptions of interface signals 5.8 Axis / spindle-specific signals Signal state 0 «Controller enable» will be/is removed. The interface signals: DB390x DBX1.5 (position controller active) DB390x DBX1.6 (speed controller active) DB390x DBX1.7 (current controller active) are set to a 0 signal. The procedure for removing «controller enable»…
  • Page 413
    Detailed descriptions of interface signals 5.8 Axis / spindle-specific signals DB380x Distance-to-go / Spindle reset DBX2.2 Signal(s) to axis / spindle (PLC → NCK) Edge evaluation: Yes Signal(s) updated: Cyclic Signal state 1 or edge Independent of MD35040 SPIND_ACTIVE_AFTER_RESET selects a spin‐ change 0 →…
  • Page 414
    Detailed descriptions of interface signals 5.8 Axis / spindle-specific signals corresponding to … MD34100 REFP_SET_POS (reference point value) MD36050 CLAMP_POS_TOL (clamping tolerance) Note for the reader Function Manual Basic Functions R1 DB380x Enable travel to fixed stop DBX3.1 Signal(s) to axis / spindle (PLC → NCK) Edge evaluation: Yes Signal(s) updated: Cyclic Signal state 1 or edge…
  • Page 415
    Detailed descriptions of interface signals 5.8 Axis / spindle-specific signals Signal state 1 These PLC interface signals are used to define whether this machine axis is assigned to handwheel 1 or 2 or is not assigned to any handwheel. Only one handwheel can be assigned to an axis at any one time. If several interface signals «Activate handwheel»…
  • Page 416
    Detailed descriptions of interface signals 5.8 Axis / spindle-specific signals Application Feedrate stop: The traversing motion of the machine axes is not started with «feedrate stop», if, for example, certain operating states exist at the machine that do not per‐ mit the axes to be moved (e.g.
  • Page 417
    Detailed descriptions of interface signals 5.8 Axis / spindle-specific signals DB380x Plus and minus traversing keys DBX4.7 and .6 Signal(s) to axis / spindle (PLC → NCK) Edge evaluation: Yes Signal(s) updated: Cyclic Signal state 1 or edge The selected axis can be traversed in both directions in JOG mode using the change 0 →…
  • Page 418
    Detailed descriptions of interface signals 5.8 Axis / spindle-specific signals Signal state 1 This input range is only used if IS «INC inputs active in the mode group area» (DB2600 DBX1.0) is not set. IS «INC… is used to define how many increments the machine axis traverses when the traversing key is pressed or the handwheel is turned one detent position.
  • Page 419
    Detailed descriptions of interface signals 5.8 Axis / spindle-specific signals Signal state 1 2nd software limit switch for the plus or minus direction is active. 1st software limit switch for the plus or minus direction is inactive. In addition to the 1st software limit switches (plus or minus), 2nd software limit switch (plus or minus) can be activated via these interface signals.
  • Page 420: Content

    Detailed descriptions of interface signals 5.8 Axis / spindle-specific signals Signal state 1(status- If the new gearbox stage is engaged, then the PLC user sets the IS «Actual controlled) gear stage A» to «…C» and the IS «Gear is changed over». This signals to the NCK that the correct gear stage has been successfully engaged.

  • Page 421
    Detailed descriptions of interface signals 5.8 Axis / spindle-specific signals Special cases, errors, … If the PLC user signals back to the NCK with a different actual gear stage than issued by the NCK as the setpoint gear stage, the gear change is still considered to have been successfully completed and the actual gear stage A to C is activated.
  • Page 422
    Detailed descriptions of interface signals 5.8 Axis / spindle-specific signals Signal state 1 or edge Instead of the value for «Spindle override» the value of «feedrate override» change 0 → 1 (DB380x DBB0) is used for the spindle. Signal state 0 or edge The value of «spindle override»…
  • Page 423
    Detailed descriptions of interface signals 5.8 Axis / spindle-specific signals Signal state 0 or edge If the IS «Oscillation via the PLC» is not set, then automatic oscillation is change 1 → 0 executed in the NCK using the IS «Oscillation speed». The two times for the directions of rotation are entered into MD35440 and MD35450.
  • Page 424
    Detailed descriptions of interface signals 5.8 Axis / spindle-specific signals DB380x Setpoint direction of rotation, counter-clockwise and clockwise DBX2002.7 and .6 Signal(s) to axis / spindle (PLC → NCK) Edge evaluation: Yes Signal(s) updated: Cyclic Signal state 1 or edge If the IS «Oscillation via the PLC»…
  • Page 425
    Detailed descriptions of interface signals 5.8 Axis / spindle-specific signals Signal state 1 The spindle override is specified via the PLC in the Gray code. The override value determines the percentage of the programmed speed setpoint that is issued to the spindle. Gray coding for spindle override Switch set‐…
  • Page 426
    Detailed descriptions of interface signals 5.8 Axis / spindle-specific signals Signal state 1 With bit combinations A, B and C, 8 different drive parameter sets can be selected. The following assignment applies: Drive parameter set The switchable drive parameters are as follows: ●…
  • Page 427: Signals From Axis / Spindle

    Detailed descriptions of interface signals 5.8 Axis / spindle-specific signals corresponding to … DB390x DBX4001.6 (integrator n-controller disabled) Note for the reader Commissioning Manual, Turning and Milling DB380x Pulse enable. DBX4001.7 Signal(s) to drive (PLC → NCK) Edge evaluation: No Signal(s) updated: Cyclic Signal state 1 Pulse enable is signaled by the PLC for this drive (axis / spindle).

  • Page 428
    Detailed descriptions of interface signals 5.8 Axis / spindle-specific signals Signal state 0 or edge The machine axis is operated as an axis. change 1 → 0 The IS’s to the axis (DB380x DBX1000 to DB380x DBX1003) and from the axis (DB390x DBX1000 to DB390x DBX1003) are valid.
  • Page 429
    Detailed descriptions of interface signals 5.8 Axis / spindle-specific signals Signal state 1 or edge Axes: change 0 → 1 When being referenced, if the machine axis has reached the reference point (incremental measuring systems) or the target point (for length measuring system with distance-coded reference marks), then the machine axis is ref‐…
  • Page 430
    Detailed descriptions of interface signals 5.8 Axis / spindle-specific signals DB390x Axis ready DBX1.2 Signal(s) from axis / spindle (NCK → PLC) Edge evaluation: No Signal(s) updated: Meaning The signal is fed to the PPU, to which the axis is physically connected. Signal state 1 Axis is ready.
  • Page 431
    Detailed descriptions of interface signals 5.8 Axis / spindle-specific signals Signal state 0 The actual velocity of the axis or the actual spindle speed is greater than the value specified in MD36060 (standstill / zero speed range). If a travel command is present, e.g. for a spindle, then the signal is always = 0 — even if the actual speed lies below that specified in MD36060.
  • Page 432
    Detailed descriptions of interface signals 5.8 Axis / spindle-specific signals DB390x Speed controller active DBX1.6 Signal(s) from axis / spindle (NCK → PLC) Edge evaluation: No Signal(s) updated: Cyclic Signal state 1 The control signals that the speed controller is closed. Signal state 0 The control signals that the speed controller is open.
  • Page 433
    Detailed descriptions of interface signals 5.8 Axis / spindle-specific signals DB390x Revolutional feedrate active DBX2.2 Signal(s) from axis / spindle (NCK → PLC) Edge evaluation: No Signal(s) updated: Cyclic Signal state 1 When programming G95 (revolutional feedrate) in the JOG mode or auto‐ matic mode.
  • Page 434
    Detailed descriptions of interface signals 5.8 Axis / spindle-specific signals DB390x Handwheel active (1 to 2) DBX4.0 to .1 Signal(s) from axis / spindle (NCK → PLC) Edge evaluation: No Signal(s) updated: Cyclic Signal state 1 These PLC interface signals provide feedback as to whether this machine axis is assigned to handwheel 1 or 2 or is not assigned to any handwheel.
  • Page 435
    Detailed descriptions of interface signals 5.8 Axis / spindle-specific signals DB390x Plus and minus travel command DBX4.7 and .6 Signal(s) from axis / spindle (NCK → PLC) Edge evaluation: No Signal(s) updated: Cyclic Signal state 1 Travel is to be executed in the axis direction involved. Depending on the mode selected, the travel command is triggered in different ways.
  • Page 436
    Detailed descriptions of interface signals 5.8 Axis / spindle-specific signals Edge change 0 → 1 or 1 As soon as the axis / spindle has traveled through the distance set in → 0 MD33050, the «lubrication pulse» interface signal is inverted and lubrication is started.
  • Page 437
    Detailed descriptions of interface signals 5.8 Axis / spindle-specific signals Signal state 0 The axis is not defined as an indexing axis. ● The indexing axis travels: DB390x DBX4.7/.6 (travel command +/-) is present. ● The indexing axis is located at a position which is not an indexing position, e.g.: –…
  • Page 438
    Detailed descriptions of interface signals 5.8 Axis / spindle-specific signals Signal state 1 or edge A gear stage can be defined as follows: change 0 → 1 ● Permanently by the part program (M41 to M45) ● Automatically by the programmed spindle speed (M40) M41 to M45: ●…
  • Page 439
    Detailed descriptions of interface signals 5.8 Axis / spindle-specific signals Signal state 1 or edge A gear stage can be defined as follows: change 0 → 1 ● Permanently by the part program (M41 to M45) ● Automatically by the programmed spindle speed (M40) M41 to M45: ●…
  • Page 440
    Detailed descriptions of interface signals 5.8 Axis / spindle-specific signals Signal state 1 or edge If a spindle speed (rpm) or a constant cutting speed (m/min or ft/min) is change 0 → 1 programmed, one of the following limits has been exceeded: ●…
  • Page 441
    Detailed descriptions of interface signals 5.8 Axis / spindle-specific signals Signal state 0 or edge The IS «Spindle in setpoint range» signals whether the spindle is accelerating change 1 → 0 or braking. In the spindle control mode, the speed setpoint (programmed speed * spindle override including limits) is compared with the actual speed.
  • Page 442
    Detailed descriptions of interface signals 5.8 Axis / spindle-specific signals DB390x Active spindle mode oscillation mode DBX2002.6 Signal(s) from axis / spindle (NCK → PLC) Edge evaluation: Yes Signal(s) updated: Cyclic Signal state 1 or edge The spindle is in the oscillation mode if a new gear stage was defined using change 0 →…
  • Page 443
    Detailed descriptions of interface signals 5.8 Axis / spindle-specific signals DB390x Active parameter set A, B, C DBX4001.0 to .2 Signal(s) to drive (NCK → PLC) Edge evaluation: No Signal(s) updated: Cyclic Meaning The drive signals back to the PLC which drive parameter set is presently active.
  • Page 444
    Detailed descriptions of interface signals 5.8 Axis / spindle-specific signals DB390x Speed controller integrator disable DBX4001.6 Signal(s) to drive (NCK → PLC) Edge evaluation: No Signal(s) updated: Cyclic Signal state 1 The request from the PLC to disable the integrator of the speed controller using the interface signal «Speed controller integrator disable»…
  • Page 445
    Detailed descriptions of interface signals 5.8 Axis / spindle-specific signals corresponding to … DB390x DBX4002.6 (n DB390x DBX4002.3 (M Note for the reader Commissioning Manual, Turning and Milling DB390x Ramp-up completed DBX4002.2 Signal(s) to drive (NCK → PLC) Edge evaluation: No Signal(s) updated: Cyclic Signal state 1 The PLC is signaled that after a new speed setpoint input, the speed actual…
  • Page 446
    Detailed descriptions of interface signals 5.8 Axis / spindle-specific signals DB390x < n DBX4002.5 Signal(s) to drive (NCK → PLC) Edge evaluation: No Signal(s) updated: Cyclic Signal state 1 The drive signals to the PLC that the speed actual value n is less than the threshold speed (n Signal state 0…
  • Page 447
    Detailed descriptions of interface signals 5.8 Axis / spindle-specific signals Application With the variable signaling function the machine tool manufacturer can mon‐ itor one additional threshold value for specific applications for each axis / spindle and evaluate the result in the PLC user program. Example: The interface signal «Variable signaling function»…
  • Page 448
    Detailed descriptions of interface signals 5.8 Axis / spindle-specific signals DB390x Velocity alarm threshold reached DBX5002.5 Signal(s) from axis / spindle (NCK → PLC) Edge evaluation: No Signal(s) updated: Cyclic Signal state 1 When the velocity of the following axis in the axis grouping of the electronic gear reaches or exceeds the percentage of the velocity entered in MD37550 , which is set in MD32000, then the signal is set to 1.
  • Page 449
    Detailed descriptions of interface signals 5.8 Axis / spindle-specific signals Signal state 0 The associated axis is not an infeed axis. corresponding to … DB390x DBX5004.7 (oscillation active) Note for the reader Function Manual, Expansion Functions P5 Parameter Manual Parameter Manual, 08/2015, 6FC5397-8EP40-0BA1…
  • Page 450
    Detailed descriptions of interface signals 5.8 Axis / spindle-specific signals Parameter Manual Parameter Manual, 08/2015, 6FC5397-8EP40-0BA1…
  • Page 451: Addressing Ranges

    PLC user interface Addressing ranges Operand identifier Address identifier Description Range Data DB1000 to DB7999 DB9900 to DB9906 Times T0 to T15 (100 ms) T16 to T63 (10 ms) Counters C0 to C63 Image of digital inputs I0.0 to I8.7 Image of digital outputs Q0.0 to Q5.7 Bit memory…

  • Page 452
    INT/WORD DINT/DWORD/REAL Note All of the empty fields in the user interface are «reserved for Siemens» and may neither be written to nor evaluated. Fields designated with «0» always have the value «logical 0». If there is no data format information, you can read or write to all the specified data formats.
  • Page 453: Signals From/To The Mcp

    PLC user interface 6.2 MCP 6.2.1 Signals from/to the MCP The figure below shows the front view of the horizontal MCP for the turning variant of the control system. Note that labels K13, K15, K19, and K21 are not included in the pre-defined MCP insertion strips.

  • Page 454: Reading/Writing Nc Data: Job

    PLC user interface 6.2 MCP To the MCP DB1100 To MCP [r/w] Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 DBB0 PRO‐ SINGLE AUTO REF. HAND GRAM BLOCK POINT WHEEL TEST DBB1 Key 7 TAIL…

  • Page 455: Reading/Writing Nc Data: Result

    PLC user interface 6.2 MCP 6.2.3 Reading/writing NC data: Result DB1200 Reading / writing NC data [r] PLC -> NCK interface Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 2000 Error in job Job com‐…

  • Page 456: Pi Service: Result

    PLC user interface 6.4 User Alarms 6.2.5 PI service: Result DB1200 Reading / writing NC data [r] PLC -> NCK interface Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 5000 Error in job Job com‐…

  • Page 457: Variables For User Alarms

    PLC user interface 6.4 User Alarms Activation of alarm no. 700007 700006 700005 700004 700003 700002 700001 700000 Activation of alarm no. 700015 700014 700013 700012 700011 700010 700009 700008 Activation of alarm no. 700023 700022 700021 700020 700019 700018 700017 700016 Activation of alarm no.

  • Page 458: Alarm Acknowledgement

    PLC user interface 6.5 Signals from/to HMI 2002 2003 6.4.4 Alarm acknowledgement DB1600 Alarm acknowledgement [r/w] PLC -> HMI interface Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 3000 3001 3002 3003 Signals from/to HMI 6.5.1…

  • Page 459: Program Selection From Plc (Retentive Area)

    PLC user interface 6.5 Signals from/to HMI 6.5.2 Program selection from PLC (retentive area) DB1700 Program selection [r/w] PLC -> HMI interface Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 1000 Program selection from the PLC: Program number 1001 Command job from the PLC: Command…

  • Page 460: Signals From Plc

    PLC user interface 6.5 Signals from/to HMI 6.5.5 Signals from PLC DB1800 Signals from PLC [r] Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 1000 Commis‐ Boot with Boot with sioning ar‐ saved data default val‐…

  • Page 461: Signals From Maintenance Planners

    PLC user interface 6.5 Signals from/to HMI 4002 Acknowl‐ Acknowl‐ Acknowl‐ Acknowl‐ Acknowl‐ Acknowl‐ Acknowl‐ Acknowl‐ edgement edgement edgement edgement edgement edgement edgement edgement 4003 Acknowl‐ Acknowl‐ Acknowl‐ Acknowl‐ Acknowl‐ Acknowl‐ Acknowl‐ Acknowl‐ edgement edgement edgement edgement edgement edgement edgement edgement DB1800 Deactivation [r/w]…

  • Page 462: General Selection/Status Signals From Hmi (Retentive Area)

    PLC user interface 6.5 Signals from/to HMI 6.5.9 General selection/status signals from HMI (retentive area) DB1900 Signals from HMI [r] HMI -> PLC interface Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 1000 1001 1002…

  • Page 463: Auxiliary Functions Transfer From Nc Channel

    PLC user interface 6.6 Auxiliary functions transfer from NC channel 5012 … 5015 5016 … 5019 Auxiliary functions transfer from NC channel 6.6.1 Overview DB2500 Auxiliary functions from NCK channel [r] NCK -> PLC interface Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3…

  • Page 464: Decoded M Signals (M0 To M99)

    PLC user interface 6.6 Auxiliary functions transfer from NC channel 6.6.2 Decoded M signals (M0 to M99) Note The signals are output for the duration of a PLC cycle. DB2500 M functions from NCK channel [r] 1) 2) NCK -> PLC interface Byte Bit 7 Bit 6…

  • Page 465: Transferred M Functions

    PLC user interface 6.6 Auxiliary functions transfer from NC channel 6.6.4 Transferred M functions DB2500 M functions from NCK channel [r] NCK -> PLC interface Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 3000 M function 1 (DINT)

  • Page 466: Transferred H Functions

    PLC user interface 6.7 NCK signals 6.6.7 Transferred H functions DB2500 H functions from NCK channel [r] NCK -> PLC interface Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 6000 H function 1 (REAL) (DINT) 6004 Extended address H function 1 (byte) 6008…

  • Page 467: Signals At Fast Inputs And Outputs

    PLC user interface 6.7 NCK signals EMER‐ GENCY OFF active Inch meas‐ Probe actuated uring sys‐ Probe 2 Probe 1 NC ready Drive ready Drives in cy‐ clic opera‐ tion Air temper‐ NCK alarm ature alarm is active Change counter for motion, handwheel 1 Modification counter for motion, handwheel 2 Change counter , inch/metric measuring system 6.7.3…

  • Page 468: Signals From Fast Inputs And Outputs

    PLC user interface 6.7 NCK signals 1011 Setting mask for NCK outputs Output 8 Output 7 Output 6 Output 5 Output 4 Output 3 Output 2 Output 1 DB2800 Signals at fast inputs and outputs [r/w] PLC -> NCK interface Byte Bit 7 Bit 6…

  • Page 469: Channel Signals

    PLC user interface 6.8 Channel signals DB3000 Mode signals to NCK [r/w] PLC -> NCK interface Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Reset Mode Mode change AUTO block Single block Machine function Type A Type B…

  • Page 470
    PLC user interface 6.8 Channel signals Activate Enable pro‐ Activate ref‐ program tection erencing test zones Activate skip block Feedrate offset Rapid traverse override Feedrate Rapid tra‐ Path veloci‐ Program Delete Delete dis‐ Read-in dis‐ Federate override ac‐ verse over‐ ty limiting level abort number of…
  • Page 471
    PLC user interface 6.8 Channel signals Controls signals to axes in Work DB3200 Signals to NCK channel [r/w] PLC -> NCK interface Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 1000 Axis 1 in Work Traversing keys Rapid tra‐…
  • Page 472: Signals From Nc Channel

    PLC user interface 6.8 Channel signals Machine function: the machine function is only entered if the «INC inputs in the operating-mode signal range active» signal (DB2600DBX1.0) is not set. 6.8.2 Signals from NC channel Status signals from NC channel DB3300 Signals from NCK channel [r] NCK ->…

  • Page 473
    PLC user interface 6.8 Channel signals Machine-related protection zone violated Area 10 Area 9 Channel-specific protection zone violated Area 8 Area 7 Area 6 Area 5 Area 4 Area 3 Area 2 Area 1 Channel-specific protection zone violated Area 10 Area 9 Status signals, axes in Work DB3300…
  • Page 474
    PLC user interface 6.8 Channel signals 1009 Axis 3 in Work Machine function Continuous Var. INC 10000 INC 1000 INC 100 INC 10 INC 1 INC traversing 1010 1011 Contour handwheel direction of rotation in‐ verted Additional status signals from NC channel DB3300 Signals from NCK channel [r] NCK ->…
  • Page 475
    PLC user interface 6.8 Channel signals Asynchronous subroutines (ASUBs): Job DB3400 ASUB: Result [r] NCK -> PLC interface Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 INT1 Start INT2 Start Asynchronous subroutines (ASUBs): Result DB3400 ASUB: Result [r] PLC ->…
  • Page 476: Axis/Spindle Signals

    PLC user interface 6.9 Axis/spindle signals Axis/spindle signals 6.9.1 Transferred M and S functions, axis specific DB3700 … 3703 M, S functions [r] NCK -> PLC interface Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 M function for spindle (DINT)

  • Page 477
    PLC user interface 6.9 Axis/spindle signals The machine function is only entered if the signal «INC inputs in the operating-mode signal range active» (DB2600.DBX1.0) is set. Signals to axis DB3800 … Signals to axis [r/w] 3803 PLC -> NCK interface Byte Bit 7 Bit 6…
  • Page 478: Signals From Axis/Spindle

    PLC user interface 6.9 Axis/spindle signals 4001 Pulse ena‐ Integrator disable speed con‐ troller 4002 4003 Signals to technology functions DB3800 … Signals to axis/spindle [r/w] 3803 PLC -> NCK interface Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1…

  • Page 479
    PLC user interface 6.9 Axis/spindle signals Position reached Referenced Encoder limit freq. excee‐ Spindle/no axis With exact/ With exact Synchron‐ Synchron‐ stop, fine stop, ized 2 ized 1 coarse Current Speed con‐ Position Axis/spin‐ Follow up Axis ready Traversing controller troller active controller dle station‐…
  • Page 480
    PLC user interface 6.9 Axis/spindle signals Signals from spindle DB3900 … Signals from spindle [r] 3903 NCK -> PLC interface Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 2000 Change Setpoint gear stage gear stage 2001 Actual di‐…
  • Page 481: Plc Machine Data

    PLC user interface 6.10 PLC machine data 5002 Accelera‐ Velocity Superim‐ Actual val‐ Synchronous operation tion warn‐ warning posed mo‐ ue coupling Coarse Fine ing thresh‐ threshold tion old reached reached 5003 Max. accel‐ Max. veloci‐ Synchroni‐ Axis is ac‐ Synchron‐…

  • Page 482: Float Values (Md 14514 User_Data_Float)

    PLC user interface 6.10 PLC machine data 1030 Hex value (BYTE) 1031 Hex value (BYTE) 6.10.3 FLOAT values (MD 14514 USER_DATA_FLOAT) DB4500 Signals from NCK [r32] NCK -> PLC interface Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0…

  • Page 483: Signals, Synchronized Actions

    PLC user interface 6.11 Signals, synchronized actions 6.11 Signals, synchronized actions 6.11.1 Signals, synchronized actions to channel DB4600 Signals, synchronized actions to channel [r/w] PLC -> HMI interface Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Deactivate synchronized action with ID…

  • Page 484: Axis Actual Values And Distance-To-Go

    PLC user interface 6.13 Maintenance scheduler: User interface Note The programming engineer (NCK and PLC) is responsible for organizing (structuring) this memory area. Every storage position in the memory can be addressed provided that the limit is selected according to the appropriate data format (i.e. a ‘DWORD’ for a 4byte limit, a WORD for a 2byte limit, etc.).

  • Page 485: Actual Data

    PLC user interface 6.14 User interface for ctrl energy Interval 32 [h] Time of first warning 32 [h] Number of warnings to be output 32 Reserved 32 6.13.2 Actual data DB9904 Actual data table [r16] Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3…

  • Page 486
    PLC user interface 6.14 User interface for ctrl energy Reserved Status signal Activation Energy sav‐ time T1 ex‐ ing profile pired active Reversed Actual value: actual value T1 Actual value: actual value T2 Effectiveness, profile Disable en‐ Energy sav‐ ergy saving ing profile profile configured…
  • Page 487: Sinamics V70 Parameters

    SINAMICS V70 parameters Overview The chapter below lists the parameters displayed on the BOP only. For more parameters about the servo drive, refer to SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED HMI through the following key operations: → → → All parameters beginning with «p» are editable parameters, for example, p29000.

  • Page 488: V70 Parameters On Bop

    SINAMICS V70 parameters 7.2 V70 parameters on BOP V70 parameters on BOP Par. No. Name Factory Unit Data type Effective Can be setting changed r0020 Speed setpoint smoothed Float Description: Displays the currently smoothed speed setpoint at the input of the speed controller or U/f charac‐ teristic (after the interpolator).

  • Page 489
    SINAMICS V70 parameters 7.2 V70 parameters on BOP Par. No. Name Factory Unit Data type Effective Can be setting changed r0037[0…1 Servo drive temperatures °C Float Description: Displays the temperatures in the servo drive. ● [0] = Inverter, maximum value ●…
  • Page 490
    SINAMICS V70 parameters 7.2 V70 parameters on BOP Par. No. Name Factory Unit Data type Effective Can be setting changed r0069[0…6 Phase current actual value Float Description: Displays the measured actual phase currents as peak value. ● [0] = Phase U ●…
  • Page 491
    SINAMICS V70 parameters 7.2 V70 parameters on BOP Par. No. Name Factory Unit Data type Effective Can be setting changed p1120 Ramp-function generator ramp- 0.000 999999.0 10.000 Float T, U up time Description: The ramp-function generator ramps-up the speed setpoint from standstill (setpoint = 0) up to the maximum speed (p1082) in this time.
  • Page 492
    SINAMICS V70 parameters 7.2 V70 parameters on BOP Par. No. Name Factory Unit Data type Effective Can be setting changed p1226 Threshold for zero speed detec‐ 0.00 210000.0 20.00 Float T, U tion Description: Sets the speed threshold for the standstill identification. Acts on the actual value and setpoint monitoring.
  • Page 493
    SINAMICS V70 parameters 7.2 V70 parameters on BOP Par. No. Name Factory Unit Data type Effective Can be setting changed p1416 Speed setpoint filter 1 time con‐ 0.00 5000.00 0.00 Float T, U stant Description: Sets the time constant for the speed setpoint filter 1 (PT1). This parameter is only effective if the filter is set as a PT1 low pass.
  • Page 494
    SINAMICS V70 parameters 7.2 V70 parameters on BOP Par. No. Name Factory Unit Data type Effective Can be setting changed p1521 Torque limit lower/regenerative -2000000 1000000. 0.00 Float T, U 0.00 Description: Sets the fixed lower torque limit or the torque limit when regenerating. Note: Positive values when setting the lower torque limit (p1521 >…
  • Page 495: Drive Basic List On Hmi

    SINAMICS V70 parameters 7.3 Drive basic list on HMI Par. No. Name Factory Unit Data type Effective Can be setting changed p2153 Speed actual value filter time 1000000 Float T, U constant Description: Sets the time constant of the PT1 element to smooth the speed/velocity actual value. The smoothed actual speed/velocity is compared with the threshold values and is only used for messages and signals.

  • Page 496
    SINAMICS V70 parameters 7.3 Drive basic list on HMI Drive basic list on HMI Par. No. Name Factory Unit Data type Effective Can be setting changed p0977 Save all parameters 1013 [0] 0 T, U Description: Saves all parameters of the drive system to the non-volatile memory. When saving, only the adjustable pa‐ rameters intended to be saved are taken into account.
  • Page 497
    SINAMICS V70 parameters 7.3 Drive basic list on HMI Par. No. Name Factory Unit Data type Effective Can be setting changed p1821[0…n] Direction of rotation [0] 0 Description: Setting to change the direction of rotation. If the parameter is changed, it reverses the direction of rotation of the motor and the encoder actual value without changing the setpoint.
  • Page 498
    SINAMICS V70 parameters 7.3 Drive basic list on HMI Parameter Manual Parameter Manual, 08/2015, 6FC5397-8EP40-0BA1…
  • Page 499: Index

    Index ASUP_EDIT_PROTECTION_LEVEL 11612, 74 ASUP_EDITABLE 11610, 74 ABS_INC_RATIO ASUP_START_MASK 30260, 212 11602, 73 ABSBLOCK_ENABLE ASUP_START_PRIO_LEVEL 42750, 329 11604, 74 ABSBLOCK_FUNCTION_MASK AUTOMATIC_MEM_RECONFIG_FILE 27100, 192 17951, 88 ACCEL_REDUCTION_FACTOR AUXFU_ASSIGN_EXTENSION 35230, 278 22020, 167 ACCEL_REDUCTION_SPEED_POINT AUXFU_ASSIGN_GROUP 35220, 278 22000, 166 ACCEL_REDUCTION_TYPE AUXFU_ASSIGN_SIM_TIME 35242, 279 22037, 168 ACCEL_TYPE_DRIVE AUXFU_ASSIGN_SPEC…

  • Page 500
    Index AX_ESR_DELAY_TIME2 BRAKE_MODE_CHOICE 37511, 298 36600, 291 AX_JERK_ENABLE 32400, 237 AX_JERK_MODE 32402, 237 CEC_CALC_ADD AX_JERK_TIME 41356, 306 32410, 238 CEC_ENABLE AX_LOAD_DISPL 32710, 250 1107, 23 CEC_MAX_SUM AX_MOTION_DIR 32720, 250 32100, 233 CEC_MAX_VELO AX_VELO_LIMIT 32730, 251 36200, 287 CEC_SCALING_SYSTEM_METRIC AXCONF_CHANAX_NAME_TAB 32711, 250 20080, 112 CEC_TABLE_ENABLE AXCONF_GEOAX_NAME_TAB…
  • Page 501
    Index CONE_ANGLE CURV_EFFECT_ON_PATH_JERK 42995, 341 20603, 154 CONST_VELO_MIN_TIME CUTCOM_ACT_DEACT_CTRL 20500, 151 42494, 319 CONTOUR_MASK CUTCOM_CLSD_CONT 331, 28 42496, 320 CONTOUR_TOL CUTCOM_DECEL_LIMIT 36400, 290 42528, 325 CONTOURHANDWH_IMP_PER_LATCH CUTCOM_G40_STOPRE 11322, 67 42490, 319 CONTPREC CUTCOM_INTERS_POLY_ENABLE 42450, 314 20256, 138 CONTROL_UNIT_LOGIC_ADDRESS CUTDIRMOD 13120, 80 42984, 340 CONVERT_SCALING_SYSTEM CUTTING_EDGE_DEFAULT…
  • Page 502
    Index DB2500 DBB3020, 366 DB3200 DBX1.7, 378 DB2500 DBB3028, 366 DB3200 DBX1000.0 to .1, 387, 388 DB2500 DBB3036, 366 DB3200 DBX1000.3, 389 DB2500 DBB4004, 366 DB3200 DBX1000.4, 389 DB2500 DBB4012, 366 DB3200 DBX1000.5, 389 DB2500 DBD2000, 365 DB3200 DBX1000.7 and .6, 390 DB2500 DBD3000, 366 DB3200 DBX1001.0 to .6, 391 DB2500 DBD3008, 366…
  • Page 503
    Index DB3300 DBX1004.7 and .6, 400 DB390x DBX1.2, 426, 427, 430, 431, 432, 444, 445, DB3300 DBX1005.0 to .6, 401 446, 447, 448 DB3300 DBX1008.0 to .1, 399 DB390x DBX2.1, 432 DB3300 DBX1008.5 and .4, 400 DB390x DBX2.2, 433 DB3300 DBX1008.7 and .6, 400 DB390x DBX2.3, 433 DB3300 DBX1009.0 to .6, 401 DB390x DBX2.4, 433…
  • Page 504
    Index DRIFT_ENABLE ENC_FREQ_LIMIT_LOW 36700, 292 36302, 289 DRIFT_LIMIT ENC_GRID_POINT_DIST 36710, 292 31010, 222 DRIFT_VALUE ENC_INPUT_NR 36720, 293 30230, 210 DRILL_VELO_LIMIT ENC_IS_DIRECT 35550, 283 31040, 223 DRIVE_AX_RATIO_DENOM ENC_IS_INDEPENDENT 31050, 223 30242, 211 DRIVE_AX_RATIO_NUMERA ENC_IS_LINEAR 31060, 224 31000, 222 DRIVE_ENC_RATIO_DENOM ENC_MARKER_INC 31070, 224 34310, 265 DRIVE_ENC_RATIO_NUMERA ENC_MODULE_NR…
  • Page 505
    Index EXTERN_FIXED_FEEDRATE_F1_F9 FG_GROUP2 42160, 311 311, 28 EXTERN_FIXED_FEEDRATE_F1_ON FG_GROUP3 22920, 179 312, 28 EXTERN_FLOATINGPOINT_PROG FG_GROUP4 10884, 53 313, 28 EXTERN_FUNCTION_MASK FG_GROUP5 20734, 158 314, 28 EXTERN_G_NO_MAC_CYCLE FIFOCTRL_ADAPTION 10816, 52 20463, 146 EXTERN_G_NO_MAC_CYCLE_NAME FIX_POINT_POS 10817, 52 30600, 221 EXTERN_GCODE_GROUPS_TO_PLC FLOAT values, 482 22512, 171 form of tables, 11 EXTERN_GCODE_RESET_MODE…
  • Page 506
    Index G_GROUP4 GEAR_STEP_MIN_VELO2 308, 27 35122, 274 G_GROUP5 GEAR_STEP_PC_MAX_VELO_LIMIT 309, 27 35135, 275 G0_LINEAR_MODE GEAR_STEP_POSCTRL_ACCEL 20730, 158 35210, 277 G0_TOLERANCE_FACTOR GEAR_STEP_POSCTRL_ACCEL2 20560, 153 35212, 277 G00_ACCEL_FACTOR GEAR_STEP_SPEEDCTRL_ACCEL 32434, 240 35200, 277 G00_JERK_FACTOR GEAR_STEP_USED_IN_AXISMODE 32435, 240 35014, 268 G53_TOOLCORR General selection/status signals from HMI, 462 10760, 50 General selection/status signals from the MMC, 363, GANTRY_ACT_POS_TOL_ERROR…
  • Page 507
    Index HEX values, 481 IPO_MAX_LOAD HW_ASSIGN_DIG_FASTOUT 11510, 72 10368, 38 IS_AUTOMATIC_MEM_RECONFIG HW_SERIAL_NUMBER 17950, 88 18030, 88 IS_CONCURRENT_POS_AX 30450, 216 IS_ROT_AX 30300, 213 IS_SD_MAX_PATH_ACCEL IGN_PROG_STATE_ASUP 42502, 321 20191, 135 IS_SD_MAX_PATH_JERK IGNORE_INHIBIT_ASUP 42512, 323 20116, 127 IS_UNIPOLAR_OUTPUT IGNORE_NONCSTART_ASUP 30134, 209 20194, 137 IGNORE_OVL_FACTOR_FOR_ADIS 20490, 151 IGNORE_REFP_LOCK_ASUP…
  • Page 508
    Index JOG_REV_SET_VELO M_NO_FCT_CYCLE_PAR 41120, 303 10718, 47 JOG_REV_VELO M_NO_FCT_EOP 32050, 229 10714, 45 JOG_REV_VELO_RAPID M_NO_FCT_STOPRE 32040, 229 10713, 45 JOG_ROT_AX_SET_VELO M19_SPOS 41130, 304 43240, 344 JOG_SET_VELO M19_SPOSMODE 41110, 303 43250, 344 JOG_SPIND_SET_VELO MAX_AX_ACCEL 41200, 304 32300, 236 JOG_VAR_INCR_SIZE MAX_AX_JERK 41010, 301 32431, 239 JOG_VELO MAX_AX_VELO…
  • Page 509
    Index MIRROR_TOOL_WEAR MM_NUM_AC_SYSTEM_MARKER 42910, 330 28276, 204 MISC_FUNCTION_MASK MM_NUM_AC_SYSTEM_PARAM 30455, 216 28274, 204 MM_ABSBLOCK MM_NUM_AC_TIMER 28400, 205 28258, 202 MM_ABSBLOCK_BUFFER_CONF MM_NUM_AN_TIMER 28402, 206 18710, 108 MM_ARCLENGTH_SEGMENTS MM_NUM_BASE_FRAMES 28540, 207 28081, 198 MM_BUFFERED_AC_MARKER MM_NUM_BLOCKS_IN_PREP 28257, 202 28070, 198 MM_BUFFERED_AC_PARAM MM_NUM_CCS_MON_PARAM 28255, 202 18208, 97 MM_CEC_MAX_POINTS MM_NUM_CCS_TDA_PARAM…
  • Page 510
    Index MM_NUM_SUMCORR MM_TRACE_DATA_FUNCTION 18108, 90 22714, 177 MM_NUM_SYNACT_GUD_AXIS MM_TRACE_VDI_SIGNAL 18663, 106 18794, 109 MM_NUM_SYNACT_GUD_BOOL MM_TYPE_CCS_TOA_PARAM 18662, 106 18207, 97 MM_NUM_SYNACT_GUD_CHAR MM_TYPE_OF_CUTTING_EDGE 18664, 107 18102, 90 MM_NUM_SYNACT_GUD_INT MM_U_FILE_MEM_SIZE 18661, 105 18352, 99 MM_NUM_SYNACT_GUD_REAL MM_USER_MEM_BUFFERED 18660, 104 18230, 98 MM_NUM_SYNACT_GUD_STRING MODE_AC_FIFO 18665, 107 28266, 204 MM_NUM_SYNC_DIAG_ELEMENTS MODESWITCH_MASK…
  • Page 511
    Index OPERATING_MODE_EXTENDED PATH_TRANS_POS_TOL 10721, 48 33120, 256 ORI_JOG_MODE PI service: Job, 455 42660, 326 PI service: Result, 456 OSCILL_CTRL_MASK PLC_CYCLE_TIME 43770, 349 10075, 34 OSCILL_DWELL_TIME1 PLC_DEACT_IMAGE_LADDR_IN 43720, 347 12986, 78 OSCILL_DWELL_TIME2 PLC_DEACT_IMAGE_LADDR_OUT 43730, 348 12987, 78 OSCILL_END_POS PLC_IPO_TIME_RATIO 43760, 349 10074, 34 OSCILL_IS_ACTIVE PLC_TASK_RUNTIME_WARNING…
  • Page 512
    Index PROFIBUS_TRACE_START REFP_CAM_MARKER_DIST 13113, 80 34093, 261 PROFIBUS_TRACE_START_EVENT REFP_CAM_SHIFT 13114, 80 34092, 261 PROFIBUS_TRACE_TYPE REFP_CYCLE_NR 13111, 79 34110, 262 PROG_EVENT_IGN_INHIBIT REFP_MAX_CAM_DIST 20107, 117 34030, 257 PROG_EVENT_IGN_PROG_STATE REFP_MAX_MARKER_DIST 20192, 135 34060, 259 PROG_EVENT_IGN_REFP_LOCK REFP_MOVE_DIST 20105, 116 34080, 260 PROG_EVENT_IGN_SINGLEBLOCK REFP_MOVE_DIST_CORR 20106, 116 34090, 260 PROG_EVENT_IGN_STOP REFP_NC_START_LOCK…
  • Page 513
    Index SEARCH_RUN_MODE SPIND_ASSIGN_TO_MACHAX 11450, 70 35000, 267 SERUPRO_SYNC_MASK SPIND_CONSTCUT_S 42125, 310 43202, 342 SERVO_DISABLE_DELAY_TIME SPIND_DEF_MASTER_SPIND 36620, 291 20090, 113 SIEM_TRACEFILES_CONFIG SPIND_DEFAULT_ACT_MASK 11294, 64 35030, 269 Signals at fast inputs and outputs, 467 SPIND_DEFAULT_MODE Signals from axis/spindle, 426, 427, 443, 444, 445, 35020, 268 446, 447, 448 SPIND_DES_VELO_TOL…
  • Page 514
    Index SPIND_VELO_LIMIT STOP_LIMIT_FINE 35100, 272 36010, 283 SPINDLE_DISP_MODE STOP_MODE_MASK 379, 31 11550, 72 SPINDLE_LOAD_BAR_COL1 Structure of the DB-range address, 451 366, 29 SUMCORR_DEFAULT SPINDLE_LOAD_BAR_COL2 20272, 139 367, 29 SUMCORR_RESET_VALUE SPINDLE_LOAD_BAR_COL3 20132, 128 368, 29 SUPPRESS_SCREEN_REFRESH SPINDLE_LOAD_BAR_LIM2 10131, 34 363, 29 SURF_BLOCK_PATH_LIMIT SPINDLE_LOAD_BAR_LIM3 20171, 134…
  • Page 515
    Index TIME_LIMIT_NETTO_INT_TASK TOOL_REF_PROBE_AXIS2 27920, 196 371, 30 TOCARR_FINE_CORRECTION TOOL_REF_PROBE_AXIS3 42974, 338 372, 30 TOCARR_ROT_OFFSET_FROM_FR TOOL_RESET_VALUE 21186, 164 20120, 128 TOFF_LIMIT TOOL_WEAR_LIMIT_VALUE 42970, 337 374, 30 TOFF_LIMIT_MINUS TOOLTYPES_ALLOWED 42972, 337 17540, 86 TOFRAME_MODE TRACE_SCOPE_MASK 42980, 339 22708, 176 TOOL_CHANGE_ERROR_MODE TRACE_STARTTRACE_EVENT 22562, 173 22700, 175 TOOL_CHANGE_M_CODE TRACE_STARTTRACE_STEP…
  • Page 516
    Index Transferred M and S functions, axis specific, 476 USER_CLASS_WRITE_LOC_NO TRANSMIT_BASE_TOOL_1 392, 31 24920, 189 USER_CLASS_WRITE_PROGRAM TRANSMIT_BASE_TOOL_2 214, 25 24970, 191 USER_CLASS_WRITE_PWA TRANSMIT_POLE_SIDE_FIX_1 223, 26 24911, 189 USER_CLASS_WRITE_RPA TRANSMIT_POLE_SIDE_FIX_2 218, 25 24961, 191 USER_CLASS_WRITE_SEA TRANSMIT_ROT_AX_FRAME_1 212, 25 24905, 188 USER_CLASS_WRITE_TO_MON_DAT TRANSMIT_ROT_AX_FRAME_2 377, 30 24955, 190…
  • Page 517
    Index WAB_CLEARANCE_TOLERANCE 20204, 138 WAB_MAXNUM_DUMMY_BLOCKS 20202, 137 WEAR_SIGN 42930, 332 WEAR_SIGN_CUTPOS 42920, 331 WEAR_TRANSFORM 42935, 332 WEIGHTING_FACTOR_FOR_SCALE 22910, 178 WORKAREA_LIMIT_MINUS 43430, 346 WORKAREA_LIMIT_PLUS 43420, 346 WORKAREA_MINUS_ENABLE 43410, 346 WORKAREA_PLUS_ENABLE 43400, 345 WORKAREA_WITH_TOOL_RADIUS 21020, 163 X_AXIS_IN_OLD_X_Z_PLANE 21110, 163 Parameter Manual Parameter Manual, 08/2015, 6FC5397-8EP40-0BA1…
  • Page 518
    Index Parameter Manual Parameter Manual, 08/2015, 6FC5397-8EP40-0BA1…

  1. Manuals
  2. Brands
  3. Siemens Manuals
  4. Control Systems
  5. SINUMERIK 808D

Manuals and User Guides for Siemens SINUMERIK 808D. We have 26 Siemens SINUMERIK 808D manuals available for free PDF download: Diagnostic Manual, Parameter Manual, Commissioning Manual, Operating Instructions Manual, User Manual, Function Manual, Programming And Operating Manual, Training Manual, Operating Manual, Service Manual, Installation Manual, Instructions

Related Products

  • Siemens SINUMERIK 808D sl

  • Siemens SINUMERIK 802S

  • Siemens SINUMERIK 802C

  • Siemens Sinumerik 801

  • Siemens SINUMERIK 840DE

  • Siemens SINUMERIK 810DE

  • Siemens SINUMERIK 840DiE

  • Siemens SINUMERIK 840DE SL

  • Siemens SINUMERIK 828D sl

  • Siemens SINUMERIK 828D PPU Series

CNC Manual/Siemens SINUMERIK/SINUMERIK 808D

Instruction Manual and User Guide for SINUMERIK 808D. We have 28 SINUMERIK 808D manuals for free PDF download.

  1. Manuals
  2. Brands
  3. Siemens Manuals
  4. Control Unit
  5. SINUMERIK 808D
  6. Diagnostic manual
  • Contents

  • Table of Contents

  • Bookmarks

Quick Links

T able of contents

Tables

Figures

SINUMERIK

SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED

Diagnostics Manual

Diagnostics Manual

08/2013

6FC5398-6DP10-0BA1

Preface

Introduction

Operating in the «SYSTEM»

area

SINUMERIK 808D

ADVANCED alarms

System responses

SINAMICS V70 alarms

Data backup

Updating software

Appendix A

Related Manuals for Siemens SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED

Summary of Contents for Siemens SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED

  • Page 1
    T able of contents Tables Figures 1  Introduction Operating in the «SYSTEM» 2  SINUMERIK area SINUMERIK 808D 3  SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED ADVANCED alarms Diagnostics Manual 4  System responses 5  SINAMICS V70 alarms Diagnostics Manual 6  Data backup 7  Updating software A …
  • Page 2
    Note the following: WARNING Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems.
  • Page 3: Table Of Contents

    Configuring the Ethernet connection ………………46 2.12 Defining the maintenance planner………………… 52 2.13 Alarm display ……………………..53 SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms ………………..55 System error alarms ……………………55 NCK alarms ……………………..55 Drive alarms ……………………..333 PLC alarms……………………..342 Cycle alarms……………………..346…

  • Page 4
    Table of contents PLC user alarms ……………………434 System responses ………………………435 System reactions to SINUMERIK alarms …………….435 Cancel criteria for alarms………………….438 SINAMICS V70 alarms ……………………..439 Overview of alarms ……………………439 Common faults and alarms…………………. 441 Data backup ……………………….453 Overview of internal/external data backup…………….
  • Page 5: Preface

    Preface Applicable products This manual is applicable to the following control systems: Control system Software version SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED T (Turning) V4.6 SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED M (Milling) V4.6 Documentation components and target groups Component Recommended target group User documentation Programming and Operating Manual (Turning)

  • Page 6
    EC Declaration of Conformity The EC Declaration of Conformity for the EMC Directive can be found on the Internet at http:/ /support.automation.siemens.com Here, enter the number 15257461 as the search term or contact your local Siemens office. Diagnostics Manual Diagnostics Manual, 08/2013, 6FC5398-6DP10-0BA1…
  • Page 7: Introduction

    Introduction Structure of the Diagnostics Manual NCK / PLC alarms The descriptions for the alarms can be found in the chapters: • NCK alarms (Page 55) • Drive alarms (Page 333) • PLC alarms (Page 342) • Cycle alarms (Page 346) •…

  • Page 8: Alarm Number Ranges

    Introduction 1.2 Alarm number ranges Action list The actions described in the NCK alarm texts («Action %…») are explained in the following Chapter: See Chapter: Cancel criteria for alarms (Page 438) Specification «%» The specification «%» represents variables for an online parameter that is replaced on the control with a corresponding value.

  • Page 9: Operating In The «System» Area

    Operating in the «SYSTEM» area Operating area overview Softkey functions Press the keys on the PPU to enter the following operating area. This operating area includes functions required for parameterizing and analyzing the NCK, the PLC and the drive. The start screen displays the machine configuration data and softkeys available.

  • Page 10: Setting Start-Up Function

    Operating in the «SYSTEM» area 2.2 Setting start-up function An extended horizontal softkey bar can be accessed via this key on the PPU. Two extended horizontal softkeys are provided: Views the service information Defines the maintenance planner Setting start-up function Functionality This softkey allows you to choose the NC, PLC, and drive start-up modes.

  • Page 11
    Operating in the «SYSTEM» area 2.2 Setting start-up function Selecting a PLC restart mode Proceed through the following steps to select a PLC restart mode: Select the desired operating area. Press this softkey. Press this softkey to open the window for selecting the PLC start-up mode.
  • Page 12: Setting System Machine Data

    Operating in the «SYSTEM» area 2.3 Setting system machine data Select all drives or one specific drive using the cursor keys. Press this softkey to confirm your selection. The selected drive(s) will restart in the mode selected. Setting system machine data Machine data structure Any changes in the machine data have a substantial influence on the machine.

  • Page 13
    2.3 Setting system machine data Setting basic machine data The SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED provides two easy-to-use data lists for beginner users. You can use the basic data list for quick access of common NC data and drive data. Setting basic NC data In the basic NC data list, the general, axis, and channel MD are integrated in one screen.
  • Page 14
    Operating in the «SYSTEM» area 2.3 Setting system machine data Setting basic drive data Several common drive parameters are provided in the basic drive data list. Proceed through the following steps to set the basic drive data: Select the desired operating area. Enter the window of basic drive data through the following softkey operations: →…
  • Page 15
    Operating in the «SYSTEM» area 2.3 Setting system machine data Setting machine data in expert list All machine data are divided into five groups described as follows. Setting general machine data Select the desired operating area. Enter the window of general machine data through the following softkey operations: →…
  • Page 16
    Operating in the «SYSTEM» area 2.3 Setting system machine data Setting channel-specific machine data Select the desired operating area. Enter the window of channel-specific machine data through the following softkey operations: → → Locate the machine data which you desire to set. You can also search for an MD using the following softkeys: Searches for the desired number or the name (or a part of the name) of the machine data…
  • Page 17
    Operating in the «SYSTEM» area 2.3 Setting system machine data Setting axis-specific machine data Select the desired operating area. Enter the window of axis-specific machine data through the following softkey operations: → → Locate the machine data which you desire to set. You can also search for an MD using the following softkeys: Searches for the desired number or the name (or a part of the name) of the machine data…
  • Page 18
    Operating in the «SYSTEM» area 2.3 Setting system machine data Setting drive machine data Select the desired operating area. Enter the window of drive machine data through the following softkey operations: → → Locate the machine data which you desire to set. You can also search for an MD using the following softkeys: Searches for the desired number or the name (or a part of the name) of the machine data…
  • Page 19
    To learn more functions regarding the servo trace, refer to the Section «Servo trace (Page 40)». References You can find a description of the machine data in the following manufacturers’ documents: SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED Parameter Manual SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED Function Manual Diagnostics Manual Diagnostics Manual, 08/2013, 6FC5398-6DP10-0BA1…
  • Page 20: Configuring The Drive System

    Operating in the «SYSTEM» area 2.4 Configuring the drive system Configuring the drive system Pressing this softkey opens the drive system configuration window where you can configure the connected drives and motors. Before starting the drive and motor configuration, you must ensure the Drive Bus addresses are properly set (p0918) via the drive BOPs according to the instructions in the window above.

  • Page 21
    Operating in the «SYSTEM» area 2.4 Configuring the drive system Press this softkey to enter the motor configuration window. Select the right motor ID according to the motor rating plate with the cursor keys. Press this softkey to confirm your selection. The selected motor information then displays in the drive list.
  • Page 22: Plc Diagnostics

    Operating in the «SYSTEM» area 2.5 PLC diagnostics PLC diagnostics Functionality A PLC user program consists to a large degree of logical operations to realize safety functions and to support process sequences. These logical operations include the linking of various contacts and relays. As a rule, the failure of a single contact or relay results in a failure of the whole system/installation.

  • Page 23: Screen Layout

    Operating in the «SYSTEM» area 2.5 PLC diagnostics ⑥ ⑬ Displays the list of cross references Displays all symbolic identifiers used in the selected network ⑦ Displays the logic and graphic information of the selected program block 2.5.1 Screen layout Legend Display Meaning…

  • Page 24: Operating Options

    Operating in the «SYSTEM» area 2.5 PLC diagnostics 2.5.2 Operating options In addition to the softkeys and the navigation keys, this area provides still further key combinations. Hot keys The cursor keys move the focus over the PLC user program. When reaching the window borders, it is scrolled automatically.

  • Page 25
    Operating in the «SYSTEM» area 2.5 PLC diagnostics Key combination Action To the last field of the subroutine Opens the previous program block in the same window Opens the next program block in the same window The function of the Select key depends on the position of the input focus.
  • Page 26
    Operating in the «SYSTEM» area 2.5 PLC diagnostics Searching for operands In big programs, you can use the search function to quickly reach the desired positions. To search for operands, follow these steps: Use this softkey to switch between the absolute and symbolic representation of the operands.
  • Page 27: Displaying Information On The Program Blocks

    Operating in the «SYSTEM» area 2.5 PLC diagnostics 2.5.3 Displaying information on the program blocks Functionality You can display any logical and graphical information of a program block in the program windows. The program block is one of the components of the PLC user program. Logic information The logics in the ladder diagram (LAD) display the following: •…

  • Page 28: Displaying Cross-References

    Operating in the «SYSTEM» area 2.5 PLC diagnostics Select the desired program block and press this softkey to open it. After the selected program block is opened, you can press the following softkeys to switch the display information. Further softkeys are available in the program block window as follows: Displays additional information of the selected program block Displays the table of local variables of the selected…

  • Page 29: Setting The Hmi Display

    Operating in the «SYSTEM» area 2.6 Setting the HMI display Setting the HMI display 2.6.1 Setting the date and time At delivery, the system date and time remain at the factory settings, and thus you must manually modify the date and time in the window as follows. Operating sequence Select the desired operating area on the PPU.

  • Page 30: Adjusting The Screen Brightness

    Operating in the «SYSTEM» area 2.6 Setting the HMI display 2.6.2 Adjusting the screen brightness You can open the window for adjusting the brightness of the HMI screen through the following operations: → → Press this softkey to increase the brightness of the HMI screen. Press this softkey to decrease the brightness of the HMI screen.

  • Page 31: Managing The System Data

    Operating in the «SYSTEM» area 2.7 Managing the system data Managing the system data Overview By pressing this softkey in the system data management operating area, you can enter the window as follows: Three folders and one file are available in this window. You can import/export the subfolders or single files in this window for backup or other customized purposes.

  • Page 32
    You can import/export the subfolders or single files in this window for backup or other customized purposes. For more information, refer to the SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED Function Manual and SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED Commissioning Manual. Managing the NCK/PLC data Select this folder and press the key to enter.
  • Page 33: Creating Commissioning Archives

    Operating in the «SYSTEM» area 2.8 Creating commissioning archives Creating commissioning archives Functionality Pressing this softkey allows you to create or restore a start-up or series start-up archive in the following window. Operating sequence Select the desired operating area on the PPU. Press this horizontal softkey to open the start-up archive window.

  • Page 34: Optimizing Drive Performance

    Operating in the «SYSTEM» area 2.9 Optimizing drive performance Press this softkey to confirm and the archive information dialog opens. Specify the properties of the archive and press this softkey to start creating the archive file in the selected folder. Optimizing drive performance The control system provides facilities to optimize the performance of each connected drive by automatically modifying the control loop parameters.

  • Page 35
    Operating in the «SYSTEM» area 2.9 Optimizing drive performance Press this softkey to return to the main screen of drive optimization. Press this softkey to enter the preparation screen before the optimization. Switch to «JOG» mode, and use the axis traversing keys to move the axis to a safe position.
  • Page 36: Viewing The Service Info

    Operating in the «SYSTEM» area 2.10 Viewing the service info Views the optimization results of the previous axis Returns to the main screen of drive optimization. In this case, you may optimize the drive again with either new measurements or last measurement results. 2.10 Viewing the service info You can view the service information through the following operations:…

  • Page 37: Action Log

    Operating in the «SYSTEM» area 2.10 Viewing the service info 2.10.1 Action log Overview The action log function is provided for service events. The contents of the action log file can only be accessed through a system password on the HMI. Viewing the action log Select the desired operating area.

  • Page 38
    Operating in the «SYSTEM» area 2.10 Viewing the service info Settings for the message sending Proceed through the following steps to configure the settings for the message sending: Select the desired operating area. Press this key to view the extended softkeys. Open the service message window through the following softkey operations: →…
  • Page 39: Data Backup

    Operating in the «SYSTEM» area 2.10 Viewing the service info Press this softkey to save the settings and return to the service message main screen. Press this softkey to cancel and return to the service message main screen. Note To transfer messages via the RS232 interface, the communication settings from the following are used: →…

  • Page 40: Servo Trace

    Operating in the «SYSTEM» area 2.10 Viewing the service info 2.10.3 Servo trace Overview An oscilloscope function is provided for the purpose of optimizing the drives. This enables the following graphical representations: • velocity setpoint • contour violation • following error •…

  • Page 41
    Operating in the «SYSTEM» area 2.10 Viewing the service info To analyze the result, you can perform the following operations: • Changing and scaling the abscissa and ordinate values • Measuring a value using the horizontal or vertical marker • Measuring the abscissa and ordinate values as a difference between two markers •…
  • Page 42: Version/Hmi Details

    Operating in the «SYSTEM» area 2.10 Viewing the service info Press this softkey to return after you set the desired marker steps. If the trace exceeds the current screen, press + cursor movement. When a marker reaches the margin of the diagram, the grid automatically appears in the horizontal or vertical direction.

  • Page 43
    Operating in the «SYSTEM» area 2.10 Viewing the service info This window displays the version numbers and the date of creation of the individual CNC components. ① ③ Displays the operator programs with the Activates the licensed optional functions version numbers ②…
  • Page 44
    Press this softkey to open the dialog for entering the license key Enter the license key in the following dialog: Press this softkey to confirm. Activating the options The following optional functions can be purchased for the SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED control system. • Additional axes •…
  • Page 45
    For the other options, press the following key to select: Press this softkey to restart the NCK, so that the licensed options are activated. Reference SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED Function Manual SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED Commissioning Manual Diagnostics Manual Diagnostics Manual, 08/2013, 6FC5398-6DP10-0BA1…
  • Page 46: Configuring The Ethernet Connection

    With the tool Access MyMachine P2P (AMM) installed on your PC/PG, you can enable the Ethernet connection between a SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED control system and a PC/PG. This tool is available in the SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED Toolbox and is supported by Windows XP/Vista/Win 7.

  • Page 47
    Operating in the «SYSTEM» area 2.11 Configuring the Ethernet connection Select the direct connection option in the following dialog and then click this button. An attempt is made to establish a direct connection. If you have not established any authentication data, the following dialog appears: Select the log-on details and enter the corresponding password or alternatively select a key file in the dialog.
  • Page 48
    Operating in the «SYSTEM» area 2.11 Configuring the Ethernet connection Enter the main screen of the service control options through the following softkey operations: → Press this softkey to enter the window for the network configuration. Note: make sure the following vertical softkey is not selected: Configure the network as required in the following window: You can configure the DHCP with the following key: Note: if you select «No»…
  • Page 49
    Operating in the «SYSTEM» area 2.11 Configuring the Ethernet connection Select the new network connection option in the following dialog: This dialog can also be called with the button from the toolbar. The dialog for setting the new network connection appears. Assign the parameters for a new network connection in this dialog: Select the following button to save the settings: Select the following button and the AMM tool connects to the control…
  • Page 50
    Operating in the «SYSTEM» area 2.11 Configuring the Ethernet connection Creating and connecting a network drive Proceed as follows to create and connect a network drive: Share a directory on your local disk on your PC/PG. Select the desired operating area on the PPU. Press this key to view the extended softkeys.
  • Page 51
    Operating in the «SYSTEM» area 2.11 Configuring the Ethernet connection Press this softkey to establish the server connection and assign the local shared directory to the network drive. You can disconnect a selected network drive using the following softkey: After you connect a network drive successfully, you may open it directly on the PPU using the following softkey either in the system data management operating area or in the program management operating area:…
  • Page 52: Defining The Maintenance Planner

    Operating in the «SYSTEM» area 2.12 Defining the maintenance planner 2.12 Defining the maintenance planner Overview This part introduces how to define the maintenance planner. You can enter the maintenance planner main screen through the following operations: → → The maintenance planner window displays the position, task description, interval, first warning time, number of warnings, etc.

  • Page 53: Alarm Display

    Operating in the «SYSTEM» area 2.13 Alarm display 2.13 Alarm display Softkey functions Press this key on the PPU to open the alarm window. You can check the NC and drive alarms using the softkeys. PLC alarms are not sorted. ①…

  • Page 54
    Operating in the «SYSTEM» area 2.13 Alarm display Diagnostics Manual Diagnostics Manual, 08/2013, 6FC5398-6DP10-0BA1…
  • Page 55: Sinumerik 808D Advanced Alarms

    This alarm is also caused by PLC stop. (PLC stop with programming tool, PLC stop by commissioning switch, PLC stop by alarm) If none of these cases applies, place a support request with the error text under: http://www.siemens.com/automation/ support-request Program Switch control OFF — ON.

  • Page 56
    $MN_PLC_RUNNINGUP_TIMEOUT must be checked and adapted to the first OB1 cycle. — Determine the cause of error in the PLC (loop or stop in the user program) and eliminate it. Place a support request with the error text under: http://www.siemens.com/automation/support-request Program Switch control OFF — ON.
  • Page 57
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms 2900 Reboot is delayed Definitions: This alarm indicates a delayed reboot. This alarm only occurs when reboot was carried out by the HMI and MD10088 $MN_REBOOT_DELAY_TIME was set greater than zero. The alarm can be suppressed with MD11410 $MN_SUPPRESS_ALARM_MASK Bit 20.
  • Page 58
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Definitions: Only axes that have been activated in the channel by MD20070 $MC_AXCONF_MACHAX_USED [kx]=m may be declared as geometry axes, transformation axes or orientation axes in MD20050 $MC_AXCONF_GEOAX_ASSIGN_TAB [gx]=k. This also applies to MD22420 $MC_FGROUP_DEFAULT_AXES (gx: Geometry axis index, kx: Channel axis index, k: Channel axis no., m: Machine axis no.).
  • Page 59
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Example: — CHANDATA(2) — $MC_AXCONF_MACHAX_USED[0] = 7 — $MC_AXCONF_MACHAX_USED[1] = 8 — $MC_AXCONF_MACHAX_USED[2] = 0 — $MC_AXCONF_MACHAX_USED[3] = 3 — $MC_AXCONF_MACHAX_USED[4] = 2 — $MC_AXCONF_MACHAX_USED[5] = 0 — $MC_AXCONF_MACHAX_USED[6] = 1 — $MC_AXCONF_MACHAX_USED[7] = 0 This channel uses the five machine axes 1, 2, 3, 8, 7, i.e.
  • Page 60
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Definitions: When determining a name in the NCK tables (arrays) for: machine axes, Euler angles, direction vectors, normal vectors, interpolation parameters and intermediate point coordinates, one of the following syntax rules for the identifier…
  • Page 61
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Program Switch control OFF — ON. Continuation: 4020 Identifier %1 used several times in machine data %2 Parameters: %1 = String: Name of identifier %2 = String: MD identifier Definitions: When determining a name in the NCK tables (arrays) for: machine axes, Euler angles, direction vectors, normal vectors, interpolation parameters and intermediate point coordinates, an identifier has been used that already exists in the control.
  • Page 62
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms 4032 [Channel %1: ] Wrong identifier for facing axis in %2 Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = String: MD identifier Definitions: According to the axis configuration in MD20150 $MC_GCODE_RESET_VALUES or MD20100 $MC_DIAMETER_AX_DEF, a facing axis identifier is expected at the specified location.
  • Page 63
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Definitions: Renaming of an NC code was not possible for one of the following reasons: — The old identifier does not exist — The new identifier lies in another type range. NC codes/keywords can be reconfigured via machine data as long as the type range is not abandoned.
  • Page 64
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Remedy: Restart the control. Program Switch control OFF — ON. Continuation: 4070 Normalizing machine data has been changed Definitions: The control uses internal physical units (mm, degrees, s, for paths, velocities, acceleration, etc.). During programming or data storage, some of these values are input and output using different units (rev./min, m/s2, etc.).
  • Page 65
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Definitions: On executing a TOA file or when writing data from the part program an attempt has been made to write data with a higher protection level than the access authorization currently set in the control. The data in question have not been written and program execution is continued without hindrance.
  • Page 66
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms 2. MD10910 $MN_INDEX_AX_POS_TAB_1 or MD10930 $MN_INDEX_AX_POS_TAB_2: the contents of the displayed tables are incorrect. — The entered positions must be arranged in increasing size. — A particular position must not be set more than once.
  • Page 67
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms 4112 Servo cycle changed to %1 ms Parameters: %1 = String (new servo cycle time) Definitions: For PROFIBUS/PROFINET only: MD10060 $POSCTRL_SYSCLOCK_TIME_RATIO has been modified because of the modified DP cycle in the SDB (MD10050 $SYSCLOCK_CYCLE_TIME).
  • Page 68
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms MD10718 $MN_M_NO_FCT_CYCLE_PAR contains an invalid array index of MD10715 $MN_M_NO_FCT_CYCLE[n]. Currently, the values 0 to 9 are permissible. The affected machine data is reset to the default value -1. This deactivates the function.
  • Page 69
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms 4180 Invalid M function number assigned to enable ASUP Definitions: An invalid M function number has been assigned for activation of ASUP. An illegal M number has been assigned in MD10804 $MN_EXTERN_M_NO_SET_INT or MD10806 $MN_EXTERN_M_NO_DISABLE_INT for the configuration of the M number range for activation/deactivation of the interrupt program.
  • Page 70
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms NC Start disable in this channel. Interface signals are set. Alarm display. NC Stop on alarm. Remedy: Check the specified machine data and create a unique assignment of M auxiliary function numbers. Program Switch control OFF — ON.
  • Page 71
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Remedy: Please inform the authorized personnel/service department. Remove rotary axis declaration for this machine axis. For this purpose, the geometry axis index for the displayed geometry axis must be determined by means of MD20060 $MC_AXCONF_GEOAX_NAME_TAB.
  • Page 72
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms 4225 [Channel %1: ] Axis %2 declaration as rotary axis missing Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Axis name, axis number Definitions: The modulo functionality requires a rotary axis (positions in [deg]).
  • Page 73
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Interface signals are set. Alarm display. NC Stop on alarm. Remedy: Please inform the authorized personnel/service department. Correct machine data. Activate required inputs/outputs via MDs: MD10350 $MN_FASTIO_DIG_NUM_INPUTS MD10360 $MN_FASTIO_DIG_NUM_OUTPUTS MD10300 $MN_FASTIO_ANA_NUM_INPUTS MD10310 $MN_FASTIO_ANA_NUM_OUTPUTS Activation of fast inputs/outputs does not require the corresponding hardware configuration to be available at the control.
  • Page 74
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms 4282 Hardware of external NCK outputs assigned repeatedly Definitions: Several outputs have been configured on the same hardware byte. Reaction: NC not ready. Channel not ready. NC Start disable in this channel. Interface signals are set.
  • Page 75
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms 4340 [Channel %1: ] Block %2 invalid transformation type in transformation no. %3 Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label %3 = Transformation number Definitions: An invalid, i.e. undefined number was entered in one of the machine data $MC_TRAFO_TYPE_..This alarm also occurs if a certain type of transformation is only impossible on the type of control used (e.g.
  • Page 76
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Reaction: Correction block is reorganized. Interface signals are set. Alarm display. NC Stop on alarm at block end. Remedy: Set valid machine data. Program Clear alarm with the RESET key. Restart part program…
  • Page 77
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Definitions: MD2..$MC_TRAFO_AXIS_IN_… contains an invalid entry. The following causes for the error are possible: — The entry refers to a channel axis which does not exist. — The entry is zero (no axis) but the transformation needs the relevant axis as a channel axis.
  • Page 78
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms 77. The 3rd linear axis is not perpendicular to the rotary axis and the first geometry axis. 78. More than one additional linear axis was defined. 79. Illegal kinematic chain element type (e.g. manual rotary axis).
  • Page 79
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Definitions: A machine data has been altered that configures the buffered memory. If the NCK powers up with the altered data, this will lead to reorganization of the buffered memory and thus to the loss of all buffered user data (part programs, tool data, GUD, leadscrew error compensation, …)
  • Page 80
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Remedy: H numbers must be assigned only once in a TO unit. Then, MD10890, $MN_EXTERN_TOOLPROG_MODE, bit 3 can be set = 0 and a restart can be performed. Program Clear alarm with the Delete key or NC START.
  • Page 81
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Definitions: The handwheel input for handwheel %1 requested through MD11352 $MN_HANDWHEEL_INPUT is not available for 802D sl, 828D sl, 808D systems. A maximum of 2 handwheels can be directly linked to 802D sl, 828D sl, 808D systems.
  • Page 82
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Reaction: Interface signals are set. Alarm display. Remedy: Set machine date MD11351 $MN_HANDWHEEL_MODULE = 1 for the corresponding handwheel. Program Switch control OFF — ON. Continuation: 4641 Invalid handwheel input for handwheel %1…
  • Page 83
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Definitions: Data management has detected an error during ramp-up. The specified data block may not have been created. The error number specifies the type of error. An error number >100000 indicates a fatal system error. Other error numbers indicate that the user memory area provided is too small.
  • Page 84
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Reaction: NC not ready. Channel not ready. NC Start disable in this channel. Interface signals are set. Alarm display. NC Stop on alarm. Remedy: Correct the machine data or undo the changes made.
  • Page 85
    There is no interference with any NCK functions. It shows that the NCK has less free user memory available than specified by Siemens for this control variant. The value of the actually available free user memory can also be taken from the MD18050 $MN_INFO_FREE_MEM_DYNAMIC, MD18060 $MN_INFO_FREE_MEMS_STATIC.
  • Page 86
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms 6437 [Channel %1: ] Block %2 Command ‘%3’ cannot be programmed. Function ‘%4’ is activated. Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label %3 = Programmed command %4 = Function identifier Definitions: The command cannot be programmed as the specified function is active.
  • Page 87
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms 6520 The value of the machine data %1%2 is too low Parameters: %1 = String: MD identifier %2 = If required, index: MD array Definitions: The MD18370 $MN_MM_PROTOC_NUM_FILES specifies the number of protocol files for the protocol users.
  • Page 88
    Clear alarm with the Delete key or NC START. Continuation: 6583 NC system memory full Definitions: The DRAM file system of the system area (Siemens) is full. The order cannot be executed. Reaction: Alarm display. Remedy: Delete or unload files (e.g. parts programs) Program Clear alarm with the Delete key or NC START.
  • Page 89
    Alarm display. Remedy: Modify definition files /_N_DEF_DIR/_N_MACCESS_DEF or /_N_DEF_DIR/_N_UACCESS_DEF-CESS_ DEF. Please see the Siemens Programming Guide or the OEM documentation for the language commands permissible for the relevant system configurations. Program Clear alarm with the RESET key. Restart part program…
  • Page 90
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Remedy: Please inform the authorized personnel/service department. Do not use rapid interrupt inputs or contact the machine manufacturer with a view to retrofitting this option! Program Clear alarm with the RESET key. Restart part program…
  • Page 91
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Remedy: Please inform the authorized personnel/service department. — Purchase option — Reset the activation of ‘Advanced Surface’ functionality (MD20606 $MC_PREPDYN_SMOOTHING_ON and/or MD20443 $MC_LOOKAH_FFORM) Program Switch control OFF — ON. Continuation: 8030 [Channel %1: ] Block %2 option ‘interpolation of more than %3 axes’ not set…
  • Page 92
    3.2 NCK alarms Remedy: Please inform the authorized personnel/service department. For retrofitting the option, please refer to your machine manufacturer or to a sales representative of SIEMENS AG, A&D MC. Program Clear alarm with the Delete key or NC START.
  • Page 93
    One ore more options were activated, that are not licensed by the license key entered. Reaction: Alarm display. Remedy: Generate a new license key on the internet at http://www.siemens.com/automation/licence and enter it in the operating area «Setup», function (HSK) «Licenses».. Program Clear alarm with the Delete key or NC START.
  • Page 94
    Reaction: Alarm display. Remedy: Generate a new license key via the Internet at http://www.siemens.com/automation/license and enter in the operating area «Startup», function (HSK) «Licenses». Enter a valid license key in the operating area «Startup», function (HSK) «Licenses». Activate an additional test period…
  • Page 95
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Reaction: Interpreter stop NC Start disable in this channel. Interface signals are set. Alarm display. NC Stop on alarm. Remedy: Modify part program. Program Clear alarm with the RESET key. Restart part program…
  • Page 96
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Program Clear alarm with NC START or RESET key and continue the program. Continuation: 10204 [Channel %1: ] User action not possible without reference point (internal action=%2<ALNX>) Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = internal action number/internal action name…
  • Page 97
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Remedy: NC-Start Program Clear alarm with NC START or RESET key and continue the program. Continuation: 10225 [Channel %1: ] command denied Parameters: %1 = Channel number Definitions: The channel has received a command that cannot be executed.
  • Page 98
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Definitions: This alarm occurs only when several blocks with G33 follow in succession. The block end velocity in the specified block is zero, although a further thread cutting block follows. The reasons for this can be, for instance:…
  • Page 99
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Remedy: Check and correct the part program (analyze whether motion beyond block boundaries is appropriate here). Prevent block change by means of the keyword WAITP for axes or WAITS for spindles until the positioning axes or positioning spindles have also reached their target position.
  • Page 100
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms 10630 [Channel %1: ] Block %2 axis %3 at working area limit %4 Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label %3 = Axis, spindle number %4 = String (+ or -) Definitions: The specified axis violates the working area limitation.
  • Page 101
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Program Alarm display showing cause of alarm disappears. No further operator action necessary. Continuation: 10634 [Channel %1: ] Axis %2, tool radius compensation is inactive for type %3 working area limitation, reason: The tool is not oriented parallel to the axis.
  • Page 102
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Remedy: The tool radius compensation for working area limitations in JOG mode cannot be taken into account wihout an active tool. Program Clear alarm with the Delete key or NC START. Continuation: 10650…
  • Page 103
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms 13: Slave axis grouping 3 Program Switch control OFF — ON. Continuation: 10652 [Channel %1: ] Axis %2 gantry warning threshold exceeded Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Axis Definitions: The gantry following axis has exceeded the warning limit specified in MD37110 $MA_GANTRY_POS_TOL_WARNING.
  • Page 104
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Program Alarm display showing cause of alarm disappears. No further operator action necessary. Continuation: 10656 [Channel %1: ] Axis %2 gantry slave axis dynamically overloaded Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Axis Definitions: The indicated gantry slave axis is dynamically overloaded, i.e.
  • Page 105
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Remedy: Error ID: — 30XX => assign all gantry axes to the current channel, for example via axis exchange. — 40XX => set all axes of the gantry group to the same axis state, for example assign all axes to the NC program, or assign all axes to the PLC.
  • Page 106
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms 10703 [Channel %1: ] Channel-specific protection zone %2 violated during manual mode Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Protection zone number Definitions: The workpiece-related channel-specific protection zone has been violated. Note that another tool-related protection zone is still active.
  • Page 107
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms 10720 [Channel %1: ] Block %3 axis %2 software limit switch %4 Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Axis name, spindle number %3 = Block number, label %4 = String (+ or -) Definitions: The path programmed for the axis violates the currently valid software limit switch.
  • Page 108
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Definitions: The path programmed for the axis violates the currently valid software limit switch. The alarm is activated when preparing the part program block. This alarm is issued instead of alarm 10720 if bit 11=1 in the MD11411 $MN_ENABLE_ALARM_MASK. Alarm 10722 offers an expanded diagnostics option for the software limit switch violation.
  • Page 109
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Definitions: This alarm is generated if it is determined during block preparation that the programmed path of the axis violates the working area limitation. If bit 11=0 in machine data MD11411$MN_ENABLE_ALARM_MASK, this alarm is issued instead of alarm 10732. If bit 11 is set in machine dataMD11411 $MN_ENABLE_ALARM_MASK, an expanded diagnostics option is offered for the software limit switch violation.
  • Page 110
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms 10733 [Channel %1: ] Block %5 axis %2 working area limitation violated, residual distance: %6 %3<ALUN> Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Axis name, spindle number %3 = Unit of distance %4 = Block number, label|residual distance Definitions: The motion planned for the axis violates the currently active working area limitation.
  • Page 111
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Remedy: Determine the cause of the offset from the initial or target position. The REPOS command is executed at the end of an ASUB or system ASUB. See also cross reference from ASUBs.
  • Page 112
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Definitions: An attempt has been made to activate a WAB motion before a previously activated WAB motion was terminated. Reaction: Correction block is reorganized. Local alarm reaction. Interface signals are set. Alarm display.
  • Page 113
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms 10747 [Channel %1: ] Block %2 retraction direction not defined for WAB Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label Definitions: In a WAB retraction block with quarter circle or semi-circle (G248 or G348), the end point in the machining plane was not programmed, and either G143 or G140 without tool radius compensation is active.
  • Page 114
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Definitions: The «Bottleneck detection» (calculation of intersection for the following compensated traversing blocks) has not been able to calculate a point of intersection for the reviewed number of traversing blocks. It is therefore possible that one of the equidistant paths violates the workpiece contour.
  • Page 115
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms 10754 [Channel %1: ] Block %2 deselection of the tool radius compensation only possible in linear block Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label Definitions: Deselection of tool radius compensation with G40 can only be performed in blocks where the G function G00 (rapid traverse) or G01 (feed) is active.
  • Page 116
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms NC Stop on alarm at block end. Remedy: Place deselection of the CRC such that the programmed end point comes to rest outside the compensation circle around the last active compensation point. The following possibilities are available:…
  • Page 117
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Reaction: Correction block is reorganized. Local alarm reaction. Interface signals are set. Alarm display. NC Stop on alarm at block end. Remedy: Do not use splines or polynomials when writing the contour section, but straight lines and circles instead. Divide up the tool piece geometry and deselect the cutter radius compensation between the various sections.
  • Page 118
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Remedy: — Modify part program — Modify machine data — Check whether SBL2 is activated. With SBL2, a block is generated from each part program line which can lead to exceeding the maximum permissible number of empty blocks between two traversing blocks.
  • Page 119
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms 10770 [Channel %1: ] Block %2 change of corner type due to change of orientation with active tool radius compensation Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label Definitions: The type of a corner (inside or outside corner) depends not only on the programmed path but also on the tool orientation.
  • Page 120
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms 10778 [Channel %1: ] Block %2 preprocessing stop with active tool radius compensation Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label Definitions: If a preprocessing stop is detected with active tool radius compensation (either programmed by the user or generated…
  • Page 121
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Alarm display. NC Stop on alarm at block end. Remedy: Modify part program. Program Clear alarm with NC START or RESET key and continue the program. Continuation: 10784 [Channel %1: ] Block %2 illegal tool for tool radius compensation with constraint…
  • Page 122
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms 10792 [Channel %1: ] Block %2 illegal interpolation type during linear programming with angles Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label Definitions: Only spline or linear interpolation is permitted for programming two straight lines with angle specification. Circular or polynomial interpolation is not allowed.
  • Page 123
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Definitions: During programming of a straight line, both positions of the active plane and an angle were specified (the position of the end point is over-specified), or the position of the programmed coordinate cannot be reached with the specified angle.
  • Page 124
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms For the definition the MD 20090 $MC_SPIND_DEF_MASTER_SPIND is available for the default or the keyword SETMS in the part program, thus allowing each spindle of the channel to be redefined as master spindle.
  • Page 125
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms 10861 [Channel %1: ] Block %3 velocity of positioning axis %2 is zero Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Axis %3 = Block number, label Definitions: No axis velocity has been programmed and the positioning velocity set in the machine data is zero.
  • Page 126
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Reaction: Correction block is reorganized. Local alarm reaction. Interface signals are set. Alarm display. NC Stop on alarm. Remedy: Check the NC program for correct tool selection and correct it, if required; then continue the NC program with NC start.
  • Page 127
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Local alarm reaction. Interface signals are set. Alarm display. Remedy: Modify part program such that the number of dummy blocks is reduced. Program Clear alarm with NC START or RESET key and continue the program.
  • Page 128
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms 10891 [Channel %1: ] Block %2 multiplicity of node is greater than its order Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label Definitions: In the B spline the distance between nodes PL (node = point on spline at which 2 polynomials meet) has been programmed with zero too often in succession (i.e.
  • Page 129
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Local alarm reaction. NC Start disable in this channel. Interface signals are set. Alarm display. Remedy: Modify part program. Program Clear alarm with the RESET key. Restart part program Continuation: 10912 [Channel %1: ] Block %2 preprocessing and main run might not be synchronized…
  • Page 130
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms 10915 [Channel %1: ] Block %2 Preparation problem in LookAhead (Identifier %3, Details %4) Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label %3 = Error code %4 = Error details Definitions: The NCK was incorrectly parameterized (under certain circumstances, the parameterized memory is not sufficient), which is why LookAhead can no longer be operated in the expansion mode.
  • Page 131
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms NC Start disable in this channel. Interface signals are set. Alarm display. Remedy: The errors listed above must be corrected in the subroutine for the stock removal contour. Program Clear alarm with the RESET key. Restart part program…
  • Page 132
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Definitions: The calculation of the arc length function could not be performed to the required accuracy. Reaction: Alarm display. Warning display. Remedy: The calculation of the arc length function could not be performed to the required accuracy during active polynomial interpolation.
  • Page 133
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms 12000 [Channel %1: ] Block %2 address %3 programmed repeatedly Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label %3 = Source string of the address Definitions: Most addresses (address types) may only be programmed once in an NC block, so that the block information remains unambiguous (e.g.
  • Page 134
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Definitions: In polynomial interpolation, polynomials must not be greater than the 3rd degree (refer to Programming Guide). f(p) = a0 + a1 p + a2 p2 + a3 p3 The coefficients a0 (the starting points) are identical to the end points of the preceding block and need not be programmed.
  • Page 135
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Definitions: The G functions that can be used in the part program are divided into groups that are syntax defining or non-syntax defining. Only one G function may be programmed from each G group. The functions within a group are mutually preclusive.
  • Page 136
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms 12090 [Channel %1: ] Block %2 unexpected parameter %3 Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label %3 = Disallowed parameters in the text Definitions: The programmed function has been predefined; no parameters are allowed in its call. The first unexpected parameter is displayed.
  • Page 137
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms G92: Spindle speed limitation with v constant STARTFIFO, STOPFIFO: Control of preprocessing buffer E.g. G4 F1000 M100: no M function allowed in the G4 block. Reaction: Correction block is reorganized. Interface signals are set.
  • Page 138
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Reaction: Correction block is reorganized. Interface signals are set. Alarm display. Remedy: Press the NC Stop key and select the function «Correction block» with the softkey PROGRAM CORRECT. The correction pointer positions on the incorrect block.
  • Page 139
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms 22 Frequency [Hz] 23 Voltage [V] 24 Current [A] 25 Temperature [degrees Celsius] 26 Angle [degrees] 27 KV [ 1000/min ] 28 Linear or angluar position [mm|deg or inch|deg] 29 Cutting velocity [m/min; feet/min] 30 Peripheral velocity [m/s;…
  • Page 140
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Reaction: Correction block is reorganized. Interface signals are set. Alarm display. Remedy: If access protection in the part program and on the OPI needs to be set to diffferent levels, only the language commands APWP, APWB, APRP and APRB may be used.
  • Page 141
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms 12190 [Channel %1: ] Block %2 variable of type ARRAY has too many dimensions Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label Definitions: Array with variables of type STRING may be no more than 1-dimensional, and with all other variables no more than 2-dimensional.
  • Page 142
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Definitions: — In the definition of a STRING type variable, an attempt has been made to initialize more than 200 characters. — In an allocation, it has been found that the string does not fit the given variable.
  • Page 143
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Definitions: Only 1 tool orientation can be programmed per DIN block. This can either be defined via the 3 Euler angles, or the end points of the axes, or through direction vectors. Reaction: Correction block is reorganized.
  • Page 144
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Reaction: Correction block is reorganized. Interface signals are set. Alarm display. Remedy: IPerform initialization in separate block in the execution part of the program: DEF FRAME LOCFRAME LOCFRAME = CTRANS(X,200) When using for axis variables:…
  • Page 145
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Remedy: Press the NC Stop key and select the function «Correction block» with the softkey PROGRAM CORRECT. The correction pointer positions on the incorrect block. Define the required variable in the definition part of the program (possibly in the calling program if it is to be a global variable).
  • Page 146
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Reaction: Correction block is reorganized. Interface signals are set. Alarm display. Remedy: Press the NC Stop key and select the function «Correction block» with the softkey PROGRAM CORRECT. The correction pointer positions on the incorrect block.
  • Page 147
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms 12340 [Channel %1: ] Block %2 number of parameters too high %3 Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label %3 = Source string Definitions: When calling a function or a procedure (predefined or user-defined) more parameters were transferred than defined.
  • Page 148
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms 12370 [Channel %1: ] Block %2 range of values %3 not permissible Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label %3 = Source string Definitions: A variable has been initialized with a value range outside an initialization block. The definition of program-global variables is allowed only in special initialization blocks.
  • Page 149
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Reaction: Correction block is reorganized. Interface signals are set. Alarm display. Remedy: Press the NC Stop key and select the function «Correction block» with the softkey PROGRAM CORRECT. The correction pointer positions on the incorrect block.
  • Page 150
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Alarm display. Remedy: Press the NC Stop key and select the function «Correction block» with the softkey PROGRAM CORRECT. The correction pointer positions on the incorrect block. The symbol to be created or the target of program jumps (label) must conform to the system specifications, that means the name must begin with 2 letters (but the 1st sign must not be «$») and may be up to a maximum of 32 characters.
  • Page 151
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms 12460 [Channel %1: ] Block %2 maximum number of symbols exceeded with %3 Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label %3 = Source string Definitions: The max. number of variable definitions (GUD, LUD), macro definitions, cycle programs and/or cycle parameters (PROC instruction) that the controller’s data management system is able to handle has been exceeded.
  • Page 152
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Definitions: A non-allowed G function number (parameter 3) has been programmed for a G group with indirect G code programming. Only the G function numbers indicated in the Programming Guide «Fundamentals», Section 12.3 «List of G functions/Path conditions»…
  • Page 153
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Remedy: Press the NC Stop key and select the function «Correction block» with the softkey PROGRAM CORRECT. The correction pointer positions on the incorrect block. — Use the REDEF instruction only in the INITIAL_INI block…
  • Page 154
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms N … Reaction: Correction block is reorganized. Interface signals are set. Alarm display. Remedy: Press the NC Stop key and select the function «Correction block» with the softkey PROGRAM CORRECT. The correction pointer positions on the incorrect block.
  • Page 155
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Definitions: The maximum internal block length after translator processing must not exceed 256 characters. After editing, for example, several macros in the block or a multiple nesting, this limit can be exceeded. Reaction: Correction block is reorganized.
  • Page 156
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms 12553 [Channel %1: ] Block %2 name %3 option/function is not active Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label %3 = Source symbol Definitions: The option (if MD10711 $MN_NC_LANGUAGE_CONFIGURATION = 1) or the NC function (if MD10711 $MN_NC_LANGUAGE_CONFIGURATION = 3) related to this language command is not active.
  • Page 157
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms 12556 [Channel %1: ] Block %2 name %3 Name is already known Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label %3 = Source symbol Definitions: The name of the symbol to be created is part of the NC language scope and therefore already known. Although the NC function is not active, this name can no longer be used for GUDs, macros and PROC definitions.
  • Page 158
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms 12571 [Channel %1: ] Block %2 %3 not permissible for motion synchronous action Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label %3 = Source symbol Definitions: The predefined subprogram %3 specified here is not allowed in a block with motion synchronous action. It may only be contained in a «normal»…
  • Page 159
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms 12581 [Channel %1: ] Block %2 invalid read access to %3 while in motion synchronous action Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label %3 = Source symbol Definitions: In a motion synchronous action, the displayed variable must not be entered as a variable that is to be read online, i.e.
  • Page 160
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms 12584 [Channel %1: ] Block %2 variable %3 cannot be read synchronously with motion Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label %3 = Source symbol Definitions: In motion synchronous actions on the left side of the compare operation, only special variables are allowed as input variables of SYNFCT and as input variables for PUTFTOCF.
  • Page 161
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms 12587 [Channel %1: ] Block %2 motion synchronous action: operation/function %3 not allowed Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number %3 = Operator/function Definitions: The specified function / operator is not permissible for logic operations of real-time variables in motion synchronous actions.
  • Page 162
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Definitions: The number of global user data blocks is defined in MD18118 $MN_MM_NUM_GUD_MODULES. Here, _N_SGUD_DEF corresponds to block 1, _N_MGUD_DEF corresponds to block 2, _N_UGUD_DEF corresponds to block 3, _N_GUD4_DEF corresponds to block 4 etc.
  • Page 163
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms 12630 [Channel %1: ] Block %2 skip ID/label in control structure not allowed Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number Definitions: Blocks with control structures (FOR, ENDIF, etc.) cannot be concealed and must not contain any labels.
  • Page 164
    The programmed language element is not allowed or unknown in external language mode. Only the language elements from Siemens mode which are used for subprogram calls (except for Lxx) and the language constructs for program repetition with REPEAT (UNTIL) are allowed.
  • Page 165
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms 12722 [Channel %1: ] Block %2 multiple ISO_2/3 macro or cycle calls in the block Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label Definitions: A mixture of cycle and macro calls are programmed in a block, e.g. cycle calls with G81 — G89 together with an M macro in the block or a G65/G66 macro call together with M macros in the block.
  • Page 166
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms 12730 [Channel %1: ] Block %2 no valid transformation machine data parameterized Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label Definitions: The machine data MD24100 $MC_TRAFO_TYPE_1, MD24110 $MC_TRAFO_AXES_IN_1[1], MD24210 $MC_TRAFO_AXES_IN_2[1] are incorrectly set for G07.1, G12.1.
  • Page 167
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Remedy: — correct ISOPRINT command — within an ISOPRINT command, only format instructions of the same type %m.nP or %.nP may be applied Program Clear alarm with NC START or RESET key and continue the program.
  • Page 168
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms 14004 [Channel %1: ] Program %2 cannot be started because of a channel-specific start disable Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = (path with program name) Definitions: The selected program %2 in channel%1 cannot be executed because the channel-specific start disable is set for this channel.
  • Page 169
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Definitions: Program %3 cannot be executed because it has been disabled by another application, for example the HMI Editor. Background: Program %3 is on an external data carrier (CF card, network drive, USB device), and should be executed from there in EES mode (Execution from External Storage).
  • Page 170
    For interrupt routines, two additional program levels can be used. This means that the total number of program levels is increased to 18. The program levels are jointly used by user programs and Siemens cycles and/or Siemens applications such as ShopMill and ShopTurn.
  • Page 171
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Definitions: In a subroutine call the programmed number of passes P is zero or negative. Reaction: Correction block is reorganized. Interface signals are set. Alarm display. Remedy: Program number of passes between 1 and 9 999.
  • Page 172
    Interface signals are set. Alarm display. Remedy: Modify parts program. Please see the Siemens Progamming Guide or OEM documentation for the language commands permissible for the relevant system configuration. Program Clear alarm with NC START or RESET key and continue the program.
  • Page 173
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Definitions: — An illegal parameter value was specified in a function or procedure call. — An illegal number of actual parameters was programmed in a function or procedure call. Reaction: Correction block is reorganized.
  • Page 174
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms 14025 [Channel %1: ] Block %2 motion synchronous action: illegal modal ID Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label Definitions: In modal motion synchronous actions an illegal ID number has been assigned.
  • Page 175
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms 14030 [Channel %1: ] Block %2 combine OSCILL and POSP during oscillation with infeedmotion Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label Definitions: When oscillating controlled by synchronized actions, the assignment of oscillating and infeed axis (OSCILL) as well as the definition of the infeed (POSP) must be carried out in one NC block.
  • Page 176
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Definitions: With involute interpolation, the end point of the involute must be outside the basic circle. The programmed center point / radius or end point must be adapted accordingly. Reaction: Correction block is reorganized.
  • Page 177
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms An alarm message is issued if the difference between the circle radii is either — greater than the value in the MD21000 $MC_CIRCLE_ERROR_CONST (for small radii, if the programmed radius is smaller than the quotient of the machine data MD21000 $MC_CIRCLE_ERROR_CONST divided by MD21010…
  • Page 178
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Definitions: For calculating arithmetic expressions in NC blocks, an operand stack with a fixed set size is used. With very complex expressions, this stack can overflow. This may also occur with extensive expressions in synchronized actions.
  • Page 179
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms 14065 [channel %1: ] block %2 error in SPRINT/ISOPRINT command: error code %4 information %3 Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label %3 = Additional information %4 = Error code…
  • Page 180
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Program Clear alarm with the RESET key. Restart part program Continuation: 14070 [Channel %1: ] Block %2 memory for variables not sufficient for subroutine call Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label…
  • Page 181
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms 14085 [Channel %1: ] Block %2 instruction not allowed Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label Definitions: The instruction ‘TML()’ may only be used in the subprogram, which replaces the T command.
  • Page 182
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Program Clear alarm with the RESET key. Restart part program Continuation: 14092 [Channel %1: ] Block %2 axis %3 is wrong axis type Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label…
  • Page 183
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Definitions: The polynomial degree in the polynomial interpolation is based on the number of programmed coefficients for an axis. The maximum possible polynomial degree is 3, i.e. the axes are according to the function:…
  • Page 184
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms 14097 [Channel %1: ] Block %2 string cannot be converted to AXIS type Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label Definitions: The called function AXNAME — conversion of the transferred parameters of the STRING type to an axis name (return value) of the AXIS type — has not found this axis identifier in the machine data.
  • Page 185
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Remedy: Modify part program. Program Clear alarm with NC START or RESET key and continue the program. Continuation: 14103 [Channel %1: ] Block %2 error %3 when calling function CORRTRAFO. Parameters: %1 = Channel number…
  • Page 186
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Interface signals are set. Alarm display. Remedy: Reduce the number of initialization values. Program Clear alarm with the RESET key. Restart part program Continuation: 14140 [Channel %1: ] Block %2 position programming without transformation not allowed…
  • Page 187
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms 14159 [Channel %1: ] Block %2 more than two angles programmed with ROTS or AROTS Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label Definitions: Frame rotations are described using space angles with the language commands ROTS or AROTS. A maximum of two angles can be programmed.
  • Page 188
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms 3Tool length offset components have been programmed in one block with both TOFF and TOFFL. 4An index must be declared when a tool length offset is programmed with TOFF, the form TOFF=..is not permissible.
  • Page 189
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Definitions: A D word and H word have been programmed simultaneously. Reaction: Correction block is reorganized. Local alarm reaction. Interface signals are set. Alarm display. NC Stop on alarm at block end. Remedy: Modify part program.
  • Page 190
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Program Clear alarm with NC START or RESET key and continue the program. Continuation: 14210 [Channel %1: ] Block %2 polar angle too large Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label…
  • Page 191
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Program Clear alarm with NC START or RESET key and continue the program. Continuation: 14270 [Channel %1: ] Block %2 pole programmed incorrectly Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label Definitions: When defining the pole, an axis was programmed that does not belong to the selected processing level.
  • Page 192
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Alarm display. Remedy: Modify part program. Program Clear alarm with NC START or RESET key and continue the program. Continuation: 14320 [Channel %3: ] Axis %4: handwheel %1 used twice (%2) Parameters: %1 = Handwheel number…
  • Page 193
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Remedy: Please inform the authorized personnel/service department. Modify part program; program defined transformations only. Check MD24… $MC_TRAFO_TYPE_… (assigns the transformation to the part program operation). Program Clear alarm with the RESET key. Restart part program…
  • Page 194
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Reaction: Correction block is reorganized. Interface signals are set. Alarm display. Remedy: Please inform the authorized personnel/service department. Modify part program or machine data. Only with active «OEM transformation» compile cycle: Reference the axes included in the transformation before selecting transformation.
  • Page 195
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms — An attempt was made to remove a geometry axis with the same name as one of the channel axes from the geometry axis grouping. Reaction: Correction block is reorganized. Interface signals are set.
  • Page 196
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms ENDPROC 4. Subroutine structure with keyword and subroutine name (with parameter transfer «call-by-reference»): PROC UPNAME (Typ1 VARNAME1, Typ2 VARNAME2, …) ENDPROC Program Clear alarm with NC START or RESET key and continue the program.
  • Page 197
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms 14601 [Channel %1: ] Block %2 reload buffer could not be deleted Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label Definitions: The reload buffer for «execute from external» could not be deleted. Possible cause: — HMI/PLC communication was not terminated.
  • Page 198
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Remedy: — Cancel program with reset. — Correct program on HMI or PC. — Restart reloading (possibly with block search and interrupt location). Program Clear alarm with the RESET key. Restart part program…
  • Page 199
    If the runtime error occurred as the result of a temporary excessive load on the system (e.g. in the HMI area or in OEM applications) error-free execution is possible on repeating the program or operator action. Otherwise, place a support request with the error text under: http://www.siemens.com/automation/support-request Program Switch control OFF — ON.
  • Page 200
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms 101: Error on selection of tool length compensation 102: Error on selection of transformation 103: Error on selection of synchronized spindle 104: Error on selection of work offset 105: Error after WRITE lock on the selected program Particularly when tool management is active, it is possible that a tool on the spindle or the toolholder is disabled but still needs to be activated.
  • Page 201
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms 14712 [Channel %1: ] Error selecting JOG Retract: error code %4 info %3 Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Is not used %3 = Additional information %4 = Error code Definitions: An error occurred on the selection of JOG Retract, which is described in more detail by the error code (parameter%4):…
  • Page 202
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Definitions: Processing of motion-synchronous actions requires resources that are configured using MD28060 $MC_MM_IPO_BUFFER_SIZE, MD28070 $MC_MM_NUM_BLOCKS_IN_PREP, MD28251 $MC_MM_NUM_SAFE_SYNC_ELEMENTS, MD28250 $MC_MM_NUM_SYNC_ELEMENTS, and MD28253 $MC_MM_NUM_SYNC_STRINGS. If these resources are insufficient for the execution of the part program, then this alarm is issued.
  • Page 203
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms 14756 [Channel %1: ] Block %2 motion synchronous action: %3 wrong value Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, line number %3 = Synact ID Definitions: Illegal value. Reaction: NC Start disable in this channel.
  • Page 204
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Program Clear alarm with NC START or RESET key and continue the program. Continuation: 14760 [Channel %1: ] Block %2 auxiliary function of a group programmed repeatedly Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label Definitions: The M and H functions can be divided up as required over machine data in groups in any variation.
  • Page 205
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Definitions: A maximum of 5 auxiliary functions of type «M» may be entered in an NC block. The upper limit is the total of programmed and implicitely generated M auxiliary functions. Implicit auxiliary functions M19 and M70 are generated, if in MD35035 $MA_SPIND_FUNCTION_MASK, bit 19 has been set for M19 and/or bit 20 for M70.
  • Page 206
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms SynSpi option Repos option Spline option Involute option Poly option Compress option Masl option ExtLang or ExtLanguage option not activated TechCycle option Liftfast option ProgAccel option AllAsupSynact option CmdAxSpind option Mea2 option ProgAnaOut option…
  • Page 207
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Masl option ExtLang or ExtLanguage option not activated TechCycle option Liftfast option ProgAccel option AllAsupSynact option CmdAxSpind option Mea2 option ProgAnaOut option OptAaTOff option MachineMaintenance option PathFeedSAInput option ElecTransfer option Cut3D option CDA option…
  • Page 208
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms 14790 [Channel %1: ] Block %2 axis %3 programmed by PLC Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label %3 = Axis Definitions: In the NC block, an axis has been programmed that is already being traversed by the PLC.
  • Page 209
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Reaction: Correction block is reorganized. Interface signals are set. Alarm display. Remedy: Adjust the value range in accordance with the Programming Guide. Program Clear alarm with NC START or RESET key and continue the program.
  • Page 210
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Program Clear alarm with NC START or RESET key and continue the program. Continuation: 14840 [Channel %1: ] Block %2 incorrect value range for constant cutting speed Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label…
  • Page 211
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Interface signals are set. Alarm display. Remedy: Select an appropriate tool prior to the SVC instruction. Program Clear alarm with NC START or RESET key and continue the program. Continuation: 14862 [Channel %1: ] Block %2 SVC has been programmed, but the radius of the active tool…
  • Page 212
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Program Clear alarm with NC START or RESET key and continue the program. Continuation: 14920 [Channel %1: ] Block %2 intermediate point of circle incorrect Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label…
  • Page 213
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms 15110 [Channel %1: ] Block %2 REORG not possible Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label Definitions: In order to synchronize the preprocessing run and the main run with REORG, the control accesses modification data which are maintained in a logfile.
  • Page 214
    Please load a suitable archive file before continuing machining to avoid subsequent problems. Please inform the authorized personnel/service department. File /_N_MPF_DIR/_N_SIEMDIAGMEMPF_MPF contains information that may help Siemens for error diagnostics. Program Clear alarm with the RESET key. Restart part program…
  • Page 215
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms 15165 [Channel %1: ] Block %2 error when translating or interpreting ASUB %3 Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label %3 = String Definitions: At part program start and at start of an ASUB under Reset condition, the relevant data of all the ASUBs that can be…
  • Page 216
    Interface signals are set. Alarm display. Remedy: The restore file ‘restoreafs.inm’ was not executed. The file lies on the CF Card under /siemens/sinumerik/sys_cach/ nck/ Remedy: Copy ‘restoreafs.inm’ via HMI to /_N_SYF_DIR/_N_RESTOREAFS_INM before the next restart, and then delete or rename the file on the CF card to prevent the restore file being executed at every restart.
  • Page 217
    %3 = Path and file name of the modified SIEMENS cycle Definitions: When executing a SIEMENS cycle modified by the user, a cycle alarm was output with SETAL() (see follow-up alarm in the alarm output). Since the SIEMENS cycle was modified by the user (e.g. machine manufacturer), the cause for the cycle alarm must be determined / eliminated by the user who modified the cycle.
  • Page 218
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Program Clear alarm with the RESET key. Restart part program Continuation: 15187 [Channel %1: ] Error during execution of PROGEVENT file %3. Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Is not used %3 = PROGEVENT file name Definitions: An error has occurred on executing PROGEVENT.
  • Page 219
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Definitions: The following deadlock has been found in the interpreter: Memory is needed for calling a subroutine. The module memory is, however, empty and there is no prospect of module memory becoming free again by executing the preprocessing/main run queue, because this queue is empty.
  • Page 220
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Program Clear alarm with the Delete key or NC START. Continuation: 15340 [Channel %1: ] Block %2 invalid label as search target Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label Definitions: Syntax error! A label must have at least 2 but no more than 32 characters, and the first two characters must be alphabetic or underscore characters.
  • Page 221
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Remedy: Find search destination in which the axes are programmed using an absolute reference. Deactivate adding of the accumulated search position with SD42444 $SC_TARGET_BLOCK_INCR_PROG = FALSE. Use search run with calculation «at contour».
  • Page 222
    Definitions: A SETAL command has been programmed with a cycle alarm number smaller than 60 000 or greater than 69 999. Alarm reaction of Siemens standard cycles: Nos. 61 000 -61 999: Interpreter stop; delete with Reset Nos. 62 000 — 62 999: Compensation block; delete with NC Start Reaction: NC Start disable in this channel.
  • Page 223
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Program Clear alarm with the RESET key. Restart part program Continuation: 15810 [Channel %1: ] Block %2 wrong array dimension for CONTPRON/CONTDCON Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label Definitions: The number of columns for the array created for CONTPRON/CONTDCON does not conform to the current programming guide.
  • Page 224
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms 15950 [Channel %1: ] Block %2 no traverse motion programmed Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label Definitions: Measure with deletion of distance-to-go In the part program, no axis or a traversing path of zero has been programmed with the command MEAS (measure with deletion of distance-to-go).
  • Page 225
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms 16010 [Channel %1: ] Block %2 machining stop after lift fast Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label Definitions: LIFTFAST without interrupt routine (ASUB) has been programmed. The channel is stopped after the lift motion has been carried out.
  • Page 226
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Overview of reactions of common programming to LIFTFAST: Axis | Synact | Reaction to LIFTFAST —————————————— Path | | STOP + LIFTFAST | STOP + LIFTFAST | non-modal | STOP + LIFTFAST | modal | STOP + LIFTFAST | stati.
  • Page 227
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Interface signals are set. Alarm display. Remedy: Assign the axes/spindles that are to be repositioned to the channel via GET command prior to the REPOS command. Example: GET(A); assign the A axis to the channel REPOSL A;…
  • Page 228
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms 16200 [Channel %1: ] Block %2 spline and polynominal interpolation not available Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label Definitions: The spline and polynomial interpolation are options that are not contained in the basic version of the control.
  • Page 229
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms 16420 [Channel %1: ] Block %2 axis %3 programmed repeatedly Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label %3 = Axis name, spindle number Definitions: It is not allowed to program an axis more than once.
  • Page 230
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms 16510 [Channel %1: ] Block %2 no facing axis for diameter programming available Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label Definitions: Diameter programming has been activated although no transverse axis with diameter programming has been applied.
  • Page 231
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms 16679 [Channel %1: ] Block %2 Motion synchronized action: %3 Slave spindle/axis %4 not available Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, line number %3 = Synact ID %4 = Axis name, spindle number Definitions: A coupling was switched-in or switched-out, where the slave spindle/axis is presently not available.
  • Page 232
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Definitions: In the applied function (G74, reference point approach), the spindle must be stationary. Reaction: Correction block is reorganized. Interface signals are set. Alarm display. Remedy: Program M5 or SPOS/SPOSA in front of the defective block in the part program.
  • Page 233
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Remedy: — check circle programming or — assign pitch parameter to the axis with the longest traversing distance. Program Clear alarm with NC START or RESET key and continue the program. Continuation: 16740…
  • Page 234
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Remedy: Procedure for automatically engaging the suitable gear stage prior to thread cutting: * Program the spindle speed (S) in a G331 block without axis motions and prior to thread cutting, e.g. G331 S1000.
  • Page 235
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Definitions: No Stop is needed for the programmed function. A Stop is necessary after SPOSA or after M5 if the next block is to be loaded only after a spindle stop. Reaction: Correction block is reorganized.
  • Page 236
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Definitions: The following spindle/axis has not been written in the part program. Reaction: NC Start disable in this channel. Interface signals are set. Alarm display. NC Stop on alarm. Remedy: Modify part program.
  • Page 237
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms 16775 [Channel %1: ] Block %2 motion synchronous action: %3 axis %4 no measuring system available Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, line number %3 = Synact ID %4 = Axis name, spindle number…
  • Page 238
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms 16810 [Channel %1: ] Block %2 traverse instruction ACP for axis %3 not allowed Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label %3 = Axis name, spindle number Definitions: The keyword ACP (Absolute Coordinate Positive) is only allowed for «modulo axes». It causes approach of the programmed absolute position in the specified direction.
  • Page 239
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Program Clear alarm with the Delete key or NC START. Continuation: 16904 [Channel %1: ] Program control: action %2<ALNX> not allowed in the current state Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Action number/action name Definitions: The operation (program, JOG, block search, reference point, etc.) cannot be started or continued in the current status.
  • Page 240
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms 16909 [Channel %1: ] Action %2<ALNX> not allowed in current mode Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Action number/action name Definitions: A different operating mode must be activated for the activated function.
  • Page 241
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms 16915 [Channel %1: ] Action %2<ALNX> not allowed in the current block Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Action number/action name Definitions: If traversing blocks are interrupted by asynchronous subroutines, then it must be possible for the interrupted program to continue (reorganization of block processing) after termination of the asynchronous subroutine.
  • Page 242
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Program Clear alarm with the RESET key. Restart part program Continuation: 16923 [Channel %1: ] Program control: action %2<ALNX> not allowed in the current state Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Action number/action name Definitions: The current processing cannot be stopped since a preprocessing process is active.
  • Page 243
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Definitions: A program interrupt has been activated in a non REORG capable block. Examples of possible program interrupts in this case: — Traversing to fixed stop — Vdi channel delete distance-to-go — Vdi axial delete distance-to-go…
  • Page 244
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms 16932 [Channel %1: ] Conflict when activating user data type %2 Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Data type Definitions: The «activate user data» function (PI service _N_SETUDT) modifies a data block (tool offset, settable work offset or base frame) which is also written by the NC blocks in preparation.
  • Page 245
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Program Clear alarm with the Delete key or NC START. Continuation: 16936 [Channel %1: ] Action %2<ALNX> not possible due to active dry run Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Action number/action name Definitions: This action is not allowed as dry run feedrate is currently active.
  • Page 246
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Definitions: Reorganization events are waiting for the end of a gear change. The alarm is displayed during the waiting period. Reaction: Alarm display. Warning display. Remedy: Alarm is suppressed by means of MD11411 $MN_ENABLE_ALARM_MASK bit 1 = 0.
  • Page 247
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Definitions: The action in the 2nd parameter was rejected, since an asynchronous subprogram is currently active. Currently, only the integrated search run is rejected with this alarm. The integrated search run is activated, if search run is triggered in the Stop program state.
  • Page 248
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms 16946 [Channel %1: ] Start via START is not allowed Parameters: %1 = Channel ID Definitions: This alarm is active with «Group Serupro» only. «Group Serupro» is activated by means of MD10708 $MN_SERUPRO_MASK, Bit 2 and enables the retrace support of entire channel groups during block search.
  • Page 249
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms 16951 [Channel %1: ] Search run in a protected program section. Parameters: %1 = Channel number Definitions: A part programmer can define protected part program sections with the language commands IPTRLOCK and IPTRUNLOCK. Every search run in these program sections will then be acknowledged with alarm 16951. In other words: When the alarm appears, the user has started a search run (Serupro type) and the search target lies in a protected area.
  • Page 250
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Definitions: In a program area (stop delay area) that is bracketed with DELAYFSTON and DELAYFSTOF, a program command was used that causes a stop. No commands other than G4 are permissible that might cause a stop even though only shortly.
  • Page 251
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Definitions: The function (2nd parameter) must not be activated during simulation search. Reaction: Alarm display. Remedy: Wait for search end. Program Clear alarm with the Delete key or NC START. Continuation: 16960 [Channel %1: ] Action %2<ALNX> prohibited during EXECUTE PROGRAM AREA.
  • Page 252
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Remedy: Eliminate pending alarms. Program Switch control OFF — ON. Continuation: 16966 [Channel %1: ] Action %2<ALNX> prohibited during Jog Retract Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Action number/action name Definitions: The function (2nd parameter) must not be activated during Jog Retract.
  • Page 253
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms — If the alarm occurs while writing one of the parameters $TC_MDP1/$TC_MDP2/$TC_MLSR, check whether machine data MD18077 $MN_MM_NUM_DIST_REL_PER_MAGLOC / MD18076$MN_MM_NUM_LOCS_WITH_DISTANCE has been set correctly. MD18077 $MN_MM_NUM_DIST_REL_PER_MAGLOC defines the number of different Index1 statements that may be made for an Index2 value.
  • Page 254
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Definitions: General: Read or write access has been programmed to an array variable with an illegal 1st array index. The valid array indices must lie within the defined array size and the absolute limits (0 — 32,766).
  • Page 255
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms 17040 [Channel %1: ] Block %2 illegal axis index Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label Definitions: A read or write access has been programmed to an axial variable in which the axis name cannot be unambiguously imaged on a machine axis.
  • Page 256
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Program Clear alarm with the RESET key. Restart part program Continuation: 17060 [Channel %1: ] Block %2 requested data area too large Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label Definitions: The maximum memory space of 8 KB available for a symbol has been exceeded.
  • Page 257
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms 17090 [Channel %1: ] Block %2 %3 value exceeds upper limit Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label %3 = MD Definitions: An attempt was made to write into a machine data with a value greater than the defined upper limit.
  • Page 258
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms 17120 [Channel %1: ] Block %2 analog input no. %3 not activated Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label %3 = Input number Definitions: An attempt has been made by means of the system variable $A_INA[n] to read an analog input n that has not been activated by the MD10300 $MN_FASTIO_ANA_NUM_INPUTS.
  • Page 259
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms 17160 [Channel %1: ] Block %2 no tool selected Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label Definitions: An attempt has been made to access the current tool offset data via the system variables:…
  • Page 260
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms 17181 [Channel %1: ] Block %2 T no.= %3, D no.= %4 not existing Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label %3 = T number %4 = D number Definitions: A programmed D number was not recognized by the NC.
  • Page 261
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Alarm display. Remedy: Check tool call in the NC part program: — Correct tool number T.. programmed? — Tool parameters P1 — P25 defined? The dimensions of the tool edge must have been entered previously either through the operator panel or through the V.24 interface.
  • Page 262
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Definitions: In the displayed block, a tool holder that is not defined is accessed. Reaction: Correction block is reorganized. Interface signals are set. Alarm display. Remedy: Check the programming of the tool holder in the NC program.
  • Page 263
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms 17270 [Channel %1: ] Block %2 call-by-reference: illegal variable Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label Definitions: Machine data and system variables must not be transferred as call-by-reference parameters. Reaction: Correction block is reorganized.
  • Page 264
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms 17502 [Channel %1: ] Block %2 indexing axis %3 with Hirth tooth system stop is delayed Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label %3 = Axis name Definitions: For the indexing axis, the ‘Hirth tooth system’ function is activated and the override has been set to 0 or another stop condition (e.g.
  • Page 265
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Or, an attempt is made with a MOV movement to travel to a position outside the permitted area. Reaction: Interpreter stop NC Start disable in this channel. Interface signals are set. Alarm display.
  • Page 266
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Remedy: Deselect the transformation with TRAFOOF ahead of time or remove the action from the part program block Program Clear alarm with NC START or RESET key and continue the program. Continuation: 17620…
  • Page 267
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Program Clear alarm with NC START or RESET key and continue the program. Continuation: 17800 [Channel %1: ] Block %2 illegally coded position programmed Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label Definitions: The position number n specified with the keyword FP=n is not permissible.
  • Page 268
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Program Clear alarm with the Delete key or NC START. Continuation: 17813 [Channel %1: ] Axis %2 fixed-point approach in JOG and override motion active Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Axis name, spindle number…
  • Page 269
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Definitions: A ‘JOG to position’ has been requested for an axis. This is not possible because: Reason 1: The axis is involved in the active transformation. Reason 2: The axis is a following axis in an active coupling.
  • Page 270
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms NC Start disable in this channel. Interface signals are set. Alarm display. NC Stop on alarm. Remedy: Modify SD43320 $SA_JOG_POSITION or indexing positions. Program Clear alarm with the RESET key. Restart part program…
  • Page 271
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Definitions: At this point, the block context calls for a machine axis. This is the case with: — G74 (reference point approach) — G75 (fixed point approach) — PRESETON/PRESETONS on GANTRY synchronous axis…
  • Page 272
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms 11: Contour definition incorrect or frame activated. 12: Other, not further specified errors. Reaction: Correction block is reorganized. Interface signals are set. Alarm display. Remedy: Please inform the authorized personnel/service department. Modify definition of the protection zone and check MD.
  • Page 273
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms 18003 [Channel %1: ] Block %2 channel-specific protection zone %3 cannot be activated. Error code %4 Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label %3 = Number of the channel-specific protection zone…
  • Page 274
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Remedy: — Modify the protection zone definition or do not simultaneously activate protection zones that have different orientations. — Check machine data and modify the protection zone definition if necessary. Program Clear alarm with NC START or RESET key and continue the program.
  • Page 275
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Definitions: Allocation of a fine shift to settable frames or the basic frame is not possible since MD18600 $MN_MM_FRAME_FINE_TRANS is not equal to 1. Reaction: Interpreter stop Interface signals are set. Alarm display.
  • Page 276
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Definitions: It is not allowed to change the geometry axis assignment because the current frame contains rotations. Reaction: Interpreter stop NC Start disable in this channel. Interface signals are set. Alarm display. NC Stop on alarm.
  • Page 277
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Remedy: Please inform the authorized personnel/service department. There are 3 possible causes of error: 1. The value entered in MD34030 $MA_REFP_MAX_CAM_DIST is too small. Determine the maximum possible distance from the beginning of reference motion up to the reduction cam and compare with the value in MD34030 $MA_REFP_MAX_CAM_DIST, increase the value in the MD if necessary.
  • Page 278
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms 20003 [Channel %1: ] Axis %2 measuring system error Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Axis name, spindle number Definitions: In a measuring system with distance-coded reference marks, the distance between two adjacent markers has been found to be more than twice the value entered in MD34300 $MA_ENC_REFP_MARKER_DIST.
  • Page 279
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Remedy: Please inform the authorized personnel/service department. Check the possible reasons for termination: — Servo enable missing: NC/PLC interface signal DB380x DBX2.1 (Servo enable) — Measuring system switchover: NC/PLC interface signal DB380x DBX1.5 / 1.6 (Position measuring system 1/2) — Traversing key + or — missing: NC/PLC interface signal DB380x DBX4.7 / 4.6 (Traversing keys plus/minus)
  • Page 280
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Definitions: When setting MD34200 $MA_ENC_REFP_MODE = 6 the 2nd encoder must first be referenced. Reaction: NC Start disable in this channel. Interface signals are set. Alarm display. NC Stop on alarm. Remedy: Modify referencing mode MD34200 $MA_ENC_REFP_MODE or reference 2nd encoder.
  • Page 281
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Program Clear alarm with the Delete key or NC START. Continuation: 20054 [Channel %1: ] Axis %2 wrong index for indexing axis in JOG mode Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Axis name, spindle number Definitions: 1.
  • Page 282
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Local alarm reaction. Channel not ready. NC Start disable in this channel. Interface signals are set. Alarm display. NC Stop on alarm. Remedy: Please inform the authorized personnel/service department. — Correct the part program or — Specify the correct feed for PLC axes at the VDI interface, — Specify feed for oscillating axes in the SD43740 $SA_OSCILL_VELO.
  • Page 283
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms 20062 [Channel %1: ] Axis %2 already active Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Axis name, spindle number Definitions: The displayed axis is already traversing as a machine axis. Therefore, it cannot be operated as a geometry axis.
  • Page 284
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Remedy: Please inform the authorized personnel/service department. Specify smaller target position. Modify MD for SW limit switch. Possibly activate another SW limit switch. Retract axis via JOG. Program Alarm display showing cause of alarm disappears. No further operator action necessary.
  • Page 285
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Remedy: Please inform the authorized personnel/service department. Check the indexing axis number given by the PLC and correct this if necessary. If the indexing axis number is correct and the alarm results from an indexing position table that has been set too short, check the machine data for indexing axis declaration.
  • Page 286
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms 20085 [Channel %1: ] Contour handwheel: traverse direction or overtravel of beginning of block not allowed Parameters: %1 = Channel number Definitions: Travel takes place on the path with the contour handwheel in the opposite direction to the programmed travel direction and the starting point of the path has been reached at the start of the block.
  • Page 287
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Alarm display. Remedy: Please inform the authorized personnel/service department. Check and correct the characteristic data in the compensation table ($AN_CEC_OUTPUT_AXIS and $AN_CEC_MULT_BY_TABLE). If the error cannot be found, the alarm can be suppressed by switching off the compensation in the axis ($MA_CEC_ENABLE) or the tables, ($SN_CEC_TABLE_ENABLE).
  • Page 288
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Interface signals are set. Alarm display. NC Stop on alarm. Remedy: SETM(): use marker in valid value range; do not set the marker again. CLEARM(): use marker in valid value range. Program Clear alarm with the RESET key. Restart part program…
  • Page 289
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms 20144 [Channel %1: ] Block %2 motion synchronous action: %3 system variable cannot be accessed Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, line number %3 = Synact ID Definitions: When using system variables, it is assumed that a read/write operation can access the required data successfully. In accesses to encoder actual values or digital I/Os, the result depends on the availability of the corresponding hardware components.
  • Page 290
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms — MEASA was programmed in a synchronized action — Measurement is already active — Programming error (see alarm 21701) Reaction: NC Start disable in this channel. Interface signals are set. Alarm display. NC Stop on alarm.
  • Page 291
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Interface signals are set. Alarm display. Remedy: Please inform the authorized personnel/service department. Increase the number of the R variables or reduce the FIFO elements. MD28050 $MC_MM_NUM_R_PARAM = MD28262 $MC_START_AC_FIFO + MD28260 $MC_NUM_AC_FIFO *…
  • Page 292
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms 20308 [Channel %1: ] Manual traverse in the SZS coodinate system is not possible Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Axis name, spindle number Definitions: Manual traverse in the SZS coodinate system is not possible in JOG Retract mode.
  • Page 293
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms 21610 [Channel %1: ] Axis %2 encoder %3 frequency exceeded Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Axis name, spindle number %3 = String (encoder number) Definitions: The maximum permissible frequency of the currently active encoder (axis-specific interface signal DB380x DBX1.5 / 1.6 (position measuring system 1/2)) in the axis-specific MD36300 $MA_ENC_FREQ_LIMIT [n] (n …
  • Page 294
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms NC Stop on alarm. Remedy: Please inform the authorized personnel/service department. Check the interface signals DB380x DBX2.1 (Servo enable), DB380x DBX4001.7 (Pulse enable), check the drive signals DB390x DBX4001.7 (Pulses enabled), DB390x DBX4001.5 (Drive ready) for example with the PLC status display in the DIAGNOSTICS operating area.
  • Page 295
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms 21616 [Channel %1: ] Block %2 overlaid motion active at transformation switchover Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label Definitions: The overlaid motion in the BCS changes its significance because of the transformation change and can therefore lead to undesired axis movements.
  • Page 296
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Remedy: Modify part program. Change the incorrectly specified tool length compensation. Note: RESET alone is not enough if transformation also remains active during RESET. Program Clear alarm with the RESET key. Restart part program…
  • Page 297
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms 21665 [Channel %1: ] $AA_TOFF cleared Parameters: %1 = Channel number Definitions: If the tool position is changed with RESET and $AA_TOFF is active during RESET, the position offset ($AA_TOFF) is cleared. Reaction: Correction block is reorganized.
  • Page 298
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Definitions: Measurement level 2 (MEASA, MEAWA, MEAC). There is an error in the programmed measurement task. Possible causes: — Invalid measurement mode — Invalid probe — Invalid encoder — Invalid number of measurement signal edges…
  • Page 299
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms NC Stop on alarm. Remedy: — Check probe — Check start positioning for measuring — Check program Program Clear alarm with the RESET key. Restart part program Continuation: 21740 Output value at analog output no. %1 has been limited Parameters: %1 = No.
  • Page 300
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms 22000 [Channel %1: ] Block %2 Spindle %3 Gear stage change in %4 not possible Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label %3 = Spindle number %4 = Gear stage…
  • Page 301
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Remedy: The gear stage is to be set prior to the corresponding machining step. If it is necessary, however, to change the gear stage within one of the above mentioned functions, this function must be switched off for the time of the gear stage change.
  • Page 302
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Definitions: The gear stage required for axis mode has not been installed. A gear stage has been configured in MD35014 $MA_GEAR_STEP_USED_IN_AXISMODE, in which the spindle is to be in axis mode. This gear stage is checked whenever the spindle is switched into axis mode. The configured gear stage is compared with the gear stage output by the PLC (NC/PLC interface signal DB380x DBX2000.0 — .2 (Actual…
  • Page 303
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Definitions: — An oriented spindle stop (SPOS/SPOSA) has been programmed or the position control of the spindle was switched on with SPCON but no spindle encoder has been defined. — When switching on the position control, the spindle speed is greater than the limiting speed of the measuring system.
  • Page 304
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Definitions: In the case of SPOS/SPOSA with an absolute encoder, only the referencing mode MD34200 $MA_ENC_REFP_MODE = 2 is supported! SPOS/SPOSA does not support MD34200 $MA_ENC_REFP_MODE = 6 at all! Reaction: NC Start disable in this channel.
  • Page 305
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Definitions: The configured zero marker search velocity is too high. The encoder limit frequency is exceeded for the active measuring system. Reaction: NC Start disable in this channel. Interface signals are set. Alarm display.
  • Page 306
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Definitions: The thread cutting axis has been stopped while a thread block was active. The stop can be caused by VDI signals that cause the feed to be interrupted. Reaction: NC Start disable in this channel.
  • Page 307
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Program Clear alarm with the Delete key or NC START. Continuation: 22272 [channel %1: ] block %2 axis %3 thread cutting: block length %4 too short for predefined thread pitch Parameters: %1 = Channel number…
  • Page 308
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms — Error code 13 : DB380x DBX5006.2 (Spindle start counterclockwise rotation; — Error code 14 : DB380x DBX5006.4 (Spindle positioning). Reaction: NC Start disable in this channel. Interface signals are set. Alarm display.
  • Page 309
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Remedy: Remedy conflict. Program Clear alarm with the Delete key or NC START. Continuation: 22296 [Channel %1: ] Spindle %2 Error on gear stage change (cause: error code %3) Parameters: %1 = Channel number…
  • Page 310
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms 22321 [Channel %1: ] Axis %2 PRESET not allowed during traverse motion Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label Definitions: A preset command was sent from the HMI or PLC while an axis was traveling in JOG mode.
  • Page 311
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Program Clear alarm with the Delete key or NC START. Continuation: 25000 Axis %1 hardware fault of active encoder Parameters: %1 = Axis name, spindle number Definitions: The signals of the currently active position actual value encoder (NC/PLC interface signal DB380x DBX1.5 = 1 (Position measuring system 1) or DB380x DBX1.6 = 1 (Position measuring system 2)) are missing, do not have the…
  • Page 312
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms NC Stop on alarm. Channel not ready. Remedy: Please inform the authorized personnel/service department. Check the measuring system in accordance with the instructions given by the measuring device manufacturer. Monitoring can be switched off by setting MD36310 $MA_ENC_ZERO_MONITORING[n] to 100 (n = encoder number: 1,2).
  • Page 313
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms 25021 Axis %1 zero mark monitoring of passive encoder Parameters: %1 = Axis name, spindle number Definitions: Monitoring relates to the encoder that is not used by the position control. (NC-PLC interface signal DB380x DBX1.5 = 0 (Position measuring system 1) or DB380x DBX1.6 = 0 (Position measuring system 2))
  • Page 314
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Interface signals are set. Alarm display. NC Stop on alarm. Channel not ready. Remedy: Please inform the authorized personnel/service department. — Check the speed setpoint cable (bus cable). — Check the actual values and direction of position control.
  • Page 315
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Definitions: The NCK calculates for each interpolation point (setpoint) of an axis the actual value that should result based on an internal model. If this calculated actual value and the true machine actual value differ by a larger amount than given in the MD36400 $MA_CONTOUR_TOL, then the program is canceled and the alarm message is issued.
  • Page 316
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms A static offset can be added to the speed setpoint in the MD36720 $MA_DRIFT_VALUE. This is not included in the drift monitoring because it acts like a voltage work offset. Reaction: Alarm display.
  • Page 317
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms 25105 Axis %1 measuring systems differ considerably Parameters: %1 = Axis name, spindle number Definitions: The two measuring systems differ considerably, i.e. the cyclically monitored actual value difference between the two measuring systems is greater than the associated tolerance value set in the machine data MD36510 $MA_ENC_DIFF_TOL.
  • Page 318
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Definitions: For PROFIdrive: The drive signals a serious fault which prevents the drive from being ready. The exact cause of the fault can be found by evaluating the additionally output drive alarms (It may be necessary to activate these diagnostic alarms by parameterizing the MDs DRIVE_FUNCTION_MASK, PROFIBUS_ALARM_ACCESS etc): Alarms 380500 and 380501 (or the corresponding alarm numbers implemented on the HMI side).
  • Page 319
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Definitions: The clamped axis has been pushed out of its setpoint position. The permissible difference is defined in the axis-specific MD36050 $MA_CLAMP_POS_TOL. Clamping an axis is activated with the axis-specific interface signal DB380x DBX2.3 (Clamping process active).
  • Page 320
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms * In the case of rotary absolue encoders behind the gears (and activer traversing range extension in accordance with $MA_ENC_ABS_BUFFERING): Absolute position format (in Gx_XIST2) is complete/sufficient for position reconstruction via PowerOff in accordance with the following condition: $MA_ENC_RESOL*$MA_ENC_PULSE_MULT*$MA_ENC_ABS_TURNS_MODULO must not be smaller than 2**32.
  • Page 321
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Program Switch control OFF — ON. Continuation: 26005 Axis %1 parameterization error: output rating Parameters: %1 = Axis name, spindle number Definitions: For analog drives: The output evaluation of the analog speed setpoint set in the MD32250 $MA_RATED_OUTVAL or in MD 32260 $MA_RATED_VELO is zero.
  • Page 322
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms 26014 Axis %1 machine data %2 invalid value Parameters: %1 = Axis name, spindle number %2 = String: MD identifier Definitions: Machine data includes a value that is not valid. Reaction: NC not ready.
  • Page 323
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Interface signals are set. Alarm display. NC Stop on alarm. Remedy: Repeat entry with correct value and then Reset. Program Restart part program.Clear alarm with the RESET key in all channels of this mode group. Restart part program.
  • Page 324
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms NC Stop on alarm. Channel not ready. Remedy: Please inform the authorized personnel/service department. Rectify hardware error, replace encoder if necessary. Program Switch control OFF — ON. Continuation: 26022 Axis %1 encoder %2 measurement with simulated encoder not possible…
  • Page 325
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Alarm display. NC Stop on alarm. Remedy: — Set P2038 = 1 or — Set P0922 = 100…199 or — Set bit 15 of MD13070 $MN_DRIVE_FUNCTION_MASK (note the boundary conditions, see above) and execute a Power ON in each case.
  • Page 326
    Another possible cause is that a synchronized action needs to be finished before the path interpolation continues. The alarm is only output if MD11400 $MN_TRACE_SELECT = ‘H400’. The alarm output is normally suppressed. — MD11400 $MN_TRACE_SELECT has SIEMENS password protection. Reaction: Alarm display.
  • Page 327
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms The path interpolation stops abruptly at the end of the block indicated in the message (regenerative stop). Alarm 21620 is often triggered as a follow-up alarm. If not, the path continues after the block change.
  • Page 328
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Definitions: Axis cannot be made a PLC-controlled axis. For the time being, the axis cannot be controlled at any state from the PLC. Reaction: Interface signals are set. Alarm display. Remedy: Use Release or Waitp to make the axis a neutral one.
  • Page 329
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms 26081 [Channel %1: ] Axis trigger of axis %2 was activated, but axis is not PLC-controlled Parameters: %1 = Channel %2 = Axis, spindle Definitions: The axis trigger for single axis was initiated. However, the axis is not PLC-controlled at the trigger time (therefore no single axis) or the position became invalid.
  • Page 330
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Program Clear alarm with the RESET key. Restart part program Continuation: 26102 Axis %1 drive %2 sign of life missing Parameters: %1 = Axis name, spindle number %2 = Drive number Definitions: For PROFIdrive only: The sign-of-life cell is no longer being updated by the drive.
  • Page 331
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Alarm display. NC Stop on alarm. Remedy: Possible causes: — MD 30240 $MA_ENC_TYPE not equal to 0 as a result of an oversight; the encoder should actually be simulated (= 0). — MD 30220 $MA_ENC_MODULE_NR entered incorrectly, i.e. the logical drive numbers were transposed and an invalid value is stored for this drive in MD 13050 $MN_DRIVE_LOGIC_ADDRESS (see next paragraph), or a drive number which does not exist on the bus was entered (check the number for slaves, for example).
  • Page 332
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.2 NCK alarms Definitions: With $AA_ESR_ENABLE[Achse] = 1 axis exchange not permitted. Reaction: Interpreter stop NC Start disable in this channel. Interface signals are set. Alarm display. NC Stop on alarm. Remedy: Set $AA_ESR_ENABLE[axis] = 0 before axis exchange.
  • Page 333: Drive Alarms

    NC Start disable in this channel. Interface signals are set. Alarm display. NC Stop on alarm. Remedy: Place a support request with the error text under: http://www.siemens.com/automation/support-request Program Switch control OFF — ON. Continuation: 300406 Problem in the non-cyclic communication for basic address %1, additional information…

  • Page 334
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.3 Drive alarms Remedy: — Please inform the authorized personnel/service department. — Create more space in the file system. It is normally sufficient to delete 2 NC programs or to free 4 — 8 Kbytes of memory.
  • Page 335
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.3 Drive alarms Definitions: An error occurred during startup of the PROFIBUS/PROFINET master. Overview: Cause of the error, Par 1, Par 2, Par 3: — 01 = DPM version, DPM version, DPA version, — — 02 = DPM ramp-up timeout, DPM actual value status, DPM setpoint value status, —…
  • Page 336
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.3 Drive alarms 380003 PROFIBUS/PROFINET: Operating error, reason %1 parameter %2 %3 %4. Parameters: %1 = Cause of the error %2 = Parameter 1 %3 = Parameter 2 %4 = Parameter 3 Definitions: An operating error occurred on the PROFIBUS/PROFINET in cyclic mode.
  • Page 337
    — 05 = Source is not present. SDB source: — 99 = Passive file system: _N_SDB_DIR — 100 = CF card: /siemens/sinumerik/sdb/… — 101 = CF card: /addon/sinumerik/sdb/… — 102 = CF card: /oem/sinumerik/sdb/… — 103 = CF card: /user/sinumerik/sdb/…
  • Page 338
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.3 Drive alarms Definitions: The generation of the PROFIBUS/PROFINET in the SDB does not conform to the configuration specifications of the NC in use. Overview: Cause of the error, par 1: — 01 = SDB contains slave/device without diagnostics slot, slave/device address…
  • Page 339
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.3 Drive alarms If no inconsistencies can be found in the parameters, compare these machine data with the configuration in SDB (STEP 7 project). In particular, check that the lengths configured for the individual slots do not result in area overlaps.
  • Page 340
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.3 Drive alarms Remedy: Enter correct base addresses in the machine data: — For length=1: Correct machine data MN_HW_ASSIGN_DIG_FASTIN. — For length=2: Correct machine data MN_HW_ASSIGN_ANA_FASTIN. — NCK restart If the error cannot be eliminated by this procedure, please make a note of the error text and contact the control system manufacturer.
  • Page 341
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.3 Drive alarms Program Alarm display showing cause of alarm disappears. No further operator action necessary. Continuation: 380076 PROFIBUS/PROFINET: No DO1 message frame: Bus %2 slave/device %1 Parameters: %1 = Slave/device address %2 = Number of the affected bus…
  • Page 342: Plc Alarms

    With this alarm, internal alarm states are displayed that, in conjunction with the transferred error text, provide information about the cause and location of the error. Reaction: PLC Stop Remedy: Notify Siemens of this error together with the error message. Program Switch control OFF — ON. Continuation: Diagnostics Manual…

  • Page 343
    With this alarm, internal alarm states are displayed that, in conjunction with the transferred error number, provide information on the cause and location of the error. Reaction: PLC Stop Remedy: Report this error to Siemens along with the type number. Program Switch control OFF — ON. Continuation: 400003…
  • Page 344
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.4 PLC alarms 400008 Programming tool — version is not compatible %1 %2 Parameters: %1 = Programming tool version Definitions: This version is not compatible with the product level of the controller. Reaction: PLC Stop Remedy: Translate the user program using a suitable programming tool version and load in the control.
  • Page 345
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.4 PLC alarms Program Switch control OFF — ON. Continuation: 400017 PLC TOOLMAN: missing table in DB9900 Definitions: The PLC TOOLMAN cannot find one of the tables 9900, 9901 or 9902. Reaction: PLC Stop Remedy: Create the missing table(s).
  • Page 346: Cycle Alarms

    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.5 Cycle alarms 400024 Dynamically managed memory used up, area %1 Definitions: Memory overflow in area corresponding to memory area identification %1= 1xx: dynamic RAM, xx refers to internal RAM class %1= 2: MMF (user project)

  • Page 347
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.5 Cycle alarms 61002 %[[Channel %1: ] Block %2: %]Type of machining incorrectly defined Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label Definitions: Remedy: Modify VARI parameter. 61003 %[[Channel %1: ] Block %2: %]No feed programmed in cycle…
  • Page 348
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.5 Cycle alarms 61010 [Channel %1: ] Block %2: Finishing allowance too large Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label Definitions: The finishing allowance for the base is greater than the total depth.
  • Page 349
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.5 Cycle alarms 61018 [Channel %1: ] Block %2: function %4 not executable with NCK Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label channel number Definitions: Remedy: 61019 %[[Channel %1: ] Block %2: %]Parameter %4 incorrectly defined…
  • Page 350
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.5 Cycle alarms Remedy: 61025 [Channel %1: ] Block %2: Check tool carrier position Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label channel number Definitions: Remedy: 61026 [Channel %1: ] Block %2: Cycle cannot be executed with NC function %4.
  • Page 351
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.5 Cycle alarms Remedy: 61033 [Channel %1: ] Block %2: Incorrect file type: %4 Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label Definitions: Remedy: 61034 [Channel %1: ] Block %2: File is full: %4…
  • Page 352
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.5 Cycle alarms 61041 [Channel %1: ] Block %2: Line range too large: %4 Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label Definitions: Remedy: 61042 [Channel %1: ] Block %2: Program name %4 illegal…
  • Page 353
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.5 Cycle alarms Definitions: Remedy: Part program (main program) not found in specified job list in respective channel. Check name and contents of job list. 61047 [Channel %1: ] Block %2: Label name %4 too long…
  • Page 354
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.5 Cycle alarms 61054 [Channel %1: ] Block %2: Programs started from various job lists: %4 Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label Definitions: Programs from various job lists were started simultaneously. This is illegal. All programs must be assigned to the same job list.
  • Page 355
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.5 Cycle alarms 61062 %[[Channel %1: ] Block %2: %]Axis position %4incorrectly programmed Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label Definitions: Remedy: Check the last programmed axis position 61063 %[[Channel %1: ] Block %2: %]Tool at magazine location %4 is not a multitool…
  • Page 356
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.5 Cycle alarms 61102 %[[Channel %1: ] Block %2: %]No spindle direction programmed Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label Definitions: Remedy: Parameter SDIR (or SDR in CYCLE840) must be programmed. 61103 [Channel %1: ] Block %2: Number of holes is zero…
  • Page 357
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.5 Cycle alarms Remedy: — Change milling direction. — During pocket machining (CYCLE63), the selected milling direction must match the milling direction of centering/ rough drilling. 61110 [Channel %1: ] Block %2: Finishing allowance at the base is greater than the depth…
  • Page 358
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.5 Cycle alarms Definitions: The radius of the active tool is negative or zero. Remedy: Modify radius. 61118 [Channel %1: ] Block %2: Length or width = 0 Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label Definitions: The length or width of the milling area is illegal.
  • Page 359
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.5 Cycle alarms 61126 [Channel %1: ] Block %2: Thread length too short Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label Definitions: Remedy: Program lower spindle speed or raise reference point (reference plane). 61127…
  • Page 360
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.5 Cycle alarms 61133 [Channel %1: ] Block %2: 3rd parallel axis parameter incorrect, check axis name or GUD _SCW_N[] Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label Definitions: Remedy: 61134 [Channel %1: ] Block %2: Rotary axis parameters incorrect, check values for rotary…
  • Page 361
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.5 Cycle alarms 61140 [Channel %1: ] Block %2: Main spindle is not set up correctly Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label Definitions: Remedy: Check the set up of the main spindle.
  • Page 362
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.5 Cycle alarms 61147 [Channel %1: ] Block %2: Transformation not active: %4 Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label Definitions: Remedy: The stated transformation is not active. You have to activate the transformation before you can use it.
  • Page 363
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.5 Cycle alarms Remedy: Error causes: 1. Error code = A -> no tool or no cutting edge (D1..) active 2. Error code = B -> swivel «no» and swivel «direct», swivel plane «additive» not permitted 3.
  • Page 364
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.5 Cycle alarms Remedy: Reduce plane infeed or slot width, or use milling cutter with larger diameter 61161 [Channel %1: ] Block %2: Centering diameter or tool parameter (diameter, tip angle) are incorrect Parameters: %1 = Channel number…
  • Page 365
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.5 Cycle alarms 61168 [Channel %1: ] Block %2: Incorrect machining plane: %4 Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label Definitions: Remedy: The machining plane is incorrect. Program correct machining plane. 61169 [Channel %1: ] Block %2: Spindle incorrectly programmed…
  • Page 366
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.5 Cycle alarms 61176 [Channel %1: ] Block %2: text length programmed too small Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label Definitions: The text length (_DF) in the engraving cycle is too short. This means that the text for engraving is longer than the specified text length.
  • Page 367
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.5 Cycle alarms Remedy: Swivel CYCLE800: Check transfer parameter _FR. Value range 0 to 8 61184 [Channel %1: ] Block %2: No solution possible with current input angle values Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label Definitions: The surface defined via the input angle cannot be processed with the machine.
  • Page 368
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.5 Cycle alarms Remedy: Swivel mode direct: check the input values of the rotary axes or commissioning for swivel CYCLE800. Check angular range of rotary axes in swivel data record n: Rotary axis 1: $TC_CARR30[n], $TC_CARR32[n]…
  • Page 369
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.5 Cycle alarms 61195 [Channel %1: ] Block %2: Aligning a turning tool is only possible with active turning tool Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label Definitions: Aligning turning tools is only possible with one active turning tool.
  • Page 370
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.5 Cycle alarms Definitions: No technology cycle was programmed in the machining block. Remedy: Program a technology block. 61203 [Channel %1: ] Block %2: No position cycle Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label Definitions: No positioning cycle was programmed in the machining block.
  • Page 371
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.5 Cycle alarms Remedy: Repeat block search. 61211 [Channel %1: ] Block %2: Absolute reference missing Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label Definitions: An incremental indication was made, but the absolute reference is unknown.
  • Page 372
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.5 Cycle alarms 61219 [Channel %1: ] Block %2: Tool radius too large Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label Definitions: The tool radius is too large for machining. Remedy: Select a suitable tool.
  • Page 373
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.5 Cycle alarms 61227 [Channel %1: ] Block %2: Target position cannot be reached: %4 Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label Definitions: The target position of the approach motion is outside the software limit switch. This situation may arise from swiveling or coordinate rotations.
  • Page 374
    %2 = Block number, label Definitions: The direction of the next machining is unknown. Remedy: Please contact the responsible Siemens regional office. 61239 [Channel %1: ] Block %2: Tool change point lies within retraction area! Parameters: %1 = Channel number…
  • Page 375
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.5 Cycle alarms 61241 [Channel %1: ] Block %2: Retraction plane not defined for this machining direction Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label Definitions: No retraction plane has been defined for the selected machining direction.
  • Page 376
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.5 Cycle alarms 61249 [Channel %1: ] Block %2: Number of edges too small Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label Definitions: The number of edges is too small. Remedy: Increase number of edges.
  • Page 377
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.5 Cycle alarms 61257 [Channel %1: ] Block %2: incomplete setup of counterspindle Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label Definitions: Setup of the counterspindle is incomplete. Remedy: The following machine and setting data must be set for the counterspindle:…
  • Page 378
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.5 Cycle alarms 61264 [Channel %1: ] Block %2: Chained ShopTurn program blocks not permissible in subprogram on pos. pattern Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label Definitions: If a subroutine is called from a position pattern, the subroutine itself must not include a position pattern.
  • Page 379
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.5 Cycle alarms 61272 %[[Channel %1: ] Block %2: %]Insertion depth too small Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label Definitions: Insertion depth on chamfering too small. Remedy: Increase the insertion depth. 61273…
  • Page 380
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.5 Cycle alarms 61280 [Channel %1: ] Block %2: %4- Mirroring missing in work offset for counterspindle Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label Definitions: The work offset for counterspindle machining does not have Z mirroring.
  • Page 381
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.5 Cycle alarms 61288 [Channel %1: ] Block %2: Main spindle not set up Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label Definitions: Remedy: Set up main spindle in MD52206 $MCS_AXIS_USAGE. 61289 [Channel %1: ] Block %2: Counterspindle not set up…
  • Page 382
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.5 Cycle alarms 61296 [Channel %1: ] Block %2: Blank programmed incorrectly Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label Definitions: The blank has been programmed incorrectly. Remedy: Correct the blank. 61297 [Channel %1: ] Block %2: Reference for incremental retraction plane missing…
  • Page 383
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.5 Cycle alarms Remedy: For 840D sl — up to SW 2.6 SP1 and for 828D — up to SW 4.3: — Check setpoint value and parameter _TSA For 840D sl — as from SW 2.7 and for 828D — as from SW 4.4:…
  • Page 384
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.5 Cycle alarms 61309 [Channel %1: ] Block %2: Check probe type Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label Definitions: Remedy: Measurement of workpiece: Check tool type of measuring probe in TOOLMAN. When measuring workpiece milling, it is preferred to use tool types 710, 712, 713 or 714. But a type 1xy can also be used.
  • Page 385
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.5 Cycle alarms Measure tool: Tool type impermissible for calibration (adjustment) of the tool probe. 61315 [Channel %1: ] Block %2: Check position of cutting edge Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label Definitions: When measuring the workpiece in turning, cutting edge positions 7 and 8 are allowed for probe type 580.
  • Page 386
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.5 Cycle alarms 61321 [Channel %1: ] Block %2: Check WO memory number Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label Definitions: Remedy: For 840D sl — up to SW 2.6 SP1 and for 828D — up to SW 4.3: — Check parameter _KNUM For 840D sl — as from SW 2.7 and for 828D — as from SW 4.4:…
  • Page 387
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.5 Cycle alarms — Check the actual pre-position of the workpiece probe with reference to the entered inner or outer measurement. 61327 [Channel %1: ] Block %2: Program reset required Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label Definitions: NC reset required.
  • Page 388
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.5 Cycle alarms Definitions: Remedy: Parameter _CALNUM is too large, reduce it to a permissible value For 840D sl — up to SW 1.x: — Increase the maximum value of _CVAL[2] in GUD6 For 840D sl/828D — as from SW 2.5:…
  • Page 389
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.5 Cycle alarms Remedy: For 840D sl — up to SW 1.x: Check parameter _SPEED[0] in GUD6 For 840D sl/828D — as from SW 2.5: Check setting data 55630 $SCS_MEA_FEED_RAPID_IN_PERCENT For 840D sl/828D — as from SW 4.4: Check setting data 55632 $SCS_MEA_FEED_RAPID_IN_PERCENT…
  • Page 390
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.5 Cycle alarms Remedy: For 840D sl — up to SW 2.6 SP1 and for 828D — up to SW 4.3: : — Parameter _SETV[0] or _SETV[1] is empty or less than 0. For 840D sl — as from SW 2.7 and for 828D — as from SW 4.4: : — Parameter X1 or X2 is empty or less than 0.
  • Page 391
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.5 Cycle alarms Remedy: Check parameter _PROTNAME[1] 61353 [Channel %1: ] Block %2: Path for logfile not found Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label channel number Definitions: The specified directory does not exist or the specified path is incorrect.
  • Page 392
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.5 Cycle alarms Definitions: Cycle CYCLE106 was called by an incorrect parameter. Remedy: Check cycle call for CYCLE106, specifically the call parameter. 61361 [Channel %1: ] Block %2: Variable cannot be recorded Parameters: %1 = Channel number…
  • Page 393
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.5 Cycle alarms 61367 [channel %1: ] block %2: parameters %4 are identical Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label channel number Definitions: Remedy: For 840D sl — up to SW 2.6 SP1 and for 828D — up tp SW 4.3: — Specify different positions for the relevant points of _SETV[0…7]…
  • Page 394
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.5 Cycle alarms Definitions: Remedy: — Check configuration/parameterization of the spindle axis — If the intention to use a 3D workpiece probe at a «non-SPOS capable spindle», then check the setting of MD 52207 $MCS_AXIS_USAGE_ATTRIB[n], bit 9 (also see Commissioning instructions,…
  • Page 395
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.5 Cycle alarms Remedy: Check the following machine or setting data: 51781 $MNS_MEA_T_PROBE_THICKNESS[n] 61381 [Channel %1: ] Block %2: Coupling the spindle position with coordinate rotation around Z not executable Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label channel number Definitions: The alarm relates to the cross-measuring tasks measuring cycle function «Coupling of spindle position with coordinate…
  • Page 396
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.5 Cycle alarms Definitions: Remedy: For 840D sl — up to SW 2.6 SP1 and for 828D — up to SW 4.3: — Check parameter _DLNUM For 840D sl — as from SW 2.7 and for 828D — as from SW 4.4: — Check parameter DL Check the number of the sum offset and that of the setup offset.
  • Page 397
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.5 Cycle alarms 61414 [Channel %1: ] Block %2 : distortion of triangle over limit Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label channel number Definitions: Remedy: Check the setpoint and actual values 61415…
  • Page 398
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.5 Cycle alarms 61420 [Channel %1: ] Block %2: Check calibration of multi/mono probes. Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label channel number Definitions: Remedy: The workpiece probe must be calibrated according to its type and use.
  • Page 399
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.5 Cycle alarms 61425 [Channel %1: ] Block %2: Parameter for measuring axis rotary axis 1 or 2 incorrect — Error code: %4 Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label channel number Definitions:…
  • Page 400
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.5 Cycle alarms 4. Error code = D -> Rotary axis 1 not rotated for the 2nd or 3rd measurement with reference to the 1st measurement- > see parameter_OVR[60 to 62] 61430 [Channel %1: ] Block %2: Kinematic vectors not computed — Error code: %4…
  • Page 401
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.5 Cycle alarms Definitions: Remedy: For 840D sl — up to SW 2.6 SP1 and for 828D — up to SW 4.3: — Check the value in the parameter advance angle _INCA! — If 3-point measurement is selected, _INCA must not be greater/less than +/-120°, and with 4-point measurement _INCA must not be greater/less than +/-90°.
  • Page 402
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.5 Cycle alarms 61503 [Channel %1: ] Block %2: tool nose radius compensation left or right Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label channel number Definitions: Remedy: A tool offset value has to be programmed…
  • Page 403
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.5 Cycle alarms 61511 [Channel %1: ] Block %2: Incorrect shoulder position or tool edge D1/D2 Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label channel number Definitions: Remedy: 61512 [Channel %1: ] Block %2: Incorrect longitudinal position…
  • Page 404
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.5 Cycle alarms 61520 [Channel %1: ] Block %2: Additional offsets not set Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label channel number Definitions: Remedy: Set MD18094 MM_NUM_CC_TDA_PARAM=10 61521 [Channel %1: ] Block %2: Current grinding wheel too wide…
  • Page 405
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.5 Cycle alarms 61529 [Channel %1: ] Block %2: Dimensional notation INCH programmed Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label channel number Definitions: Remedy: Basic system MD $MN_SCALING_SYSTEM_IS_METRIC does not correspond to programmed G command (G group 13).
  • Page 406
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.5 Cycle alarms 61543 [Channel %1: ] Block %2: Incorrect dresser selected when selecting the dresser coordinate system Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label channel number Definitions: Remedy: A dresser number >0 and <4 must be selected…
  • Page 407
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.5 Cycle alarms 61556 [Channel %1: ] Block %2: Impossible chamfer and radius of left edge of wheel Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label channel number Definitions: Remedy: Check values in grinding wheel data…
  • Page 408
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.5 Cycle alarms 61564 %[[Channel %1: ] Block %2: %]Feed insertion is smaller than or equal to zero Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label channel number Definitions: Remedy: Check values in grinding wheel data…
  • Page 409
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.5 Cycle alarms 61605 [Channel %1: ] Block %2: Contour incorrectly programmed Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label Definitions: Illegal relief cut element detected. Remedy: Check contour program. 61606 [Channel %1: ] Block %2: Error during contour preparation…
  • Page 410
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.5 Cycle alarms — It is not permissible that rotation is active. If required, deselect thread synchronization. 61613 [Channel %1: ] Block %2: Undercut position incorrectly defined Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label…
  • Page 411
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.5 Cycle alarms 61620 [Channel %1: ] Block %2: %4-Mirroring for the linear axis of the counter spindle not permitted Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label Definitions: It is not permissible that the linear axis of the counterspindle machining has Z mirroring.
  • Page 412
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.5 Cycle alarms 61700 %[[Channel %1: ] Block %2: %]Name of program to be generated is missing Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label Definitions: Remedy: — Check parameter PRG 61701 %[[Channel %1: ] Block %2: %]Contour %4 does not exist…
  • Page 413
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.5 Cycle alarms 61708 %[[Channel %1: ] Block %2: %]Too many contours specified Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label Definitions: Remedy: — Check number of contours — Max. two contours (machined part and blank contours) — Min.
  • Page 414
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.5 Cycle alarms 61731 %[[Channel %1: ] Block %2: %]Unable to determine contour direction Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label Definitions: Remedy: — Check contours — Check whether the contour starting point exists…
  • Page 415
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.5 Cycle alarms Remedy: — Check cutting edge position in tool management 61739 %[[Channel %1: ] Block %2: %]Blank must be closed contour Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label Definitions: Remedy: — Check whether the blank contour is closed…
  • Page 416
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.5 Cycle alarms Definitions: Remedy: — Check if two-channel cutting is active simultaneously in more than two channels. — Two channels only may be active simultaneously: a guide and a following channel. 61747 %[[channel %1: ] block %2: %]Incorrect guide channel for two-channel cutting (%4)
  • Page 417
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.5 Cycle alarms 61754 %[[channel %1: ] block %2: %]Tool radii must have same size for rough cutting Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label Definitions: Remedy: — Check if tool radii have the same size in guide and following channel.
  • Page 418
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.5 Cycle alarms 61802 [Channel %1: ] Block %2: Wrong axis type Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label Definitions: The programmed axis is assigned to a spindle Remedy: 61803 [Channel %1: ] Block %2: Programmed axis not available…
  • Page 419
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.5 Cycle alarms 61810 [Channel %1: ] Block %2: ISO G code not possible Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label Definitions: In the call block an impermissible ISO axis name was programmed.
  • Page 420
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.5 Cycle alarms Definitions: Remedy: 61819 [Channel %1: ] Block %2: Risk of collision on retraction: tool violates programmed contour Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label Definitions: With G70 in ISO mode, the contour is violated during retraction to the starting point.
  • Page 421
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.5 Cycle alarms Remedy: 52212 $MCS_FUNCTION_MASK_TECH Bit 6: work offset value WO cannot be entered as absolute value (ShopTurn). 61857 [Channel %1: ] Block %2: No rotary axis to accept a blank has been set up…
  • Page 422
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.5 Cycle alarms 61864 [Channel %1: ] Block %2: The selection, tailstock yes/no must be identical in all channels Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label Definitions: The selection, tailstock yes/no in the program header must be identical in all channels.
  • Page 423
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.5 Cycle alarms Remedy: — Check contour call — Check whether the contours exist in the program storage (workpieces, subroutines or part programs) 61902 %[[Channel %1: ] Block %2: %]Label %4 not existing in the pocket contour…
  • Page 424
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.5 Cycle alarms 61910 %[[Channel %1: ] Block %2: %]Error in the blank contour %4 Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label Definitions: Remedy: — Check programming of the blank contour 61911 %[[Channel %1: ] Block %2: %]Error in island contour %4…
  • Page 425
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.5 Cycle alarms 61918 %[[Channel %1: ] Block %2: %]Cut. radius for residual mach. must be smaller than cut. radius for ref. tool Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label Definitions: Remedy: — Check cutter radius for residual machining which must be smaller than cutter radius for reference tool !
  • Page 426
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.5 Cycle alarms Remedy: — Modify contour programming 61935 %[[Channel %1: ] Block %2: %]Programming of inch/metric measuring system not allowed here Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label Definitions: Remedy: — Modify contour programming…
  • Page 427
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.5 Cycle alarms 61942 %[[Channel %1: ] Block %2: %]Helix violates contour Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label Definitions: Remedy: — Check helix radius and reduce in size, if possible 61943 %[[Channel %1: ] Block %2: %]Approach/retract motion violates contour…
  • Page 428
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.5 Cycle alarms Definitions: Remedy: — Check programming of the island/pocket contour 61950 %[[Channel %1: ] Block %2: %]No residual material available Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label Definitions: Remedy: 61951 %[[Channel %1: ] Block %2: %]Cutter radius for residual material too large…
  • Page 429
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.5 Cycle alarms Definitions: Remedy: 62103 [Channel %1: ] Block %2: No finishing allowance programmed Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label Definitions: No finishing allowance is programmed, although it is necessary for this machining.
  • Page 430
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.5 Cycle alarms 62181 [Channel %1: ] Block %2: Set rotary axis %4 [deg] Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label Definitions: Sample display of the swivel angle to be set for a manual rotary axis in CYCLE800: 62181 «Set rotary axis B: 32.5 [grd]»…
  • Page 431
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.5 Cycle alarms 62200 [Channel %1: ] Block %2: Start spindle Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label Definitions: Stop prior to thread machining, as the spindle is in stop position. Remedy: Start the tool spindle before machining the thread.
  • Page 432
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.5 Cycle alarms 62306 [Channel %1: ] Block %2: Permissible measuring difference exceeded Parameters: %1 = Channel number %2 = Block number, label channel number Definitions: Remedy: The difference between actual and setpoint value is larger than tolerance parameter _TDIF, tool data are not corrected.
  • Page 433
    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.5 Cycle alarms Definitions: Remedy: Check _PROTFORM[0] in the program. 62314 [Channel %1: ] Block %2: Traverse path limitation via software end position, collision detection activated, continue with NC START / cancel with RESET. Parameters: %1 = Channel number…
  • Page 434: Plc User Alarms

    SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED alarms 3.6 PLC user alarms Remedy: Measurement of the individual edges shows that the specified number of edges lies outside the dimensional difference. A decision has to be made: whether or not one can continue working with this tool.

  • Page 435: System Responses

    System responses System reactions to SINUMERIK alarms Identifier COMPBLOCKWITHREORG Effects Block preparation has detected an error, which can be rectified by modifying the program. Reorganization is performed after a program modification. • Correction block with reorganization. Identifier COMPENSATIONBLOCK Effects Block preparation has detected an error, which can be rectified by modifying the program. •…

  • Page 436
    System responses 4.1 System reactions to SINUMERIK alarms Identifier NOREADY | BAGREACTIONVIEW Effects Mode group ready off: Active fast braking (i.e. with maximum braking current) of the drives in this mode group, the controller enable of the NC axes involved is deleted. •…
  • Page 437
    System responses 4.1 System reactions to SINUMERIK alarms Identifier SHOWALARMAUTO Effects The alarm is displayed whenever bit 0 of machine data ENABLE_ALARM_MASK is set. The reaction should be set whenever an alarm should only occur during automatic mode without manual operation by the user.
  • Page 438: Cancel Criteria For Alarms

    System responses 4.2 Cancel criteria for alarms Cancel criteria for alarms Identifier CANCELCLEAR Effects The alarm is cleared in any channel when the Cancel key is pressed. It is also cleared by the Start part program key. • Clear the alarm with the «ALARM CANCEL» key or with the «CYCLE START» key. Identifier CLEARHIMSELF Effects…

  • Page 439: Sinamics V70 Alarms

    SINAMICS V70 alarms Overview of alarms Differences between faults and alarms The differences between faults and alarms are as follows: Type Description Faults What happens when a fault occurs? • If the servo motor is running, it stops running. • If the servo motor is not running, it cannot run.

  • Page 440
    SINAMICS V70 alarms 5.1 Overview of alarms Fault acknowledgements The acknowledgement methods for faults are specified as follows: Acknowledgement Description POWER ON The fault is acknowledged by a POWER ON (switch servo drive off and on again). NOTE: If this action has not eliminated the fault cause, the fault is displayed again immediately after power-on.
  • Page 441: Common Faults And Alarms

    SINAMICS V70 alarms 5.2 Common faults and alarms Status indicator Color Status Description Communication with CNC is not active Green Flash at 0.5 Hz Communication with CNC is active Flash at 2 Hz SD card operating (read or write) Continuously lit Communication with CNC is in error Common faults and alarms This section lists common faults and alarms that may occur on the SINAMICS V70.

  • Page 442
    SINAMICS V70 alarms 5.2 Common faults and alarms Fault Cause Remedy F1018: Booting has been Module booting was interrupted several • Carry out a POWER ON (power off/on). interrupted several times times. As a consequence, the module After switching on, the module reboots from boots with the factory setting.
  • Page 443
    SINAMICS V70 alarms 5.2 Common faults and alarms Fault Cause Remedy F7011: Motor • • Motor overloaded Reduce the motor load. overtemperature • • Motor ambient temperature too high Check the ambient temperature and the Reaction: OFF2 motor ventilation. • Wire breakage or sensor not connected •…
  • Page 444
    SINAMICS V70 alarms 5.2 Common faults and alarms Fault Cause Remedy F7412: Commutation angle An incorrect commutation angle was • If the encoder mounting was changed, re- incorrect (motor model) detected that can result in a positive adjust the encoder. coupling in the speed controller.
  • Page 445
    SINAMICS V70 alarms 5.2 Common faults and alarms Fault Cause Remedy F7452: Following error too The difference between the position Check the causes and resolve. high setpoint position actual value (following error dynamic model) is greater than the Reaction: OFF1 tolerance.
  • Page 446
    SINAMICS V70 alarms 5.2 Common faults and alarms Fault Cause Remedy F7995: Pole position The pole position identification routine was Contact the Hotline. identification not successful unsuccessful. Reaction: OFF2 Acknowledgement: IMMEDIATELY • F30001: Power unit: The power unit has detected an Check the motor data — if required, carry out Overcurrent overcurrent condition.
  • Page 447
    SINAMICS V70 alarms 5.2 Common faults and alarms Fault Cause Remedy F30011: Line phase failure in At the power unit, the DC link voltage ripple • Check the main circuit fuses. main circuit has exceeded the permissible limit value. • Check whether a single-phase load is Reaction: OFF2 Possible causes:…
  • Page 448
    SINAMICS V70 alarms 5.2 Common faults and alarms Fault Cause Remedy F30036: Internal The temperature inside the drive converter • Check whether the fan is running. overtemperature has exceeded the permissible temperature • Check the fan elements. limit. Reaction: OFF2 •…
  • Page 449
    SINAMICS V70 alarms 5.2 Common faults and alarms Fault Cause Remedy F52980: Absolute encoder The servo motor with absolute encoder is The servo motor will be automatically motor changed changed. Actual motor ID is different from configured after the acknowledgement of this commissioned motor ID.
  • Page 450
    SINAMICS V70 alarms 5.2 Common faults and alarms A1032: All parameters The parameters of an individual drive object Save all parameters. must be saved were saved, although there is still no backup of all drive system parameters. The saved object-specific parameters are not loaded the next time that the system powers For the system to successfully power up, all of the parameters must have been completely…
  • Page 451
    SINAMICS V70 alarms 5.2 Common faults and alarms A7991: Motor data The motor data ident. routine is activated. The alarm automatically disappears after the identification activated motor data identification routine has been The motor data identification routine is carried successfully completed. out at the next power-on command.
  • Page 452
    SINAMICS V70 alarms 5.2 Common faults and alarms Diagnostics Manual Diagnostics Manual, 08/2013, 6FC5398-6DP10-0BA1…
  • Page 453: Data Backup

    Data backup Overview of internal/external data backup You can back up user data internally or externally on the control system. Note Archiving/data backup It is recommended that you regularly back up the internal SINUMERIK memory on a USB stick. You can transfer the backed up data to the SINUMERIK later on. In this way you can restore the previous status of the unit.

  • Page 454
    Data backup 6.2 Internal data backup Note While making an internal data backup, you must neither operate nor turn off the control system. Loading internally backed-up data To load the internally backed-up data, proceed as follows: Select the desired operating area. Open the window for selecting the start up modes.
  • Page 455: External Data Backup

    Data backup 6.3 External data backup External data backup 6.3.1 External data backup in a data archive Operating sequence Select the desired operating area. Press this softkey to open the window for creating or restoring a start-up archive. There are three options for creating a data archive: ①…

  • Page 456
    Data backup 6.3 External data backup ① The following takes option as an example, and the name of the data archive is «arc_series.arc» by default. You can use your favourite name for it. Select your desired folder and press the following key to open it: Press this softkey to confirm and the archive information dialog opens.
  • Page 457: External Data Backup Of Files

    Data backup 6.3 External data backup 6.3.2 External data backup of files Operating sequence Select the desired operating area. Press this horizontal softkey to open the system data window. Three folders and one file are available in this window. Select a desired folder and press this key to open it. Select the file that you desire to back up, and press this softkey.

  • Page 458: External Data Backup In Case Of Backlight Failure

    To enable the RS232 communication between a controller and a PC/PG, you must have the RS232 communication tool SinuComPCIN installed on your PC/PG. You can get this tool from the SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED Toolbox. Data transferring with an RS232 cable and communication settings Proceed as follows to transfer data via the RS232 interface: Connect the control system with the PC/PG using an RS232 cable.

  • Page 459
    Data backup 6.3 External data backup Use this key to set the values in the following window as required: Press this softkey to save your settings. If desired, you can press the following softkey to reset the settings to defaults: Return to the RS232 main screen.
  • Page 460: External Data Backup Through The Ethernet Interface

    Ethernet connection between a controller and a PC/PG (refer to Section «Configuring the Ethernet connection (Page 46)»). This tool is available in the SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED Toolbox and is supported by Windows XP/Vista/Win 7. For more information about the AMM tool, refer to the SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED Commissioning Manual.

  • Page 461
    Data backup 6.3 External data backup Operating sequence: Open the main screen of the AMM tool on your PC. Select a desired file to be backed up (for example, Test.mpf) from the NC file system. Copy the program file with the toolbar button , keyboard shortcuts (Ctrl + C), or from the context menu.
  • Page 462: Loading Externally Backed-Up Data

    Data backup 6.3 External data backup Operating sequence: Select the desired operating area on the PPU. Navigate to the NC file that you desire to back up, and copy it to the buffer memory on the control system with this softkey. Press this softkey to view the network drive(s) created.

  • Page 463
    Data backup 6.3 External data backup Loading separate files Select the desired operating area. Press this softkey to open the system data window. Press a softkey according to the backup path of the file. Find the file backed up and press this softkey. For the RS232 directory, press the following softkey instead: Press this softkey.
  • Page 464
    Data backup 6.3 External data backup Diagnostics Manual Diagnostics Manual, 08/2013, 6FC5398-6DP10-0BA1…
  • Page 465: Updating Software

    Updating software You can update the control system using a USB stick connected via the USB interface at the front of the control system. Note You must back up the data of the control system (NC/PLC/HMI) before you start the update! For information about the data back-up, see section «Data backup (Page 453)».

  • Page 466
    Updating software The update process has been completed when these two error messages appear. Press this key or the key combination below to clear the alarms. → Diagnostics Manual Diagnostics Manual, 08/2013, 6FC5398-6DP10-0BA1…
  • Page 467
    Appendix A List of abbreviations Abbreviation Source of abbreviation Meaning ASCII American Standard Code for Information American coding standard for the exchange of Interchange information AUTO Operating mode «Automatic» ASUP Asynchronous subprogram AUXFU Auxiliary Function Auxiliary function Binary file Computerized Numerical Control Computerized numerical control Central Processing Unit Central processing unit…
  • Page 468
    Appendix A Abbreviation Source of abbreviation Meaning Ladder Diagram Ladder diagram Light Emitting Diode Light emitting diode Local User Data Local user data Machine Control Panel Machine control panel Machine Data Machine data Manual Data Automatic Manual input Machine Coordinate System Machine coordinate system Main Program File Main program (NC part program)
  • Page 469
    Appendix A Abbreviation Source of abbreviation Meaning Smooth approach and retraction Work Workpiece coordinate system Tool Tool Tool Length Compensation Tool length compensation Tool Change Tool change Tool Management Tool management Diagnostics Manual Diagnostics Manual, 08/2013, 6FC5398-6DP10-0BA1…
  • Page 470
    Appendix A Diagnostics Manual Diagnostics Manual, 08/2013, 6FC5398-6DP10-0BA1…
  • Page 471: Index

    Index System reactions to SINUMERIK alarms, 435 Cancel criteria for alarms, 438 update the control system, 465 Uploading backed-up data, 462 Data Backup Internal, 453 External data backup of files, 457 General information about faults and alarms Differences between faults and alarms, 439 Fault acknowledgements, 440 Fault reactions, 439 List of abbreviations, 467…

  • Page 472
    Index Diagnostics Manual Diagnostics Manual, 08/2013, 6FC5398-6DP10-0BA1…

Legal information

Warning notice system

This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent

damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert

symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are

graded according to the degree of danger.

DANGER

indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.

WARNING

indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.

CAUTION

indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.

NOTICE

indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.

If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will be

used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to property

damage.

Qualified Personnel

The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific

task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions. Qualified

personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and avoiding

potential hazards when working with these products/systems.

Proper use of Siemens products

Note the following:

WARNING

Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical

documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended or

approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and

maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible

ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed.

Trademarks

All names identified by ® are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication

may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner.

Disclaimer of Liability

We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software described.

Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the information in

this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent editions.

Siemens AG

Division Digital Factory

Postfach 48 48

90026 NÜRNBERG

GERMANY

Order number: 6FC5398-6DP10-0BA2

Ⓟ 06/2015 Subject to change

Copyright © Siemens AG 2015.

All rights reserved

Последние добавленные макеты

Слова Love (любовь)

Слова Love (любовь)

Приглашение резное из бумаги

Приглашение резное из бумаги

Колесо для Хомяка

Колесо для Хомяка

Гамак лежак для кошек и собак

Гамак лежак для кошек и собак

Макеты брелоков "Гос-Номер", дерево и кожа

Макеты брелоков «Гос-Номер», дерево и кожа

Макет нард для лазерного ЧПУ станка

Макет нард для лазерного ЧПУ станка

Смотреть все

  • Ремонт SINUMERIK 808D
  • Ошибки SINUMERIK 808D
  • Обзор ошибок циклов SINUMERIK 808D
  • Сообщения циклов SINUMERIK 808D
  • SINUMERIK 808D программирование
  • SINUMERIK 808D ввод в эксплуатацию
  • О SINUMERIK 808D
  • Оставить заявку на ремонт или программирование SINUMERIK 808D

Ремонт SINUMERIK 808DКомпания «Кернел» производит ремонт ЧПУ с 2002 года. За это время мы накопили колоссальный опыт в том числе опыт в ремонте SINUMERIK 808D такого известного производителя как SIEMENS. Ремонт подобной промышленной электроники ответственное и сложное занятие, требующие максимальной отдачи, профессионализма и максимально полной материальной базе.

Ремонт SINUMERIK 808D в Гями производится как в сервисном центре, так и с выездом специалиста на территорию заказчика. SINUMERIK 808D является крайне сложной промышленной электроникой соответственно ремонт SINUMERIK 808D можно доверить только настоящим профессионалам своего дела с богатым опытом работы в данном направлении.

Все специалисты нашего сервисного центра имеют высшее техническое образование, огромный опыт и максимально полную материальную базу включая новейшее высокотехнологичное диагностическое оборудование благодаря чему ремонт SINUMERIK 808D проходит максимально эффективно.

Ремонт SINUMERIK 808DИнженеры сервисного центра уделяют максимальное внимание к качеству исполнения ремонта, программирования и настройке ЧПУ, не зависимо от производителя данного промышленного оборудования. Именно поэтому мы смело даем гарантию на ремонт SINUMERIK 808D и замененные в процессе ремонта компоненты шесть месяцев.

Особое внимание заслуживает тот факт, что ремонт SINUMERIK 808D в Гями производится исключительно с использованием оригинальных запасных частей, на компонентном уровне с применением высокотехнологичного оборудования, квалифицированным персоналом с инженерным образованием.

Если на вашем производстве появились проблемы с ЧПУ SINUMERIK 808D, которые вы не можете решить самостоятельно, мы всегда рады вам помочь. Обращайтесь в сервисный центр «Кернел». Специалисты нашей компании в минимальные сроки проведут глубокую диагностику ЧПУ и последующий ремонт SINUMERIK 808D в Гями. Оставьте аявку на ремонт ЧПУ используя форму на сайте.

Ошибки SINUMERIK 808D

Сообщения об ошибках SINUMERIK 808D и обработка ошибок

При возникновении ошибок при выполнении циклов выдается сигнал и выполнение цикла прерывается. Кроме того, сообщения циклов выводятся в строке сообщений СЧПУ. Эти сообщения не прерывают выполнение программы. Ошибки с их действием и сообщениями в строке сообщений СЧПУ описаны совместно с описанием конкретных циклов.

Обработка ошибок SINUMERIK 808D в циклах

В циклах генерируются сообщения об ошибках с номерами от 61000 до 62999. Диапазон номеров, в свою очередь, снова делится в соответствии с реакциями на ошибки и критериями отмены. Текст ошибки, который отображается вместе с номером ошибки, предоставляет более подробную информацию о причине ошибки.

Номер ошибки

Критерий сброса

Реакция на ошибку

61000 … 61999

NC_RESET

Подготовка кадра в СЧПУ прервана

62000 … 62999

Кнопка сброса

Прерывается подготовка кадра; цикл может быть продолжен нажатием следующей клавиши на MCP после удаления ошибки:

Обзор ошибок циклов SINUMERIK 808D

Номера ошибок классифицируются следующим образом:

6

_

Х

_

_

  • X=0 Общие ошибки циклов
  • X=1 Ошибки, возникшие при сверлении, фрезеровании
  • X=6 Ошибки, возникшие в циклах токарной обработки

Сообщения циклов SINUMERIK 808D

Сообщения циклов выводятся в строке сообщений СЧПУ. Эти сообщения не прерывают выполнение программы. Сообщения предоставляют информацию относительно поведения циклов хода обработки и, как правило, хранятся за пределами рабочей операции или до конца цикла. Пример сообщения: «Глубина: в соответствии со значением относительной глубины» для всех циклов сверления.

Все ошибки SINUMERIK 808D описаны в руководстве пользователя, которое вы можете скачать с нашего сайта в удобном формате- pdf.

Скачать руководство пользователя (диагностика) SINUMERIK 808D мануал.pdf

Устранение причины ошибки и ее сброс на станке оснащенным системой ЧПУ позволит в кратчайшие сроки возобновить работу. К сожалению не все ошибки можно исправить самостоятельно, некоторые ошибки SINUMERIK 808D возможно исправить только в специализированных сервисных центрах.

SINUMERIK 808D программирование

Программирования SINUMERIK 808DНа ряду с ремонтом, специалисты сервисного центра «Кернел» выполняют программирование SINUMERIK 808D и настройку параметров системы ЧПУ. Подобную услугу мы оказываем не только на территории сервисного центра, также инженер компании может выполнить программирование SINUMERIK 808D на территории заказчика.

Настройка параметров, программирование SINUMERIK 808D является заключительным звеном в процессе ремонта ЧПУ и требует профессионального подхода. Именно финальный этап программирования SINUMERIK 808D наглядно покажет качество выполненного ремонта SINUMERIK 808D.

К слову, мы уделяем особое внимание качеству и смело даем гарантию на все выполненные ремонтно-восстановительные работы шесть месяцев, гарантия так же распространяется на запасные части, которые были заменены в процессе ремонта.

Хочется обратить внимание на то, что мы стараемся провести ремонт и программирование SINUMERIK 808D в максимально сжатые сроки, тем самым минимизируем простой дорогостоящего промышленного оборудования.

Дополнительно можно скачать руководство по программированию SINUMERIK 808D в формате- pdf

Скачать руководство пользователя (программирование) SINUMERIK 808D мануал.pdf

SINUMERIK 808D ввод в эксплуатацию

Ошибки SINUMERIK 808DИнженеры сервисного центра «Кернел» не только выполняют качественный ремонт SINUMERIK 808D и программирование ЧПУ в Гями. Так же мы предоставляем услугу запуска в эксплуатацию оборудования от стадии проектирования до выпуска первой продукции.

Именно этап запуска в эксплуатацию SINUMERIK 808D отвечает за долгий и безаварийный процесс работы промышленного оборудования, тем самым позволяя получить максимальную прибыль и сэкономить на незапланированном ремонте.

По-настоящему качественный ввод в эксплуатацию SINUMERIK 808D может выполнить только высококвалифицированный специалист с богатым опытом работы в данном направлении. Найти подобного специалиста достаточно сложно, но, если вы обращаетесь в наш сервисный центр вам не придется об этом думать.

В нашей команде работают исключительно профессионалы своего дела, а за время существования нашей компании мы ввели в эксплуатацию не одну сотню систем ЧПУ в том числе и SINUMERIK 808D, с каждым разом получая и накапливая драгоценный опыт.

О SINUMERIK 808D

SINUMERIK 808D объединяет в себе качественно сконфигурированную систему ЧПУ предназначенную для работы на фрезерных и токарных станках.

Пример сборки для токарной обработки с помощью SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED T

Описание

Колл-во

Артикул

SINUMERIK CNC

SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED T PPU 160.3 vertical, English layout

1

6FC5370-2BT03-0AA0

SINUMERIK 808D MCP vertical, with handwheel slot, English layout

1

6FC5303-0AF35-3AA0

Stabilized power supply, SITOP PSU200M 24 V DC, 5 A

1

6EP1333-3BA10

RS422 (TTL) incremental encoder, 1024 S/R

1

6FX2001-2EB02

Spring disk coupling, shaft diameter 6 mm/6 mm

1

6FX2001-7KF10

Clamp strap for encoders with Synchro flange

3

6FX2001-7KP01

Pre-assembled bus cable PPU 160.3 – SINAMICS V70, length 5 m

1

6FC5548-0BA20-1AF0

Pre-assembled bus cable SINAMICS V70 – SINAMICS V70, length 0.25 m

2

6FC5548-0BA20-1AA2

Pre-assembled signal cable PPU 160.3 – handwheel, length 1 m

1

6FX8002-2BB01-1AB0

Pre-assembled signal cable PPU 160.3 – incremental spindle encoder (TTL), length 5 m

1

6FX8002-2CD01-1AF0

SINAMICS V70

SINAMICS V70, Irated 3.0 A

1

6SL3210-5DE13-5UA0

SINAMICS V70, Irated 5.3 A

1

6SL3210-5DE17-8UA0

SINAMICS V70 spindle1), Irated 19.6 A

1

6SL3210-5DE22-0UA0

Pre-assembled signal cable SINAMICS V70 – absolute encoder in SIMOTICS S-1FL6 feed motor, length 5 m

2

6FX3002-2DB10-1AF0

Pre-assembled power cable 4 × 1.5 mm2
SINAMICS V70 – SIMOTICS S-1FL6 feed motor, length 5 m

2

6FX3002-5CL02-1AF0

Pre-assembled power cable 4 × 2.5 mm2
SINAMICS V70 – SIMOTICS S-1FL6 feed motor, length 5 m

1

6FX3002-5CL12-1AF0

Pre-assembled brake cable SINAMICS V70 – brake in SIMOTICS S-1FL6 feed motor with holding brake, length 5 m

1

6FX3002-5BL03-1AF0

Pre-assembled signal cable SINAMICS V70 – incremental encoder in M-1PH1, length 5 m

1

6FX3002-2CT30-1AF0

Power cable 4 × 4 mm2, sold by the meter, (optional)2) SINAMICS V70 – SIMOTICS M-1PH1 main spindle motor, length 30 m

1

6FX5008-1BB31-1DA0

SIMOTICS motors

SIMOTICS S-1FL6 feed motor, 4 Nm, 2000 rpm, absolute encoder, plain shaft, without holding brake

1

1FL6061-1AC61-2LG1

SIMOTICS S-1FL6 feed motor, 11 Nm, 2000 rpm, absolute encoder, plain shaft, with holding brake

1

1FL6066-1AC61-2LH1

SIMOTICS M-1PH1 main spindle spindle motor, 53 Nm, 1000 rpm, incremental encoder, plain shaft

1

1PH1105-1LD10-0GA0

Пример сборки для фрезерования с помощью SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED M

Описание

Колл-во

Артикул

SINUMERIK CNC

SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED M PPU 161.3 horizontal, English layout

1

6FC5370-2AM03-0AA0

SINUMERIK 808D MCP horizontal, English layout

1

6FC5303-0AF35-0AA0

Electronic handwheel, with front plate 120 mm × 120 mm, with setting wheel, 5 V DC, RS 422

1

6FC9320-5DB01

Terminal strip converter 50-pole

1

6EP5406-5AA00

Cable set, 50-pole ribbon cable, with insulation displacement connectors, 50-pole

1

6EP5306-5BG00

Stabilized power supply, SITOP PSU200M 24 V DC, 5 A

1

6EP1333-3BA10

Pre-assembled bus cable PPU 161.3 – SINAMICS V70, length 5 m

1

6FC5548-0BA20-1AF0

Pre-assembled bus cable SINAMICS V70 – SINAMICS V70, length 0.25 m

2

6FC5548-0BA20-1AA2

Pre-assembled signal cable PPU 161.3 – handwheel, length 1 m

1

6FX8002-2BB01-1AB0

Pre-assembled signal cable PPU 161.3 – incremental spindle encoder (TTL), length 7 m

1

6FX8002-2CD01-1AH0

SINAMICS V70

SINAMICS V70, Irated 4.6 A

2

6SL3210-5DE16-0UA0

SINAMICS V70, Irated 7.8 A

1

6SL3210-5DE21-0UA0

SINAMICS V70 spindle1), Irated 19.6 A

1

6SL3210-5DE22-0UA0

Pre-assembled signal cable SINAMICS V70 – incremental encoder in SIMOTICS S-1FL6 feed motor, length 10 m

3

6FX3002-2CT12-1BA0

Pre-assembled power cable 4 × 2.5 mm2
SINAMICS V70 – SIMOTICS S-1FL6 feed motor, length 10 m (32.81 ft)

3

6FX3002-5CL12-1BA0

Pre-assembled signal cable SINAMICS V70 – brake in SIMOTICS S-1FL6 feed motor, length 10 m

1

6FX3002-5BL03-1BA0

Pre-assembled signal cable SINAMICS V70 – incremental encoder in M-1PH1, length 10 m

1

6FX3002-2CT30-1BA0

Power cable 4 × 4 mm2, sold by the meter, (optional)2) SINAMICS V70 – SIMOTICS M-1PH1 main spindle motor, length 30 m

1

6FX5008-1BB31-1DA0

SIMOTICS motors

SIMOTICS S-1FL6 feed motor, 8 Nm, 2000 rpm, incremental encoder, plain shaft, without holding brake

2

1FL6064-1AC61-2AG1

SIMOTICS S-1FL6 feed motor, 15 Nm, 2000 rpm, incremental encoder, plain shaft, with holding brake

1

1FL6067-1AC61-2AH1

SIMOTICS M-1PH1 main spindle motor, 48 Nm, 1500 rpm, incremental encoder, plain shaft

1

1PH1105-1LF12-0GA0

SINUMERIK 808D1) Выбор тормозного резистора см. В приводе шпинделя SINAMICS V70.

2) Перечисленные выше 30-метровые силовые кабели (необработанные) можно выбрать для использования с двигателями 1PH1. Вы должны собрать кабель питания с разъемами самостоятельно. Вы также можете выбрать сторонний кабель питания в соответствии с конфигурацией системы.

SINUMERIK 808D выполнен в двух вариантах:

  • Горизонтальное исполнение (SINUMERIK 808D PPU 261.3/PPU 281.3);
  • Вертикальное исполнение (SINUMERIK 808D PPU 260.3/PPU 280.3).

SINUMERIK 808D это моноблочная система ЧПУ, объединяющая в одном устройстве все компоненты СЧПУ:

  • ЧПУ, PLC, HMI;
  • полная клавиатура СЧПУ;
  • регулятор для 6 приводов.

Двигатели могут подключаться напрямую через DRIVE-CLiQ к цифровой приводной системе. В комбинации с модульным исполнением приводной системы SINAMICS S120 получается простая и надежная конструкция с минимальным объемом межкомпонентных соединений.

Обзор соединений SINUMERIK 808D

Обзор соединений SINUMERIK 808D

SINUMERIK 828D

Точно подобранный набор функций системы ЧПУ для стандартных токарных и фрезерных станков отвечает всем требованиям мелко- и крупносерийного производства. Специально подобранные системные параметры для токарной и фрезерной технологии позволяют значительно сократить расходы на ввод станка в эксплуатацию.

Моноблочная система ЧПУ крепится с задней стороны с помощью специальных элементов, входящих в объем поставки.

Линейка промышленной электроники, которую восстанавливают специалисты сервисного центра «Кернел» не имеет ограничений, мы выполняем качественный ремонт промышленной электроники и оборудования абсолютно любых производителей не зависимо от года выпуска и наличия технической документации.

Ниже приведен далеко не полный список ЧПУ SINUMERIK 808D ремонт которых предлагает наш сервисный центр.

6FC5370-2BM03-0AA0

6FC5370-2BM03-0CA0

6FC5370-2BT03-0AA0

6FC5370-2BT03-0CA0

6FC5370-3BM03-0AA0

6FC5370-3BM03-0CA0

6FC5370-3BT03-0AA0

6FC5370-3BT03-0CA0

6FC5303-0AF35-0AA0 SINUMERIK 808D Machine control panel

6FC5303-0AF35-2AA0 SINUMERIK 808D Machine control panel vertical

6FC5303-0AF35-3AA0 SINUMERIK 808D Machine control panel vertical

Оставить заявку на ремонт или программирование SINUMERIK 808D

Оставить заявку на ремонт или программирования SINUMERIK 808D в Гями можно с помощью специальной формы, которая вызывается нажатием одноименной кнопки в верхней части страницы. Все вопросы, связанные с ремонтом SINUMERIK 808D в Гями вы можете задать нашим менеджерам. Связаться с ними можно несколькими способами:

Наши контакты

  • Заказав обратный звонок (кнопка в правом нижнем углу сайта)
  • Посредством чата (кнопка расположена с левой стороны сайта)
  • Позвонив по номеру телефона:
    • +7(8482) 79-78-54;
    • +7(8482) 55-96-39;
    • +7(917) 121-53-01
  • Написав на электронную почту: 89171215301@mail.ru

Вот далеко не полный список производителей промышленной электроники и оборудования, ремонтируемой в нашей компании.

Download Diagnostic manual of Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Cables and connectors, Computer Hardware for Free or View it Online on All-Guides.com.

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 1

1

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 2

2

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 3

3

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 4

4

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 5

5

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 6

6

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 7

7

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 8

8

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 9

9

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 10

10

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 11

11

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 12

12

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 13

13

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 14

14

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 15

15

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 16

16

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 17

17

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 18

18

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 19

19

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 20

20

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 21

21

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 22

22

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 23

23

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 24

24

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 25

25

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 26

26

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 27

27

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 28

28

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 29

29

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 30

30

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 31

31

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 32

32

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 33

33

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 34

34

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 35

35

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 36

36

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 37

37

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 38

38

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 39

39

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 40

40

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 41

41

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 42

42

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 43

43

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 44

44

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 45

45

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 46

46

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 47

47

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 48

48

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 49

49

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 50

50

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 51

51

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 52

52

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 53

53

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 54

54

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 55

55

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 56

56

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 57

57

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 58

58

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 59

59

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 60

60

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 61

61

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 62

62

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 63

63

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 64

64

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 65

65

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 66

66

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 67

67

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 68

68

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 69

69

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 70

70

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 71

71

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 72

72

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 73

73

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 74

74

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 75

75

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 76

76

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 77

77

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 78

78

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 79

79

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 80

80

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 81

81

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 82

82

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 83

83

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 84

84

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 85

85

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 86

86

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 87

87

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 88

88

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 89

89

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 90

90

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 91

91

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 92

92

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 93

93

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 94

94

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 95

95

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 96

96

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 97

97

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 98

98

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 99

99

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 100

100

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 101

101

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 102

102

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 103

103

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 104

104

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 105

105

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 106

106

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 107

107

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 108

108

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 109

109

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 110

110

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 111

111

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 112

112

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 113

113

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 114

114

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 115

115

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 116

116

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 117

117

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 118

118

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 119

119

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 120

120

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 121

121

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 122

122

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 123

123

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 124

124

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 125

125

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 126

126

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 127

127

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 128

128

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 129

129

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 130

130

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 131

131

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 132

132

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 133

133

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 134

134

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 135

135

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 136

136

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 137

137

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 138

138

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 139

139

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 140

140

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 141

141

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 142

142

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 143

143

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 144

144

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 145

145

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 146

146

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 147

147

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 148

148

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 149

149

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 150

150

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 151

151

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 152

152

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 153

153

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 154

154

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 155

155

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 156

156

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 157

157

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 158

158

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 159

159

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 160

160

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 161

161

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 162

162

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 163

163

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 164

164

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 165

165

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 166

166

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 167

167

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 168

168

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 169

169

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 170

170

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 171

171

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 172

172

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 173

173

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 174

174

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 175

175

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 176

176

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 177

177

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 178

178

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 179

179

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 180

180

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 181

181

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 182

182

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 183

183

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 184

184

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 185

185

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 186

186

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 187

187

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 188

188

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 189

189

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 190

190

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 191

191

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 192

192

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 193

193

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 194

194

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 195

195

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 196

196

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 197

197

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 198

198

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 199

199

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 200

200

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 201

201

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 202

202

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 203

203

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 204

204

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 205

205

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 206

206

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 207

207

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 208

208

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 209

209

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 210

210

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 211

211

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 212

212

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 213

213

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 214

214

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 215

215

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 216

216

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 217

217

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 218

218

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 219

219

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 220

220

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 221

221

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 222

222

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 223

223

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 224

224

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 225

225

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 226

226

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 227

227

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 228

228

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 229

229

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 230

230

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 231

231

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 232

232

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 233

233

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 234

234

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 235

235

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 236

236

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 237

237

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 238

238

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 239

239

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 240

240

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 241

241

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 242

242

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 243

243

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 244

244

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 245

245

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 246

246

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 247

247

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 248

248

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 249

249

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 250

250

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 251

251

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 252

252

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 253

253

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 254

254

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 255

255

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 256

256

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 257

257

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 258

258

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 259

259

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 260

260

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 261

261

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 262

262

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 263

263

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 264

264

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 265

265

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 266

266

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 267

267

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 268

268

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 269

269

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 270

270

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 271

271

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 272

272

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 273

273

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 274

274

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 275

275

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 276

276

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 277

277

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 278

278

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 279

279

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 280

280

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 281

281

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 282

282

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 283

283

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 284

284

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 285

285

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 286

286

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 287

287

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 288

288

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 289

289

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 290

290

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 291

291

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 292

292

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 293

293

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 294

294

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 295

295

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 296

296

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 297

297

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 298

298

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 299

299

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 300

300

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 301

301

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 302

302

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 303

303

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 304

304

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 305

305

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 306

306

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 307

307

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 308

308

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 309

309

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 310

310

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 311

311

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 312

312

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 313

313

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 314

314

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 315

315

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 316

316

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 317

317

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 318

318

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 319

319

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 320

320

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 321

321

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 322

322

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 323

323

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 324

324

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 325

325

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 326

326

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 327

327

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 328

328

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 329

329

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 330

330

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 331

331

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 332

332

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 333

333

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 334

334

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 335

335

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 336

336

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 337

337

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 338

338

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 339

339

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 340

340

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 341

341

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 342

342

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 343

343

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 344

344

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 345

345

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 346

346

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 347

347

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 348

348

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 349

349

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 350

350

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 351

351

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 352

352

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 353

353

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 354

354

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 355

355

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 356

356

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 357

357

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 358

358

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 359

359

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 360

360

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 361

361

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 362

362

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 363

363

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 364

364

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 365

365

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 366

366

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 367

367

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 368

368

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 369

369

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 370

370

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 371

371

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 372

372

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 373

373

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 374

374

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 375

375

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 376

376

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 377

377

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 378

378

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 379

379

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 380

380

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 381

381

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 382

382

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 383

383

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 384

384

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 385

385

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 386

386

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 387

387

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 388

388

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 389

389

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 390

390

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 391

391

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 392

392

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 393

393

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 394

394

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 395

395

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 396

396

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 397

397

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 398

398

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 399

399

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 400

400

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 401

401

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 402

402

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 403

403

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 404

404

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 405

405

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 406

406

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 407

407

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 408

408

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 409

409

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 410

410

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 411

411

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 412

412

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 413

413

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 414

414

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 415

415

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 416

416

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 417

417

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 418

418

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 419

419

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 420

420

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 421

421

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 422

422

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 423

423

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 424

424

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 425

425

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 426

426

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 427

427

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 428

428

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 429

429

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 430

430

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 431

431

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 432

432

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 433

433

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 434

434

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 435

435

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 436

436

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 437

437

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 438

438

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 439

439

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 440

440

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 441

441

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 442

442

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 443

443

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 444

444

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 445

445

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 446

446

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 447

447

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 448

448

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 449

449

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 450

450

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 451

451

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 452

452

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 453

453

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 454

454

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 455

455

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 456

456

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 457

457

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 458

458

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 459

459

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 460

460

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 461

461

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 462

462

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 463

463

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 464

464

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 465

465

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 466

466

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 467

467

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 468

468

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 469

469

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 470

470

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 471

471

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 472

472

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 473

473

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 474

474

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 475

475

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 476

476

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 477

477

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 478

478

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 479

479

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 480

480

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 481

481

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 482

482

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 483

483

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 484

484

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 485

485

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 486

486

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 487

487

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 488

488

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 489

489

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 490

490

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 491

491

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 492

492

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 493

493

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 494

494

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 495

495

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 496

496

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 497

497

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 498

498

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 499

499

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 500

500

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 501

501

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 502

502

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 503

503

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 504

504

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 505

505

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 506

506

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 507

507

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 508

508

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 509

509

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 510

510

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 511

511

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 512

512

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 513

513

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 514

514

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 515

515

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 516

516

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 517

517

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 518

518

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 519

519

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 520

520

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 521

521

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 522

522

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 523

523

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 524

524

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 525

525

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 526

526

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 527

527

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 528

528

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 529

529

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 530

530

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 531

531

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 532

532

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 533

533

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 534

534

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 535

535

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 536

536

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 537

537

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 538

538

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 539

539

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 540

540

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 541

541

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 542

542

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 543

543

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 544

544

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 545

545

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 546

546

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 547

547

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 548

548

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 549

549

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 550

550

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 551

551

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 552

552

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 553

553

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 554

554

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 555

555

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 556

556

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 557

557

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 558

558

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 559

559

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 560

560

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 561

561

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 562

562

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 563

563

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 564

564

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 565

565

Siemens SINUMERIK 808D Diagnostic manual - Page 566

566

SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED

Diagnostics Manual

06/2015

6FC5398-6DP10-0BA2

Preface

Fundamental safety

instructions

1

Introduction

2

Operating in the system data

management operating area

3

Operating in the alarm

operating area

4

SINUMERIK 808D

ADVANCED alarms

5

System responses

6

SINAMICS V70 faults and

alarms

7

Data backup

8

Updating software

9

Appendix A

A

Понравилась статья? Поделить с друзьями:
  • Как научиться водить механику с нуля пошаговые инструкции
  • Газовый духовой шкаф гефест 621 03 дгэ инструкция по применению
  • Ко 829а руководство по эксплуатации
  • Сихлор инструкция по применению от тараканов
  • Бисопролол инструкция по применению цена таблетки взрослым от чего помогает